Mazak QT 200 250 Nexus Operating Manual PDF

OPERATING MANUAL
for
QUICK TURN NEXUS

200M/MS
250M/MS
MANUAL No. : U322SG0014E
Serial No. :
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual
to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest
Technical/Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are
required, please contact the nearest Technical/Service Center.
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
such items are in place.
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject
to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest
Technical/Service Center.
5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical/Service Center with the
manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak U.K. Limited
10. 2005-R5
CONSTRUCTION
Part 1 PRELIMINARIES TO MACHINE OPERATION

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Part 2 MACHINE OPERATION

Chapter 1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
Chapter 2 OPERATING PANEL AND FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES
Chapter 3 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION
Chapter 4 MANUAL OPERATION
Chapter 5 PREPARATION FOR MACHINING
Part 3 OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Chapter 1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Chapter 2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
Chapter 3 DATA SETTING METHODS
Chapter 4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS
Chapter 5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP
Chapter 6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION
Chapter 7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS
Chapter 8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
Chapter 9 DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE
Chapter 10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS
Part 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Chapter 1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION EXECUTION
Chapter 2 SELECTING EXECUTION CONDITIONS
Chapter 3 CHANGING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS
Chapter 4 STOPPING AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Chapter 5 MANUAL INTERRUPTION
Chapter 6 OPERATIONS POSSIBLE DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Chapter 7 COMPLETION OF OPERATION
Part 5 APPENDIX
Chapter 1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE
Chapter 2 M-CODE LIST
Chapter 3 ALARM LIST
GC-1
- NOTE -
GC-2 E
PART 1
PRELIMINARIES TO MACHINE
OPERATION
E322S10010E0
CONTENTS
Page
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. 1-1
1-1 List of Manuals to Be Used.................................................................................1-1
1-2 Numbering System for Pages.............................................................................1-1
1-3 Numbering System for Figures and Tables ........................................................1-1
1-4 Distinction between Standard and Optional Specifications.................................1-2
1-5 Revision Code ....................................................................................................1-2
2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Rule ....................................................................................................................2-1
2-2 Basic Safety Items..............................................................................................2-1
2-3 Clothing and Personal Safety .............................................................................2-3
2-4 Safety Items Related to Operation .....................................................................2-4
2-5 Safety Items Related to Gripping Workpiece and Tooling ..................................2-5
2-6 Safety Items Related to Maintenance.................................................................2-6
2-7 Safety Items Related to Workplace ....................................................................2-7
2-8 Safety Items Related to Chip Conveyor..............................................................2-8
2-9 Safety Equipment ...............................................................................................2-9
2-10 Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC........................2-11
2-11 Safety Nameplates ...........................................................................................2-11
C-1
- NOTE -
C-2 E
INTRODUCTION 1
1 INTRODUCTION
1-1 List of Manuals to Be Used

For this machine, the following manuals are provided.
Manual name Coverage

Operating manual All aspects of operation
Maintenance manual All aspects of maintenance, including inspections and adjustment
Programming manual All aspects of CNC programming
Parameter list Detailed description of parameters
Alarm list Detailed description of alarms regarding to CNC
Parts list Part procurement
Electrical wiring diagrams Electrical connections
Operating manual for optional specifications All aspects of operation
1-2 Numbering System for Pages
1. Normal case
2 - 15
Page number in chapter
Chapter number
2. For additional pages to be inserted
3 - 16 - 1
Additional page
1-3 Numbering System for Figures and Tables
1. Figure number
Fig. 3 - 1 Main machine components (1/2)
Chapter Number Title Number of figures with this title, as indicated by the
number of figure in denominator, and the serial number of the figure
chapter within the figures with this title, as indicated by the
numerator.
2. Table number
Table 2 - 1 Safety nameplate details
Chapter Number Title

number of table in
chapter
E322S1A010E0 1-1
1 INTRODUCTION
1-4 Distinction between Standard and Optional Specifications

Items marked with a pentagram () in this manual are standard or optional ones depending on
the destination. Please confirm your machine’s specifications before use while referring to the
following table.
QTN-200M/MS, QTN-250M/MS specifications

{: Standard : Optional —: Unavailable
Item Destination Europe Reference

Operating manual, II,
1-2
TOOL EYE/Air blast {
Maintenance Manual,
5-3
Hollow BB208A0615 { Maintenance Manual,
QTN-200M 5-1
Hollow B-208A615
Hollow B-210A815 {
QTN-250M
Hollow B-210A815X
Chuck
Hollow BB08A0615 {
QTN-200MS
Chuck Hollow B-208A615
Hollow B-210A815 {
QTN-250MS
Hollow B-210A815X
Operating manual, II,
Double foot switch {
3-9
Maintenance Manual,
Chuck clamp/unclamp proximity switch {
5-1-1
Hydraulic safety interlock {
1-5 Revision Code

This manual is revised with each improvement of the product or each modification of its
specifications, and the document number of the manual is correspondingly updated.
Revised sections of the manual are denoted by the revision numbers beginning with R, on the
CONSTRUCTION page facing the back cover page.
Also, all revisions are coded at one of three levels and these revision codes are given between
the corresponding section titles and page numbers on the “Contents” page so that the readers
can readily identify which item has been added, changed, or deleted.
{ {
Updating (modification) number
Revision code: A = Addition

C = Change
D = Deletion
Revision codes only denote the previous and/or current revisions, and the revision codes for
any revisions preceding the previous ones are crossed out from this manual.
A revision record is given at the end of this manual to denote the history of the manual.
1-2 E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2
2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The precautions to be observed to ensure safe operation of the machine are described here.
The machine must not be operated until these precautions have been thoroughly understood.
2-1 Rule
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
states may take place at the user site.
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
2. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
follows:
: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

DANGER
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

life or body.
WARNING
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

machine damage.
CAUTION
2-2 Basic Safety Items
! There are high voltage devices on the electrical control panel, transformer, motors, junction
boxes, and other equipment (with a battery warning mark attached).
DANGER Do not touch any of them under any circumstances.

! Make sure that all doors and safety covers are fitted before switching on the power. If any
door or safety cover is to be removed, first cut off and lock the main breaker.
! Do not power on the machine, with door/protective cover removed.
EGTCGA0045E0 2-1
z Memorize the position of the EMERGENCY STOP button so that you can press it
immediately from any position.
WARNING z To prevent incorrect operation of the machine, carefully check the position of the switches
before operation.
z Take care not to touch any of the switches accidentally while the machine is in operation.
z Under no circumstances touch a rotating workpiece or the tool with your bare hands or any
other object.
z Take care not to catch your fingers in the chuck.
z Whenever you may work inside the machine, be cautious about chips and possible
slippage due to coolant.
z Do not enter the machine unless necessary for maintenance.
z Always switch off the power switch on the operation panel and switch off the main power
breaker if no machine operation is required.
z Switch off the main breaker before cleaning the machine or its peripheral equipment(s).
z Switch off and lock the main breaker before performing maintenance work inside the
machine.
z If more than one operator are using the machine, do not proceed to the next step without
indicating to the other operator(s) that you are about to do so.
z Do not modify the machine in any way that will affect its safety.
z If in the slightest doubt about a procedure, ask the person in charge.
z Do not enter the machine. If it becomes absolutely necessary to enter, lock the main
power breaker at the OFF position. Isolate all other power sources.
z Do not fail to conduct inspection periodically in accordance with the instruction manual.
z Check and make certain that there is nothing interfering in the home direction.
CAUTION z Do not open any doors or safety covers while the machine is in automatic operation.
z After a job has been completed, set up each part of the machine so that it is ready to be
used for the next series of operations.
z If there is a power failure, switch off the main power breaker immediately.
z Do not subject the CNC unit, the operation panel, or the electrical control panel to strong
shocks.
z Do not change the parameter values, volume values, or other electrical setting values
without good reason. If it becomes necessary to change a value, first check that it is safe
to do so, then make a note of the original value so that it can be reset if necessary.
z Do not paint, soil, damage, modify, or remove any of the safety nameplates. If the details
become illegible or if the nameplate is lost, obtain a replacement by sending the part
number stamped at the bottom right-hand corner of the nameplate to Mazak and mount
the replacement in the original position.
2-2
2-3 Clothing and Personal Safety
! Tie back long hair, which could become entangled in drive mechanisms.
! Wear safety equipment (helmet, goggles, safety shoes, etc.) whenever possible.
CAUTION ! Always wear a helmet if there are any overhead obstacles in the work area.
! Always wear a protective mask when machining dust-generating materials.
! Always use safety shoes with steel toecaps and oil-resistant soles.
! Never wear loose or baggy clothing.
! Always completely fasten buttons and hooks on the arms of clothing to avoid the danger of
entanglement in drive mechanisms.
! If you should wear a neck tie or necklace and the like, be careful not to let it roll into the
machine drives.
! Always use gloves when loading or unloading workpieces or tools and when removing
chips from the work area to protect your hands from sharp edges and heat generated
during machining.
! Do not operate the machine while under the influence of drugs with powerful effects,
unprescribed drugs, or alcohol.
! Do not operate the machine if you suffer from dizziness or fainting spells.
2-3
2-4 Safety Items Related to Operation

Do not proceed to operating the machine before completely understanding what is referred to in
the instruction manual.
! The use of inflammable lubricant as coolant is not recommended as it is dangerous and

may cause a fire. If such use is unavoidable, it is the responsibility of management to
ensure a fire extinguisher is readily available as a safety measure. Additionally, if an
WARNING
inflammable lubricant is used, the machine should never perform unmanned operation. An
operator must always be present to ensure safety. The same precautions must be taken
when machining inflammable materials such as magnesium alloy.
! Close all doors and covers of the CNC unit, operation panel, electrical control panel, and
junction boxes to prevent damage from water, chips, and oil.
! Check all electrical cables for damage to prevent accidents due to current leakage or
electric shock.
! Check the safety covers regularly to make sure that they are properly fitted and that they
are not damaged. Repair or replace any damaged covers immediately.
! If the machine door, the cover, or other glass sections are found to be damaged,
immediately stop the machine and replace the damaged sections. Failure to observe this
instruction may result in injury due to the possible flyaway of the chuck jaws or tool during
machining.
When ordering replacement parts from your MAZAK product distributor, refer to the Parts
List and specify the part numbers.
! Do not operate the machine with any of the safety covers removed.
! Do not handle coolant with bare hands since it is liable to cause irritation. Operators with
allergies should take special precautions.
! Do not adjust the coolant nozzles while the machine is in operation.
! Always wear gloves and use a brush to clean chips off the tool tip; never use bare hands.
! Stop all machine operations before mounting or removing a tool.
! When loading workpiece blanks onto or unloading products from machines which do not
have an automatic workpiece changer, make sure that the tool is as far away as possible
from the work area and that it has stopped rotating.
! Do not wipe the workpiece or clear away chips with your hand or with a rag while the tool is
rotating; always stop the machine and use a brush.
! Do not remove or otherwise interfere with safety devices such as stop dogs, limit switches,
or interlocks in order to increase axis travel.
! Always obtain assistance in handling loads beyond your capacity.
! Do not operate fork lifts or cranes or carry out slinging work unless you have undergone
officially approved training.
! When using fork lifts or cranes, make sure that there are no obstructions in the vicinity of
these machines.
! Always use wire rope or slings of a standard suitable for the load to be supported.
! Check slings, chains, hoists, and other lifting gear for defects before use. Repair or replace
defective gear immediately.
! Do not operate the machine during violent thunderstorms.
2-4
z Check that the belts have the correct tension before operating the machine.
z Check jigs and others to make certain that their workpiece clamping bolts are not loose.
CAUTION z Do not operate the switches on the operation panel while wearing gloves as this could
lead to incorrect operation or other mistakes.
z Warm up the spindle and all of the axis feed mechanisms before operation.
z Make certain that mounted tools match with the program-entered tool numbers.
z Check the POSITION display (or SET UP display) for a program number.
z Initially, excute the program with decreased rapid travel in the single-block operation mode
to make certain that no interference takes place.
z Check and make certain that no abnormal noise is produced while cutting.
z Do not allow chips to accumulate during heavy-duty cutting since they become hot and
may catch fire.
z When one series of operations has been completed, switch off the power switch on the
CNC operation panel, switch off the main power breaker, then switch off the factory power
supply.
2-5 Safety Items Related to Gripping Workpiece and Tooling
z Always use tools suitable for the work and which conform to the machine specifications.
z Replace tools quickly, since badly worn tools are a cause of accidents or damage.
WARNING z Before starting the spindle, check that any parts which are bolted or clamped to the chuck
or the steady rest are properly secured.
z The strength of the machine guarding including the window unit has been calculated to
contain the ejection of a chuck jaw when running at the maximum speed of the machine
spindle with chuck diameter and jaw weights as specified for the appropriate machine
type. If heavier chuck jaws are used, it will be necessary to restrict the maximum speed of
the machine spindle. For details see Section 5-2-3 in Part 2 (Operating Manual).
z If the center hole on large bar workpieces is too small, the workpiece could come off when
a load is applied. Make sure that the hole is big enough and that it has the correct angle.
z Do not operate a spindle on which accessories are mounted at above the rated speed.
z If the chuck or the accessory being used is not a product recommended by MAZAK, check
the maximum safe operating speed with the manufacturer.
z Take care not to catch your fingers in the chuck, steady rest and hand.
z Always use the correct lifting gear for heavy chucks, steady rests, hand and workpieces.
z Workpieces heavier than the design data of the machine must not be machined. If an
attempt is made to machine a workpiece heavier than the value obtained by subtracting
the weights of the chucks and jaws from the maximum supporting capacity of the machine,
the workpiece may abruptly fly out to cause a hazardous situation.
z Do not turn power off the machine while the tailstock is holding the workpiece. If the
machine is powered off and then left as it is for a long time, there is a danger of the
workpiece falling since the tailstock will decrease in workpiece holding force.
2-5
! Make sure that the tool length is such that the tool will not interfere with fixtures such as
chucks or other objects.
CAUTION ! Perform a test operation after mounting tools and a workpiece.

! After machining soft jaws, check that they grip the workpiece correctly and that the chuck
pressure is correct.
! Since the tool holders can be mounted from the left or the right, check that the tool holder is
mounted facing the correct direction.
! Do not use a tool measuring device (TOOL EYE or tool length measuring unit) before
making certain that there is nothing interfering.
2-6 Safety Items Related to Maintenance

Do not proceed to a maintenance work before completely understanding what is referred to in
the maintenance manual.
! Always switch off the main power breaker and lock it before carrying out any maintenance
work. This will eliminate the possibility of the machinery being started inadvertently by
someone else.
DANGER
! After the power has been switched off for a short while, check the voltage with a multimeter
or similar instrument to make sure that there is no residual voltage. Also discharge the
capacitors.
! Maintenance work for electrical parts must be carried out by qualified personnel.
! Even if the door of the power control panel is open, the power is not cut off. When working
WARNING inside the power control cabinet or repairing the machine, always switch off the main
breaker and attach a padlock (provided by customers).
! Do not proceed to cleaning the machine and/or its peripherals before locking the main
circuit breaker at the OFF position, with the machine made to completely stop operating.
! Do not proceed to a repair on the machine before shutting off the input air source.
! When carrying out maintenance in high places, always use a suitable ladder or a service
platform and always wear a helmet.
! Keep your fingers clear of belts and pulleys as well as chains and sprockets.
! Always switch off the main power breaker and lock it before replacing bulbs or other
electrical equipment and use products with the same specifications as the original.
! Do not remove or modify overtravel limit switches, interlock limit switches, proximity
switches, or other safety devices.
! Do not start the machine until all of the covers removed for maintenance have been refitted.
! Wipe up any water or oil spills immediately and keep the maintenance area and the
workplace clean and tidy at all times.
! Be absolutely certain to use the specified and standardized parts as replacement or
consumable parts so as to maintain the as-shipped machine specifications. We take no
responsibility for any personal accidents or machine trouble due to inobservance of this
warning.
2-6
! Maintenance work should be carried out by qualified personnel in accordance with the
instructions of the person in charge.
CAUTION ! Read the maintenance manual thoroughly.

! Use only the specified grades of hydraulic oil, lubricating oil, and grease or their
equivalents.
! When changing a fuse, check that the new fuse has the correct rating. (Using a fuse with
too high a rating could result in damage to the equipment.)
! Follow the instructions indicated on the instruction plate concerning the brands of oil to be
used, lubrication points, amount to be used, and oil change intervals.
! If one of the belts in a set has stretched beyond the prescribed limit, change the entire set.
! Do not use compressed air to clean the machine or to remove chips.
! Always use gloves when clearing away chips; never touch chips with bare hands.
! Check the results of the maintenance work in the presence of the person in charge.
2-7 Safety Items Related to Workplace
! Immediately remove all water and oil spills from the floor and dry the floor to prevent
accidents.
WARNING ! Keep combustible materials well away from the work area and any other place where there
are hot chips.
! Always provide sufficient working space and clear access to the machine and peripheral
equipment and store tools and other potential obstacles in a prescribed place away from
the machine.
! Always provide sufficient lighting in the work area.
! Use strong service platforms only and make sure that nothing can slip off them.
! Never place tools or other potentially dangerous objects on top of the headstock, turret, or
covers.
! Make sure that the nominal cross-sectional area of the power supply cable between the
factory power supply switch and the machine main power breaker is such as to enable a
stable supply for operation at the maximum output.
! Protect all cables which will run along the floor from being damaged by chips, since this
could cause short-circuiting.
2-7
2-8 Safety Items Related to Chip Conveyor
! Before carrying out maintenance work or other jobs on the chip conveyor, make sure that
the power supply is turned off and that the conveyor itself is placed in the completely
stopped status. Failure to observe this precaution causes serious personal injury.
WARNING
! During the operation of the chip conveyor, keep hands away from and do not insert any
region of your body into any sections of the conveyor. Failure to observe this precaution
causes serious bodily injury.
2-8
2-9 Safety Equipment
! The machine is provided with various devices for the operator’s safety.
Never cancel any of the devices.
Failure to observe this instruction could result in serious harm to a human life or body.
WARNING
This machine is provided with various safety devices to protect the operator and the machines.
The safety devices include interlock devices and emergency stop switches as well as doors and
covers.
Table 2-1 Location and function of safety devices
No. Location Function

1 Front door (Operator - This door cannot be opened during machining.
door) - The door can only be opened by pressing the UNLOCK button after the machine
has stopped.
- While the door remains open, spindle rotation as well as feed motion are limited
to their safety speed.
2 Control panel door - Opening this door interrupts the main power and stops the machine.
3 Oil pressure monitoring - In the event of an unusual decrease in oil pressure (for the hydraulic unit and
power chuck), the abnormality is detected to stop the machine.
4 Air pressure monitoring - In the event of an unusual decrease in air pressure, the abnormality is detected to
stop the machine.
5 Front door glass - The glass is strong enough to withstand the insert blades or chuck jaws flung
away during machining.
6 Machine outer cover - This cover secures a safety clearance to protect human bodies.
7 Personnel protection - The front door (operator door) is automatically locked in the event of main power
during power interruptions interruptions. The machine does not automatically restart upon power restoration.
8 Protector circuits for - The emergency stop circuit constitutes a duplexed safety protector to cut off
emergency stop power together with the door interlock circuit.
It also has a failure detection function.
E322S1B010E0 2-9
6
7
5
1
3
D322S0018
Fig. 2-1 Location of safety devices (1/2)
3
4
D322S0019
Fig. 2-2 Location of safety devices (2/2)
2-10
2-10 Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC
z Before using the following cutting conditions:

- Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
WARNING Determination Function
- Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function
- Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
Function
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe setup has been taken —
especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.
z Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.
2-11 Safety Nameplates

The machine has safety plates at appropriate positions to give the information to be strictly
followed to ensure safety of operators during operation.
These safety plates must not be colored, stained, damaged, modified, nor detached.
If the letters on the safety plates get blurred or if any of the plates is lost, immediately order the
plate and replace the existing one with new one or affix the new one at the correct position. For
ordering the safety plate, use the part number stamped at the lower right area of the plate. The
part number is also found in the Mechanical Parts List.
7
6 6
3
4
2
9
1 D322S0020
Fig. 2-3 Location of safety nameplates (1/2)
2-11
D322S0021
Fig. 2-4 Location of safety nameplates (2/2)
The nameplates indicated above may not all be mounted on an actual machine (see the
following table).
Table 2-2 List of safety nameplates for QTN-200M/MS and -250M/MS
No. Description Parts No.

1 General safety instructions — 25626328232
2 Danger sign for terminal box DANGER 33116228032
3 Warning about each unit WARNING 23116228142
4 Integrated warning plate WARNING 23116228252
5 Warning about chip conveyor WARNING 33116228381
6 Warning about chuck WARNING 33116229592
7 Warning about milling spindle speed WARNING 43226236201
8 Integrated caution plate CAUTION 33116228712
9 CE mark — 43116229072
2-12 E
PART 2
MACHINE OPERATION
E322S20010E0
CONTENTS
Page
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW........................................................................ 1-1
1-1 Features .............................................................................................................1-1
1-2 Overview of Mechanisms ...................................................................................1-2
1-3 Overview of Control System ...............................................................................1-3
1-4 Disposition of Machine Components ..................................................................1-5
1-5 Coordinate Axes .................................................................................................1-7
1-5-1 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200M/250M .............................................................. 1-7
1-5-2 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200MS/250MS ......................................................... 1-8
2 OPERATING PANEL AND FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES ................... 2-1
2-1 NC Operating Panel ...........................................................................................2-1
2-1-1 Disposition of switches and indicator lamps .......................................................... 2-1
2-1-2 Controls on the NC operating panel ...................................................................... 2-2
2-2 Auxiliary Operating Panel ...................................................................................2-5
2-3 Data I/O Panel....................................................................................................2-7
3 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION .................................................... 3-1
3-1 Inspection at the Start of Operation ....................................................................3-1
3-2 How to Stop the Machine ...................................................................................3-2
3-2-1 How to stop the machine in emergencies .............................................................. 3-2
3-2-2 Other stopping methods ........................................................................................ 3-2
3-3 Procedure for Switching the Power ON ..............................................................3-2
3-4 Inspection after Switching the Power ON ...........................................................3-4
C-1
3-5 Switching the Power OFF...................................................................................3-5
3-6 Zero-Point Return ...............................................................................................3-5
3-7 Warmup Operation .............................................................................................3-7
3-8 Opening the Front Door......................................................................................3-7
3-9 Opening/Closing of Chuck..................................................................................3-8
4 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 4-1
4-1 Selection of Manual Operation Mode .................................................................4-1
4-2 Main Spindle Operation ......................................................................................4-1
4-2-1 Main spindle start .................................................................................................. 4-1
4-2-2 Main spindle stop .................................................................................................. 4-3
4-2-3 Main spindle jog .................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3 C-Axis Operation (Main Spindle) ........................................................................4-4
4-3-1 C-axis rapid feed ................................................................................................... 4-4
4-3-2 C-axis cutting feed ................................................................................................ 4-5
4-3-3 C-axis manual pulse feed...................................................................................... 4-6
4-4 Secondary Spindle Operation (QTN-200MS/250MS) .........................................4-8
4-4-1 Secondary spindle start......................................................................................... 4-8
4-4-2 Secondary spindle stop ....................................................................................... 4-10
4-4-3 Secondary spindle jog ......................................................................................... 4-10
4-4-4 Remarks ............................................................................................................. 4-10
4-5 Synchronized Rotation of Main Spindle and Secondary Spindle......................4-11
4-5-1 Selection of synchronized rotation....................................................................... 4-11
4-5-2 Cancellation of synchronized rotation.................................................................. 4-11
C-2
4-6 X- and Z-Axis Feed Operation (QTN-200M/250M)...........................................4-11
4-7 X-, Z- and W-Axis Feed Operation (QTN-200MS/250MS)................................4-12
4-7-1 X-, Z- and W-axis rapid feed................................................................................ 4-12
4-7-2 X-, Z- and W-axis cutting feed ............................................................................. 4-13
4-7-3 X-, Z- and W-axis manual pulse feed .................................................................. 4-15
4-7-4 BARRIER CANCEL............................................................................................. 4-15
4-8 Tool Selection...................................................................................................4-16
4-8-1 Rotation of turret ................................................................................................. 4-16
4-8-2 Milling spindle operation...................................................................................... 4-17
4-9 Tailstock Operation (QTN-200M/250M)............................................................4-19
4-9-1 Display and selection of tailstock thrust ............................................................... 4-19
4-9-2 Moving the tailstock............................................................................................. 4-20
4-10 Other Manual Operations .................................................................................4-21
4-10-1 Soft limit and its release ...................................................................................... 4-21
4-10-2 MACHINE LOCK................................................................................................. 4-22
4-10-3 WORK LIGHT and COOLANT MANUAL............................................................. 4-22
4-10-4 SET UP switch .................................................................................................... 4-23
4-10-5 Manual operation of parts catcher ....................................................................... 4-24
4-10-6 Manual operation of the automatic door .............................................................. 4-24
5 PREPARATION FOR MACHINING ..................................................... 5-1
5-1 Mounting/Removal of Tools................................................................................5-1
5-2 Preparation for Gripping Workpiece (Soft Jaw Machining) .................................5-2
5-2-1 In the case of workpiece external gripping............................................................. 5-2
5-2-2 In the case of workpiece internal gripping.............................................................. 5-4
C-3
5-2-3 Precautions for the use of non standard soft jaws .................................................. 5-6
5-3 Preliminary Knowledge.......................................................................................5-6
5-3-1 Automatic operation of the tailstock (QTN-200M/250M)......................................... 5-6
5-3-2 Energy saving mode ............................................................................................... 5-8
C-4 E
MACHINE OVERVIEW 1
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
1-1 Features
1. High-accuracy built-in spindle motors mounted
The built-in spindle with improvements in both spindle rigidity and cooling performance is
powerful, achieves high torques and high speeds, and thus improves productivity.
2. Duodecagonal non-lifting high-speed turrets
The turret allows 12 tools to be mounted and also allows a rotary tool to be mounted in any
position. Tool and holder can be changed together at a single touch. Non-lift indexing with the AC
spindle motor ensures fast tool indexing.
3. MAZATROL 640T NEXUS CNC unit mounted
The new CNC unit M640T NEXUS differs from conventional ones in that it is equipped with an
ultra-high-speed 64-bit CPU and useful functions of a personal computer (PC). This PC-
integrated CNC significantly enhances machine’s productivity and ease of operation.
4. Fast and highly accurate positioning
Rapid traverse at 30 m/min (1180 IPM) for the X- and W-axis and 33 m/min (1300 IPM) for the
Z-axis minimizes the non-cutting time. Also, high-gain servo control that ensures smooth
acceleration/deceleration and high follow-up performance achives highly accurate machining.
H322S2A010E 1-1
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
1-2 Overview of Mechanisms
1. Main spindle (C-axis)
The main spindle is driven directly by a built-in, variable-speed, AC inverter motor, and this
machine can freely control the indexing of the C-axis in the angle range of 360 degrees. Water-
and air-cooling system is provided for the spindle to minimize the effects of heat.
2. Secondary spindle (W-axis)
The secondary spindle is driven by a directly coupled variable-speed AC inverter motor built into
the spindle body at the rear of the secondary spindle. The secondary headstock is moved on a
slideway in the Z-axis direction by a W-axis AC servomotor through a ball screw.
3. Chuck
The chuck is connected by a connecting rod with the rotary, hydraulic cylinder at the rear end of
the spindle. The chuck jaws will open and close when the cylinder piston moves towards and
away from the chuck, respectively. (Operation may reverse according to the particular chuck
type.)
4. X-axis and Z-axis
The carriage is moved along the bed in the Z-axis direction by a Z-axis AC servomotor through a
ball screw. The turret mounted on the carriage is moved in the X-axis direction by an X-axis AC
servomotor through a ball screw.
5. Turret
The turret has 12 faces to enable 12 tools (rotary and turning tools) to be mounted. Rotary tools
can be mounted on any tooling position.
The tool holder uses VDI clamping for rapid and easy mounting and removal of tools. During
automatic operation, the turret rotates via the shortest route to index the selected tool. In
manual operation mode, clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation can be selected as required.
Except during rotation, the turret remains hydraulically clamped to the turret base (index
couplings remain in engagement). On receiving a rotation command, the index couplings are
disengaged to unclamp the turret. Subsequently, the AC spindle motor rotates the turret via a
timing belt and when the encoder checks that the turret has reached the command-specified
position, the motor will stop and the turret will be clamped again.
Joining a rotary tool to the milling spindle is performed by an air cylinder.
6. TOOL EYE (!)
The TOOL EYE is provided to measure the position of the tool tip for tool setting. Measurement
and data registration can automatically be achieved by simply bringing the tip of a mounted tool
into contact with a sensor at the end of the TOOL EYE arm.
1-2
MACHINE OVERVIEW 1
1-3 Overview of Control System
1. QTN-200M/250M
11 1
2
AC200/200V 3φ AC400V
12 3φ
10 13 3 AC400V 3φ
8
6
4
5
7
D322M0012
Fig. 1-1 Control system (QTN-200M/250M)
No. Name No. Name

1 X-axis servomotor 8 Operating panel
2 Z-axis servomotor 9 Turret
3 X- and Z-axis servo control unit 10 Turret indexing servo control unit
4 Spindle control unit 11 Tailstock moving servomotor
5 Spindle drive motor 12 Tailstock moving servo control unit
6 CNC control unit 13 Milling spindle control unit
7 External data I/O panel
1-3
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
2. QTN-200MS/250MS
3
2
1
4
AC200/220V 5
3φ
AC400V 3φ
AC400V 3φ
6 10 9 8 7
15
13 AC400V 3φ
11
14 12
D322M0013
Fig. 1-2 Control system (QTN-200MS/250MS)
No. Name No. Name

1 Turret 9 Secondary spindle control unit
2 Secondary spindle 10 Milling spindle control unit
3 X-axis servomotor 11 Spindle control unit
4 W-axis servomotor 12 Spindle drive motor
5 Z-axis servomotor 13 CNC control unit
6 Turret indexing servo control unit 14 External data I/O panel
7 Z-axis servo control unit 15 Operating panel
8 X- and W-axis servo control unit
1-4
MACHINE OVERVIEW 1
1-4 Disposition of Machine Components
6 10 9
17
D322M0001
Fig. 1-3 Machine components (1/4)
15 4 8 1 13 12
D322M0002
1-5
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
11 3 14
D322M0003
7 16 2 5
D322M0004
1-6
MACHINE OVERVIEW 1
No. Name No. Name
1 Turret 9 Coolant tank
2 Main circuit breaker 10 Tailstock or Secondary spindle
3 Lubrication unit 11 Coolant pump
4 Spindle 12 Data I/O panel (Micro disk interface)
5 Headstock cooling fan 13 Operating panel
Chuck pressure setting knob (Spindle chuck 14 Air unit

6
pressure) 15 TOOL EYE
7 Hydraulic unit 16 Pressure gauge (Main pressure)
8 Chuck 17 Operator position
1-5 Coordinate Axes

The coordinate axes used for the machine are defined as follows:
1-5-1 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200M/250M

- X-axis refers to the vertical motion of the turret.
“+” (plus) indicates the upward direction (away from the spindle center);
“–” (minus) indicates the downward direction (towards the spindle center).
- Z-axis refers to the transverse motion of the turret.
“+” (plus) indicates the rightward direction (away from the chuck);
“–” (minus) indicates the leftward direction (towards the chuck).
- C-axis refers to the rotation of the work spindle.
“+” (plus) indicates the left-hand rotation (CCW);
“–” (minus) indicates the right-hand rotation (CW).
Z-axis
C-axis
X-axis
D321S0001
Fig. 1-7 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200M/250M
1-7
1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
1-5-2 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200MS/250MS

- X-axis refers to the vertical motion of the turret.
“+” (plus) indicates the upward direction (away from the spindle center);
“–” (minus) indicates the downward direction (towards the spindle center).
- Z-axis refers to the transverse motion of the turret.
“+” (plus) indicates the rightward direction (away from the chuck);
“–” (minus) indicates the leftward direction (towards the chuck).
- W-axis refers to the transverse motion of the secondary headstock.
“+” (plus) indicates the rightward direction;
“–” (minus) indicates the leftward direction.
- C-axis refers to the rotation of the work spindle.
“+” (plus) indicates the left-hand rotation (CCW);
“–” (minus) indicates the right-hand rotation (CW).
X-axis
Z-axis
C-axis
W-axis
D322S0001
Fig. 1-8 Coordinate axes of the QTN-200MS/250MS
1-8 E
OPERATING PANEL AND FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES 2
2 OPERATING PANEL AND FUNCTIONS OF SWITCHES
2-1 NC Operating Panel
2-1-1 Disposition of switches and indicator lamps
3 4
10
14
13
26
11
7
9 8 12
19
22 28 29 30 6
16 17 21 18
23 24 25
27
15 20
D322S0002
Fig. 2-1 Operating panel
H322S2B010E 2-1
2-1-2 Controls on the NC operating panel

Some of the keys and buttons on the operating panel have a small lamp at their respective top
left corner. The lamp is on when the function is effective and off when the function is ineffective
(except for the power ON button).
Example: Lamp on Lamp off
Function Function
effective ineffective
* The numbers in Table 2-1 correspond to those in Fig. 2-1.
Table 2-1 Controls on the NC operating panel
No. Name Function

1 Power ON button - This button is used to switch on the power to the NC unit.
(POWER I) When the main breaker is switched on, the backlighting of this button will light, indicating that
power is being supplied to the machine.
- When this button is pressed, the backlighting will go off.
Several seconds after this button has been pressed, the “READY” lamp will light, indicating
that the machine is ready for operation.
2 Power OFF button - This button is used to switch off the power to the NC unit.
(POWER O) When this button is pressed, the backlighting of the power ON button will light.
3 Display selector key - This key is used to select the display on the liquid crystal display.
When this key is pressed, the display selection menu is displayed.
4 Menu selector key - This key is used to change the menu currently being displayed over to another one.
5 Menu keys - These keys are used to select one of the menu items being displayed.
6 Cursor keys - These keys are used to make the cursor appear on the screen and to move the cursor
around the screen.
Press this key to move the cursor to the left.

If this key is pressed when the cursor is at the left end, the cursor will move to the
right end of the line above.
Press this key to move the cursor to the right.

If this key is pressed when the cursor is at the right end, the cursor will move to the
left end of the line below.
Press this key to move the cursor up to the line above.
Press this key to move the cursor down to the line below.
7 Page keys - These keys are used to call the previous page or the next page of a display which has
multiple pages.
Press this key to call the previous page.
Press this key to call the next page.

- When a PROGRAM display is selected:
Press this key to move the cursor to the beginning of the previous unit.
Press this key to move the cursor to the beginning of the next unit.
8 Data cancel key - This key is used to cancel the data displayed in the data display area.
(CANCEL) When this key is pressed, the data at the position where the cursor is blinking will be deleted.
9 EOB key - This key is used to set an end-of-block code in data.
10 Address/numeric - These keys are used to set address data (alphabetic characters) and numeric data.
data keys See Part 3, Chapter 3, DATA SETTING METHODS, for the usage of the keys.
2-2
No. Name Function
11 Shift key - This key is used to set the address data displayed at the bottom right of the address keys.
(SHIFT) See Part 3, Chapter 3, DATA SETTING METHODS, for the usage of the key.
12 Input key - This key is used to set the data displayed in the data input display area of the display.
(INPUT) Press this key after inputting the data with the numeric data keys.
13 Clear key - This key is used to cancel the data displayed in the data input area of the display.
(CLEAR) Press this key if incorrect data has been input into the data input area.
14 Reset key - This key is used to reset the NC unit to its initial status.
(RESET) If an alarm is displayed, eliminate its cause then press this key to cancel the alarm.
15 Cutting feed/Manual - These keys are used to select the cutting feed/manual pulse feed mode.
pulse feed keys Press one of these keys and the appropriate axis movement key to execute axis motion at the
cutting feed rate in the selected axis direction.
Press the appropriate key and turn the manual pulse handle.
An axis motion will occur over the selected distance in the selected axis direction.
If this key is pressed, each graduation on the manual pulse handle will be equivalent
to a movement of 0.001 mm in the direction of the selected axis.
16 Rapid feed key - This key is used to select the rapid feed mode.
Press this key then press the appropriate axis movement key. Motion will take place in the
selected direction along the selected axis at the rapid feed rate.
17 Zero-point return key - This key is used to select the zero-point return mode.
Press this key then press the appropriate axis movement key. The selected axis will return to
its zero-point in the machine coordinates system.
18 Automatic operation - This key is used to select the automatic operation mode.
key (MEMORY) Press this key to execute a program registered in the NC unit.
19 Single-block key - This key specifies the single-block mode.
Press the key to execute the program block by block when you want to check the machine
operation or machining state.
20 MDI key - This key specifies the MDI mode.
Press the key to execute automatic operation according to an occasionally prepared program.
21 Tape run key - This key is used to select the tape run mode.
Press this key to execute programs stored on paper tape, a micro disk or other external
equipment.
* This key is used for EIA/ISO programs only.
22 Coolant stop key - This key is used to stop the supply of coolant in both automatic and manual operation modes.
Pressing the key once again turns feeding of the coolant on.
23 Rapid feed override - These keys are used to adjust the rapid feed override rate.
keys The current rate is indicated on the display as a percentage of the maximum rapid feed rate.
Press this key to increase the rapid feed override.
Press this key to reduce the rapid feed override.
24 Spindle override keys - These keys are used to adjust the spindle rotation speed (peripheral speed).
When the machine is in the manual mode, the speed indicated on the display is equal to one-
tenth of the value of the current rotation speed.
When the machine is in the automatic operation mode, the current rotation speed is indicated
on the display as a percentage of the speed set in the program.
Press this key to increase the speed.
Press this key to reduce the speed.
2-3
No. Name Function

25 Cutting feed override - These keys are used to adjust the cutting feed rate.
keys (FEED) When the machine is in the manual operation mode, the code corresponding to the feed rate is
indicated on the display.
When the machine is in the automatic operation mode, the current feed rate is indicated on the
display as a percentage of the feed rate set in the program.
Press this key to increase the feed rate.
Press this key to reduce the feed rate.
26 VFC key - This key is used to ‘rewrite’ the cutting conditions (peripheral speed, feed rate) in the program
to the values adjusted by using the override keys.
If this key is pressed after the spindle speed or the cutting feed rate has been adjusted during
automatic operation, the values set in the program will be updated automatically according to
the adjustment.
* This key can be used for MAZATROL programs only.
27 Window key - This key is used to display a window on the screen.
28 Auxiliary key - Use this key as an aid key according to the particular machine specifications.
(MF1)
29 Coolant menu key - This key is used to display the coolant menu on the screen.
Pressing this key will display the menu for various coolant functions on the screen.
30 Machine menu key - This key is used to display the menu for various machine-operations on the screen.
Pressing this key will display the menu for various machine-operations on the screen.
2-4
2-2 Auxiliary Operating Panel
1. QTN-200M/250M
45
42 41 40
53 51
47a 43 52
46 50
44 54
39
48 49
D311S0040
Fig. 2-2 Auxiliary operating panel (QTN-200M/250M)
2. QTN-200MS/250MS
45
42 41 40
53 51
47b 43 52
46 50
44
39
54
48 49
D322S0003
Fig. 2-3 Auxiliary operating panel (QTN-200MS/250MS)
2-5
Table 2-2 Controls on the auxiliary operating panel
No. Name Function

39 Emergency stop button - This button is used to stop the machine operation in case of emergency.
If this button is pressed, all of the machine operations will stop immediately and alarm
“33 EMERGENCY STOP” will be displayed.
To cancel an emergency stop, turn the emergency stop button in the direction of the
arrow and then press the reset key.
40 Spindle rotation - This key is used to specify the spindle rotation direction in the manual operation mode.
direction change key When the backlighting of this key is on, the spindle rotates in the reverse direction.
(REV) When the backlighting of this key is off, the spindle rotates in the normal direction.
41 Spindle start key - This key is used to rotate the spindle in the manual operation mode.
(START) The backlighting of this key is on while the spindle is rotating.
42 Spindle stop key - This key is used to stop the spindle in the manual operation mode.
(STOP)
43 Tool selector keys - These keys are used to index a tool on the turret in the manual operation mode.
(TOOL SELECT) The turret rotates one position in the selected direction each time the corresponding
key is pressed.
44 Axis movement keys - These keys are used to move the turret in the X-axis or the Z-axis direction (and the
secondary headstock in the W-axis direction [MS]) in the manual operation mode.
The component in question moves in the selected direction when a key is being
pressed and stops when the key is released.
45 Axis selector keys - These keys are used to select the axis for the manual pulse feed operation.
(AXIS SELECT)
46 Manual pulse handle - This handle is used to specify the axis motion direction and distance in the manual
pulse feed mode.
47a Tail spindle operation - These keys are used to move forward/reversely or stop the tail spindle.
keys * Invalid during automatic operation.
47b Head selector keys - These keys are used to select which of the spindles (the main or the secondary
(HEAD SELECT) spindle) is to be rotated.
The key lamp of the selected spindle is on.
48 Feed hold button (red) - This button is used to stop the axis feed in the automatic operation mode.
(FEED HOLD) When the feed is stopped, the LED comes on and the cycle start button LED goes off.
White LED
49 Cycle start button - This button is used to start the machine in the automatic operation mode.
(green) The LED is on when the machine is running in the automatic operation mode.
(CYCLE START) The LED goes off when the automatic operation is interrupted or has been completed.
Green LED
50 Machine setup switch - This switch makes a certain degree of machine action valid with the front door
(MACHINE SETUP) remaining opened during set-up operations.
51 Chip-conveyor start key - This key is used to start the chip-conveyor.
Pressing this key will start the chip-conveyor operation, and pressing this key once
again will stop it.
52 Reprogramming switch - This switch is used to prevent programs or data in the NC unit from being erased
(with key) accidentally.
To rewrite a program or data, set this switch to the ENABLE position.
When the switch is set to the LOCK position, rewriting of programs and part of the data
is rendered impossible.
53 Door unlock key - This key releases the door interlock mechanism.
(DOOR UNLOCK) - Press the key to release the lock.
This key is not active when the spindle rotation, axis feed or turret rotation is in
progress, or the cycle start lamp is on to indicate that the machine is running in the
automatic operation mode.
54 GL/CF selector key - This key is used to select the special display for GL or CF specification.
2-6
2-3 Data I/O Panel
CMT. PTP. PTR

5
D311S0041
Fig. 2-4 Data I/O panel
No. Name No. Name

1 Mouse selector switch (Option) 5 CMT interface
2 Mouse interface (Option) 6 Floppy disk drive
3 Keyboard interface (Option) 7 Plate (23175872302)
4 Parallel interface (Option) 8 LAN interface
2-7
- NOTE -
2-8 E
PREPARATION FOR OPERATION 3
3 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION
3-1 Inspection at the Start of Operation

In order to ensure safe operation and good machine maintenance, the following points must be
inspected before starting operation.
- Check that the voltage of the factory power supply is correct. (Permissible voltage: 200 to 230
V, 460 to 480 V or 380 to 415 V)
- Check that the doors of the operating panel and control cabinet are closed.
- Check that there is nothing abnormal about the safety covers (particularly about the front
door).
- Check that the oil level gauges are indicating the correct values.
z Replace the front door glass immediately with a new one if it is found cracked and other-
wise damaged. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an injury due to the
workpiece or chuck jaw flung away during machining.
WARNING
(Refer to window fitting instructions in the maintenance manual – Chapter 5-12-6)
Give an order with the following part number (as indicated in the parts list):
Safety front door glass: Z52ZZ000261 (Size: 230 × 330 mm [9.06 × 12.99 in.]) [M]
Z52ZZ000271 (Size: 320 × 455 mm [12.60 × 17.91 in.]) [MS]
Coolant unit
Headstock cooling unit

(LLC tank) Lubrication unit
Hydraulic unit
D321S0013’
Fig. 3-1 Location of oil level gauges
E322S2C010E0 3-1
3-2 How to Stop the Machine
3-2-1 How to stop the machine in emergencies

Press the emergency stop button (No. 39 in Figs. 2-2 and 2-3). All machine actions will stop
immediately.
! Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately
from any position. Failure to observe this precaution could result in serious injury.
WARNING
3-2-2 Other stopping methods

An overview of other stopping methods is given below. Refer to Part 4 AUTOMATIC
OPERATION for further details.
Method Stop status Major uses

Press the reset key (No. 14). - All machine actions stop immediately. Interruption of automatic operation
- Power does not turn off.
Press the feed hold button - Only axial movement stops, except Prevention of collision during test cutting
(No. 48). during threading.
Press the single-block key - The machine operation stops each time Progress check during test cutting
(No. 19). when one block of machining program is
completed.
- Automatic operation stops temporarily.
3-3 Procedure for Switching the Power ON
! Cables or wires with damaged insulation could cause current leakage or electric shocks.
Always check that the insulation is sound.
DANGER ! There are high voltage terminals in the control cabinet, transformers, motors, junction
boxes, etc. Never touch these terminals.
! Do not touch the switches with wet hands.
! In order to prevent the entry of water, oil, chips, dust, etc. into the control cabinet and the
operating panel, ensure that all the doors and covers are closed.
WARNING
! Follow any instructions on the distributor for the factory power supply (for example,
instructions on a nameplate).
CAUTION
(1) Switch on the factory power supply.

(2) Turn the main circuit breaker on the left side panel of the machine to the ON position.
- The power ON button (POWER I) on the operating panel will light up.
- The spindle cooling water pump, spindle cooling fan and spindle control amplifier/servo
amplifier heat sink fan will be turned on.
3-2
(3) Press the power ON button (POWER I) on the operating panel.
- The light in the power ON button (POWER I) will go out.
- The “READY” lamp, which indicates that the machine is ready for operation, will light.
- The POSITION display will be displayed on the screen.
- The zero-point return key (HOME) will light up and the message ZERO RETURN will be
displayed on the screen.
* If the machine features the absolute position detect function, the automatic operation
mode key (MEMORY) will light up.
- The hydraulic unit pump and lubrication unit pump will start.
(1) Factory power supply
(3) Power on button
Ready indicator lamp

(2) Main breaker
READY
OFF ON
HDD WARM UP
? ALARM
D321S0014’
Fig. 3-2 Procedure for switching the power ON
3-3
3-4 Inspection after Switching the Power ON

- Check that the “READY” lamp is on.
- Check that the POSITION display is displayed on the screen.
- Check that the pressure gauges are indicating the correct value.
Hydraulic unit pressure: 5 MPa (712 PSI)
Spindle chuck pressure: Adjusted in accordance with the workpiece to be machined
POSITION display
Ready indicator lamp
READY
HDD WARM UP
? ALARM
Main spindle Secondary spindle

chuck pressure chuck pressure
D321S0015’
Fig. 3-3 Check points after switching the power ON
3-4
3-5 Switching the Power OFF
z Keep wet hands away from the main circuit breaker.
DANGER
z Do not turn power off during spindle rotation or axis movement. Failure to observe this
instruction may result in machine damage due to collision, or personal injury due to flyout
of the workpiece.
CAUTION
z If power is to be left turned off for three months or more in succession, copy the NC-stored
parameters and other data beforehand to provide against possible data loss.
(1) Make sure that neither spindle rotation nor axis movement is in progress.
(2) Select the manual operation mode and perform zero-point return operations or move the
turret to a safe position.
(3) Press the (Power OFF) button on the NC operation panel.
→ The screen will blank.
(4) Wait until all data (CNC and Windows™) is saved to disk.
→ The indicator lamp in the (Power ON) button lights up green.
(5) Turn the main circuit breaker to the OFF position after the indicator lamp in the (Power ON)
button illuminates.
Note: If the main circuit breaker is turned OFF before the indicator lamp in the (Power ON)
button illuminates and the screen display is completely turned off, correct NC functions
cannot be guaranteed and the system may crash. It will take about one minute before
the screen display is turned off completely.
(6) Shut off the power at the factory power distribution board.
3-6 Zero-Point Return
z Do not operate switches while wearing gloves. This could cause machine malfunction.
z In order to prevent machine malfunction, confirm the functions of switches before using
WARNING them.
z The zero-point return operation is important because it registers the machine zero point in
the NC unit.
When the power is switched off, the record of the machine zero point is lost. Therefore, the
first thing that has to be done after switching on the power is to perform zero-point return
operation.
z In the case of the absolute position detection specification (optional), the record of the
machine zero point is not lost even if the power is switched off. Accordingly, it is not
necessary to perform zero-point return operation after switching the power on. If, however,
CAUTION
the battery voltage drops, the record of the machine zero point may be lost. If the message
ZERO RETURN is displayed on the screen, perform zero-point return operation for each
axis.
3-5
[Procedure for zero-point return]

(1) Press the zero-point return key (HOME).
(2) Move the turret on the X-axis, if required, temporarily in the minus direction by pressing the
axis movement key, away to a position at least 50 mm (1.97 in.) distant from the machine
zero point.
- If the zero-point dog is stepped on during this axis movement, the movement direction is
automatically reversed for the zero-point return and the feed speed changes into “zero-
point return speed”. (Refer to Fig. 3-5.) Namely, if the zero-point dog is detected when
pressing the X-axis movement key for the minus direction at around the X-axis home
position, the direction of axis movement changes to the plus direction.
- This step can naturally be skipped if the above-mentioned positional requirement is
already satisfied.
(3) Hold down the X-axis movement key for plus direction.
- Movement will stop when you release the key.
- Once the zero-point return speed is given by the detection of the zero-point dog, returning
axis motion will be brought to an end even if the key is released.
(4) Release the key when the X-axis zero-point indicator has been turned on.
(5) Carry out the zero-point return in like manner on the Z-axis (and W-axis for MS models).
Zero-point indicator
Zero-point return key
Axis movement keys
D322S0004
Fig. 3-4 Procedure for zero-point return
3-6
<Zero-point return speed>
In the first operation after turning on the power, deceleration is given to the rapid traverse at
about 30 mm (1.18 in.) before zero point stop, and the axis motion will be continued till zero point
at the preset zero-point return speed. Unless the power is turned off, the second and subsequent
zero-point return operations take place all the way at the rapid traverse without deceleration.
In case the record of machine zero-point at

turning on the power is lost.
Feed rate
Rapid feed rate at turning on the power is limited by setting value of

parameter A3. (Standard setting value: 5 m/min (196.85 IPM))
Zero-point
return speed
Movement
Zero-point dog Machine zero-point

NM210-00456
Fig. 3-5 Zero-point return speed
3-7 Warmup Operation

Abnormal abrasion can be caused by insufficient oil if cutting operation is conducted immediately
after the machine has not been used for long time. In such a condition, workpieces cannot be
finished with the specified accuracy because of thermal expansion in various parts of the
machine. Warmup is necessary to avoid troubles, such as abnormal abrasion and stick slip of the
sliding surface. Enough warmup also provides the machine with the thermal stability to finish
workpieces with constant, high precision.
Enough warmup is required every time daily machining operation starts. Especially, in cold areas,
provide sufficient warmup.
Table 3-1 Outline of the warmup operation
Warmup duration About 30 min

Spindle rotation 500 min–1 (rpm) → 0.5R → R (R: Maximum speed to be used for actual machining)
Rotate the spindle for 10 min at each speed.
Axis feed (for all axes) Movement area: Full stroke for each axis
Feedrate: 500 mm/min (19.69 IPM) for 15 min → 2 m/min (78.74 IPM) for 15 min
Note 1: During the warmup operation do not exceed the spindle speed and axis feedrate
mentioned above. Or the bearings of the ball screws or other machine parts may be
damaged.
Note 2: Check machine action and lubrication in each part during warmup.
3-8 Opening the Front Door

DOOR
UNLOCK
To open and close the front door by hand, press the DOOR UNLOCK key [53] on the
auxiliary operating panel for releasing the door from the locking state.
The release, however, is not possible during spindle rotation, axis movement and turret indexing,
or in the middle of automatic operation (CYCLE START lamp ON).
3-7
3-9 Opening/Closing of Chuck
! Check that the chuck pressure is correct.
CAUTION
The chuck is opened and closed by operating the foot switch.
(1) First, press the MACHINE key to call up the machine menu. Then, press the CHUCK menu
key and, finally, select the workpiece gripping direction from the submenu. (The display of
the selected menu item will blink.)
OPTION MAIN CHUCK TAIL 2nd MAINTE-

SPINDLE THRUST SPINDLE NANCE
(*1) (*2)
Selection of CHUCK
MAIN SP. MAIN SP. 2nd SP. 2nd SP.

CHK-EXT. CHK-INT. CHK-EXT. CHK-INT.
(*2) (*2) (*1) Only for QTN-200/250M

(*2) Only for QTN-200/250MS
(2) Operate the foot switch to open and close the chuck.
- Single foot switch
Stepping on the pedal opens the chuck and releasing the pedal closes the chuck.
Jaw motion Jaw motion
Pedal stepped on Pedal released

(*1) (*1) Mount
work-
piece
(*1) (*1)
Menu selection for main spindle chuck

NM210-00463’
Fig. 3-6 Operation of foot switch (1/2) - Single foot switch -
3-8
- Double foot swich (#)
Stepping on the left pedal opens the chuck and stepping on the right pedal closes the
chuck.
Jaw motion Jaw motion

Left pedal Right pedal
stepped on stepped on
(*1) (*1) Mount
work-
piece
(*1) (*1)
Menu selection for main spindle chuck

NM210-00464’
Fig. 3-7 Operation of foot switch (2/2) - Double foot switch -
3-9
- NOTE -
3-10 E
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-1 Selection of Manual Operation Mode
! Never touch the spindle or the turret while it is rotating.
WARNING
Manual machine operation by operating various controls can be performed after selection of a
required manual operation mode.
Selection of manual operation mode
Press one of the manual mode keys.
" The key lamp of the pressed key will light.
D366S0001
4-2 Main Spindle Operation
4-2-1 Main spindle start

(1) Select the manual operation mode. (See Section 4-1.)
(2) Press the “1st” HEAD SELECT key as required for the selection of the main spindle.
D322S0006
E322S2D010E0 4-1
4 MANUAL OPERATION
(3) Select the rotational direction using the spindle rotation direction change key (REV).
Lamp ON: Reverse

Lamp OFF: Normal
D322S0007
Fig. 4-1 Pressing the spindle rotation direction change key (REV)
Normal
Reverse
TR113-00432’
Fig. 4-2 Main spindle rotational direction
Note: Pressing the REV key during rotation of the spindle will only stop the current
rotation.
(4) Set the spindle speed using the spindle override keys (SPINDLE).
(Display on
the monitor)
D320S1055
The spindle speed is increased by 10 min–1 (rpm) each time is pressed.

–1
The spindle speed is decreased by 10 min (rpm) each time is pressed.
4-2
MANUAL OPERATION 4
(5) Press the spindle start key (START).
" The spindle will start rotating.
D322S0008
Fig. 4-3 Pressing the spindle start key (START)
4-2-2 Main spindle stop

Press the spindle stop key (STOP) to stop the rotation of the spindle.
- The value displayed in the override indicator will not change.
- The radiator fan keeps rotating during parameter set time even after spindle stop.
- In automatic operation, the spindle will not stop even if the spindle stop key (STOP) is pressed.
4-2-3 Main spindle jog

Call the machine operation menu on the POSITION display. Then press the SPDL JOG menu
key. This menu item is used to jog the spindle (when the turning mode is selected) or milling
spindle (when the milling mode is selected) during manual operation mode.
Press and hold down the MF1 key and then press this menu key. The spindle or milling spindle
rotates slowly when the keys are being pressed and stops when the keys are released.
WORK No. C-AX C-AX C-AX MACHINE WORK SPDL BARRIER TPS
CONNECT LOCK LIGHT JOG CANCEL
4-3
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-3 C-Axis Operation (Main Spindle)
! When pressing the C-AX CONNECT menu key for mode selection, the main spindle
! rotates several times to detect the position.
CAUTION
4-3-1 C-axis rapid feed

(1) Press the rapid feed key (RAPID).
" The key lamp will light.
D322S0009
" The “1st” lamp will light.
D322S0006
(3) Call the POSITION display on the monitor.
POSITION
(4) Press the C-AX CONNECT menu key together with the MF1 key.
+ WORK NO. C-AX C-AX C-AX

CONNECT
" The C-AX CONNECT menu item will be highlighted.
4-4
MANUAL OPERATION 4
(5) Set the feed rate (as a percentage value) by using the rapid feed override keys (RAPID).
(Display on
the monitor)
D320S1057
- 50% and 100% indicate the feed rate as a percentage value against the maximum rapid
feed rate.
- 1%, 10% and 25% refer to the preset values in the related parameters.
(6) Press the C-AX or C-AX menu key together with the MF1 key .
- While the keys are pressed, the spindle continues rotating, and it stops rotating when the
keys are released.
4-3-2 C-axis cutting feed

(1) Press any one of the cutting feed keys (JOG/HANDLE).
" The key lamp in the key will light.
D322S0005
D322S0006
4-5
4 MANUAL OPERATION
POSITION

CONNECT
(5) Set the feed rate by pressing the cutting feed override keys (FEED).
- The value displayed on the monitor is different from the actual feed rate. The actual feed
rate is displayed in the POSITION display (°/min). (Refer to the table in Subsection 4-7-2.)
(Display on
the monitor)
D320S1058
(6) Press the C-AX or C-AX menu key together with the MF1 key .
- The spindle will continue rotating as long as the keys are held down.
4-3-3 C-axis manual pulse feed

(1) Press one of the manual pulse feed keys (JOG/HANDLE).
(key lamp ON) 0.001° per pulse
4-6
MANUAL OPERATION 4
(2) Use the axis selector keys (AXIS SELECT) to select “C”.
D322S0010’
D322S0006
POSITION

CONNECT
(6) Turn the manual pulse handle in the direction corresponding to the required axis motion.
- The spindle will be rotated by the increment selected in step (1) above for each graduation
of the pulse handle.
NM000-00017’
4-7
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-4 Secondary Spindle Operation (QTN-200MS/250MS)
! Never touch the spindle while it is rotating.

!
WARNING
! When the main spindle is set in C-axis operation mode, press the “1st” HEAD SELECT key
! as required for the selection of the main spindle, and press the C-AX CONNECT menu key
to cancel the highlighted state of the menu item.
CAUTION
4-4-1 Secondary spindle start

(1) Press one of the manual mode keys to select the manual mode.
D366S0001
(2) Press the “2nd” HEAD SELECT key for the selection of the secondary spindle.
" The “2nd” lamp will light.
D322S0011
4-8
MANUAL OPERATION 4
(3) Select the rotational direction using the spindle rotation direction change key (REV).
Lamp ON: Reverse

Lamp OFF: Normal
D322S0007
Fig. 4-4 Selecting the rotational direction (for secondary spindle)
Main spindle Secondary spindle

Normal Normal
Reverse Reverse
TR113-00432
Fig. 4-5 Rotational direction of main spindle and secondary spindle
(4) Set the rotation speed with the spindle override keys (SPINDLE).
(Display on
the monitor)
D320S1055
The spindle speed is increased by 10 min–1 (rpm) each time is pressed.

–1
The spindle speed is decreased by 10 min (rpm) each time is pressed.
4-9
4 MANUAL OPERATION

" The secondary spindle will start rotating.
D322S0008
Fig. 4-6 Pressing the SPINDLE START key (for secondary spindle)
4-4-2 Secondary spindle stop

Press the spindle stop key (STOP) to stop the rotation of the secondary spindle.
- The value displayed in the override indicator will not change.
- In automatic operation, the secondary spindle will not stop even if the spindle stop key (STOP)
is pressed.
4-4-3 Secondary spindle jog

Follow the procedure described in 4-4-1 up to step (4), and press the SPDL JOG menu key
together with the MF1 key for a low-speed rotation.
- The secondary spindle keeps rotating while the keys are pressed and stops when they are
released.
- If the SPDL JOG menu key and MF1 key are pressed during secondary spindle rotation (by the
START key), the spindle speed will change to the jog speed and the secondary spindle will stop
when the keys are released.
[On the POSITION display]
+
WORK No. C-AX C-AX C-AX MACHINE WORK SPDL BARRIER TPS
CONNECT LOCK LIGHT JOG CANCEL
4-4-4 Remarks
- Even during rotation the rotating speed of the STARTed secondary spindle can be changed by
pressing the spindle override keys.
- Pressing the REV key during rotation of the secondary spindle will only stop the current
rotation.
4-10
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4-5 Synchronized Rotation of Main Spindle and Secondary Spindle
4-5-1 Selection of synchronized rotation

Synchronized rotation here refers to manually turning a workpiece chucked at its both ends by
the main and secondary spindles.
To give synchronized rotation, first chuck a workpiece by both spindles, then press the LINKED
MODE menu key on the SET UP display to highlight the menu item, and start the spindle
rotation.
4-5-2 Cancellation of synchronized rotation

To cancel synchronized rotation, stop the spindle rotation first, and after opening either chuck to
retract the secondary spindle (headstock), press the LINKED MODE menu key to cancel the
highlighted state of the menu item.
4-6 X- and Z-Axis Feed Operation (QTN-200M/250M)
! Check that there will be no interference before starting axis feed or tailstock operation.
! Interlocks are not effective until the zero-point return has been completed with the related
WARNING barriers adequately preset.
X-axis
Interference
Tailstock advance motion

TR113-00301
Fig. 4-7 Interference between turret and tailstock
See the following section 4-7 for a description of the axis motion procedure.
4-11
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-7 X-, Z- and W-Axis Feed Operation (QTN-200MS/250MS)
! Check that there will be no interference before starting axis feed operation.
! ! Interlocks as described below are not effective until the zero-point return has been
completed.
WARNING
When an interlock comes into effect, the message 252 AXIS MOVE MISOPERATION is
displayed on the monitor.
1. Feed by axis movement buttons
Only when the X-axis is at the zero point, W-axis feed operation is possible.
Only when the W-axis is at the zero point, X- and Z-axis feed operations are possible.
2. Manual pulse heed
Only when the X-axis is at the zero point, W-axis manual pulse feed operation is
possible.
Only when the W-axis is at the zero point, X- and Z-axis manual pulse feed operations
are possible.
! If an interlock comes into effect when the soft jaws of the secondary spindle chuck are
being machined, cancel the interlock by pressing the O.T. RELEASE menu key.
Interference
TR113-01090
Fig. 4-8 Interference between turret and secondary headstock
4-7-1 X-, Z- and W-axis rapid feed

(1) Press the rapid feed key (RAPID).
" The key lamp will light.
D322S0009
4-12
MANUAL OPERATION 4
(2) Set the feed rate by pressing the rapid feed override keys (RAPID).
- 50% and 100% indicate the feed rate as a percentage value against the maximum rapid
feed rate.
- 1%, 10% and 25% refer to the preset value in the related parameters.
(Display on the monitor)
D320S1057
(3) Press the appropriate axis movement key.

- Axis feed will continue while the key is held down and it will stop when the key is released.
+X direction –W direction +W direction
–Z direction +Z direction
–X direction
D322S0012
Fig. 4-9 Axis movement keys
4-7-2 X-, Z- and W-axis cutting feed

(1) Press any one of the cutting feed keys (JOG/HANDLE).
" The key lamp in the key will light.
D322S0005
4-13
4 MANUAL OPERATION
(2) Set the feed rate by pressing the cutting feed override keys (FEED).
(Display on the monitor)
D320S1058
When the key is pressed the feed rate is increased one step.
When the key is pressed the feed rate is decreased one step.
- The displayed value here is keyed to the actual feed rate as follows:
Table 4-1 Cutting feed rates
Feed rate Feed rate

Display Display
[mm (in.) or deg./min] [mm (in.) or deg./min]
0 0 (0.00) 130 52 (2.047)
10 1.0 (0.039) 140 72 (2.835)
20 1.4 (0.055) 150 100 (3.937)
30 2.0 (0.079) 160 140 (5.512)
40 2.7 (0.106) 170 200 (7.874)
50 3.7 (0.146) 180 270 (10.630)
60 5.2 (0.205) 190 370 (14.567)
70 7.2 (0.283) 200 520 (20.472)
80 10 (0.394) 210 720 (28.346)
90 14 (0.551) 220 1000 (39.37)
100 20 (0.787) 230 1400 (55.118)
110 27 (1.063) 240 2000 (78.74)
120 37 (1.457)
(3) Press the appropriate axis movement key.

- Axis feed will continue while the key is held down and it will stop when the key is released.
- It is possible to alter the feed rate while axis feed is in progress by using the cutting feed
override keys.
+X direction –W direction +W direction
–Z direction +Z direction
–X direction
D322S0012
Fig. 4-10 Axis movement keys
4-14
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4-7-3 X-, Z- and W-axis manual pulse feed
(1) Select the feed axis X, Z or W by using the axis selector key (AXIS SELECT).
Initial display
X-axis selection
Z-axis selection
W-axis selection
D322S0013
(2) Press one of the manual pulse feed keys (JOG/HANDLE).
(key lamp ON) 0.001 mm per pulse
* For the X-axis read the above increments as diameter values.

(3) Turn the manual pulse handle in the direction corresponding to the required axis movement.
- The axis motion will be peformed by the increment selected in step (2) above for each
graduation of the pulse handle.
NM000-00017’
4-7-4 BARRIER CANCEL

This function is used to cancel tool or chuck barriers.
Highlighted
BARRIER BARRIER
CANCEL CANCEL
Effective Ineffective
- When the menu is highlighted, the barriers will be cancelled.

* The same function is available in automatic operation.
4-15
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-8 Tool Selection
4-8-1 Rotation of turret
! Before rotating the turret, always check that there will be no interference between the tools
and the chuck, etc. And also check that the tool is fixed securely.
WARNING
Proceed as follows to rotate the turret for indexing a tool and mounting or removing tools.
D366S0001
(2) Press the TOOL SELECT “F/H” or “R/V” key in accordance with the required turret indexing
direction.
- Each time the key is pressed, the turret will be rotated one position.
F/H
R/V
D322S0014
Fig. 4-11 Turret rotation by pressing the tool selector key (TOOL SELECT)
4-16
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4-8-2 Milling spindle operation
D366S0001
* Press the spindle stop key (STOP) when the work spindle is rotating.
POSITION

CONNECT
(4) Set the milling spindle speed using the spindle override keys (SPINDLE).
(Display on
the monitor)
D320S1063
–1
The speed is increased by 10 min (rpm) each time is pressed.
–1
The speed is decreased by 10 min (rpm) each time is pressed.
4-17
4 MANUAL OPERATION
(5) Select the tool rotational direction using the rotational direction change key (REV).
Reverse Normal
NM210-00204
Fig. 4-12 Milling tool rotational directions
- These directions are reversed in the case of the angular type.

Î The milling tool will be rotated in the direction selected in step (5) above.
D322S0008
Fig. 4-13 Pressing the spindle start key (START) for milling spindle rotation
(7) To stop the rotation of the milling spindle, press the spindle stop key (STOP).
Î Milling spindle rotation will stop.
* For jogging the milling spindle (at a speed preset in the related parameter), press the SPDL
JOG menu key together with the MF1 key. The milling spindle keeps rotating while the keys
are held down and stops when they are released.
[On the POSITION display]
WORK C-AX C-AX C-AX MACHINE WORK SPDL BARRIER TPS

+ No. CONNECT LOCK LIGHT JOG CANCEL
4-18
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4-9 Tailstock Operation (QTN-200M/250M)
The tailstock is motor-driven to move along the bed. The tailstock can be moved using the
required operating panel switches, and its moving speed can be selected from two types. Thrust
can be selected from nine types.
4-9-1 Display and selection of tailstock thrust
1. Display
MACHINE
(1) Press the machine menu key ［30］.

" The following menu will be displayed:
Machine menu
OPTION MAIN CHUCK TAIL MAINTE- OT
SPINDLE THRUST NANCE RELEASE
(2) Press the TAIL THRUST menu key.

" The following thrust selection menu will be displayed. In this menu, the reversed item
corresponds to the current thrust value (in the example below, 7.0 kN is selected).
Thrust selection menu
1.0KN 1.5N 2.0KN 2.5KN 3.0KN 4.0KN 5.0KN 6.0KN 7.0KN
2. Thrust selection
Tailstock thrust can be selected by using the machine menu or issuing the required M-code
commands.
(1) Press the corresponding menu key for the desired thrust.
The relationship between the M-codes and the thrust values is as follows:
M-code Thrust value M-code Thrust value

M731 1.0 kN (100 kgf) M736 4.0 kN (400 kgf)
M732 1.5 kN (150 kgf) M737 5.0 kN (500 kgf)
M733 2.0 kN (200 kgf) M738 6.0 kN (600 kgf)
M734 2.5 kN (250 kgf) M739 7.0 kN (700 kgf)
M735 3.0 kN (300 kgf)
4-19
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-9-2 Moving the tailstock
1. High-speed movement (valid with the front door closed)

Use this function to position the tail spindle close to the workpiece (thrust selection is invalid).
MF1 TAIL SPINDLE TAIL SPINDLE
(1) Holding down the MF1 key , press the TAIL SPINDLE key or to move the
tailstock at a speed of 6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [for center distance of 500U], or 4.5 m/min
(180 IPM) [for center distance of 1000U] in the corresponding direction.
MF1
The motion speed does not change even if the key is released during movement.
Temporarily stop the movement to change the speed.
The above key operation for high-speed movement, however, can only bring about a low-
speed motion at 1.2 m/min (47 IPM) unless the front door is closed.
D322S0015
2. Low-speed movement
Use this function to press the tail spindle against the workpiece and support it.
TAIL SPINDLE
(1) Press the key.

The tailstock will continue to move at a speed of 1.2 m/min (47 IPM) until the key is
released.
When the tail spindle is pressed against the workpiece and the selected thrust value is
reached, a buzzer will sound and the key lamp will light up to notify the completion of the
pressing operation.
Take care not to forget to repeat the pressing operation if re-chucking has been performed
(by temporarily opening the chuck and then closing it again).
MF1
The motion speed does not change even if the key is subsequently pressed during
low-speed movement. Temporarily stop the tailstock to change the speed.
4-20
MANUAL OPERATION 4
4-10 Other Manual Operations
4-10-1 Soft limit and its release

Movable range of X- and Z-axes is limited with parameters to interlock any axis motion
overstepping the stroke limit. For a movement out of the range, alarm 120 SOFT LIMIT is
displayed on the screen. Press the reset key (RESET) and carry out a reverse movement away
from the limit to release the alarm.
! Soft limit (*) does not become effective until, after power ON, zero-point return has been
performed and machine zero point has been set.
CAUTION ! Carry out the zero-point return certainly.
Machine zero point
X-axis
Z-axis
W-axis
D320S1008
Fig. 4-14 Soft limit
Parameters A9 (positive range limit) and A10 (negative range limit) are both separately set for
each axis.
* A “soft limit” is a point beyond which the NC unit does not monitor axis movement.
4-21
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-10-2 MACHINE LOCK

This is a function whereby the feed axes are mechanically locked. When this function is set,
there is no actual axis movement but the axis movements corresponding to the program data are
displayed on the screen. Use this function to check the program flow.
! The menu functions of machine lock and dry run cannot be selected nor cancelled without
the aid of the auxiliary key MF1.
CAUTION
Highlighted
MACHINE MACHINE
LOCK LOCK
Machine lock effective Machine lock ineffective

MF1
When pressing the menu key, the auxiliary key MF1 lamp will flicker. Then press the MF1 key.
The menu item will be highlighted and the MF1 lamp will light.
! If the machine lock function has been cancelled halfway during automatic operation, the
actual position of the feed axes may differ from those displayed on the screen.
WARNING
4-10-3 WORK LIGHT and COOLANT MANUAL
1. WORK LIGHT
This menu function is used to switch the machine light on and off.
Highlighted
WORK WORK
LIGHT LIGHT
Light is ON Light is OFF
- When the menu item is highlighted, the machine light will be turned on.
- The light will be automatically turned off after the lapse of a certain time for energy saving.
2. COOLANT MANUAL
This function allows you to start and stop the supply of coolant during manual operation.
(1) Call the coolant menu by pressing the coolant menu key .
(2) Press the COOLANT MANUAL menu key.

" The display of COOLANT MANUAL will be reversed and the coolant will be supplied.
(3) To stop the coolant press the COOLANT MANUAL menu key once again, or in case of
emergency press the coolant stop key .
4-22
MANUAL OPERATION 4
- Coolant feed can be alternately turned on and off by pressing the COOLANT MANUAL
menu key or the coolant stop key .
4-10-4 SET UP switch

This switch is located on the operating panel. Use the switch to carry out set-up jobs or to
operate the machine for program test purposes.
For normal machining operation, set the switch to the “O” position and remove the key. The
responsible person must keep the key.
MACHINE
SET UP
TR114-00936
Door Operation Setting of the MACHINE SET UP key switch

status mode O l
Only manual chucking and unchucking Only the following manual operations are enabled:
is enabled. - Spindle:
–1
Only jogging at 50 min (rpm)
- Axis motion:
Manual Rapid traverse at 2 m/min (6.56 ft/min) or less;
Open Jogging and handle pulse feed
- Turret rotation:
Step-by-step rotation
- Chuck, tailstock and TOOL EYE are operative.
Automatic operation is invalid (cannot be started) with the front door opened.
Automatic
Related alarm: No. 300 START COND. ERR. (DOOR OPEN)
Manual There are no limitations associated with the door interlocks.
There are no limitations associated Automatic operation is invalid (cannot be started)
Closed with the door interlocks. with the SET UP switch set to “l”.
Automatic
Related alarm: No. 354 START COND. ERR.
(SETUP SW)
4-23
4 MANUAL OPERATION
4-10-5 Manual operation of parts catcher

The parts catcher can be operated in manual mode by the related menu functions. Press the
MACHINE key, select the OPTION menu item and use the following menu functions as required:
- PARTS-C. EXTEND
To extend the parts catcher toward the chuck.
- PARTS-C. RETRACT
To retract the parts catcher into the stand-by position.
EXTEND
RETRACT
TR113-01731
Fig. 4-15 Manual operation of parts catcher
The parts catcher is protected by the following interlocks related to its operation in manual as
well as in automatic mode.
- EXTENDing operation is interlocked if
TOOL EYE is not set at its retract end, or
Front door is not closed.
- RETRACTing operation is interlocked if
Front door is not closed.
4-10-6 Manual operation of the automatic door

- To open the front door, press the AUTODOOR OPEN menu key while pressing down
DOOR
UNLOCK
the key.
- To close the front door, press the AUTODOOR CLOSE menu key while pressing down
DOOR
UNLOCK
the key.
4-24 E
PREPARATION FOR MACHINING 5
5 PREPARATION FOR MACHINING
5-1 Mounting/Removal of Tools

Tools are mounted to the turret not by a conventional bolting method, but by a clamping method
in which tool shanks with serrations machined on them are drawn into the turret.
This allows tool mounting/removal to be done quickly and securely.
! Use tools which are suitable for the work to be carried out and conform to the machine
specifications.
WARNING ! Use of badly worn tools can result in injury. Replace worn tools with appropriate new ones.
! Illuminate the workplace adequately to ensure safety.
! Remove tools and other obstacles in the vicinity of the machine and peripheral devices to a
safe distance so that the operator has sufficient clear floorspace to stand in and walk
around.
! Use tools which are no longer than the provided length so as to avoid interference.
CAUTION
(1) Mount the tool on the tool holder.

(2) Put the positioning pin and the tool shank into the holes on the outer surface of the turret.
(3) Clamp the clamping bolts with the allen wrench.
Positioning pin
Clamping bolt
Tool holder
Allen wrench
TR113-00346
Fig. 5-1 Mounting/Removal of tools
H322S2E010E 5-1
5-2 Preparation for Gripping Workpiece (Soft Jaw Machining)

Soft jaws are machined using different methods; the method used depends on machining
conditions such as the workpiece material, shape, dimensions, and chuck type. The general
method is described here.
! Close the door securely while machining.

! Never touch a rotating workpiece or spindle with your bare hands or anything else,
WARNING whatever circumstances may occur.
! Do not open or close the chuck while the spindle is rotating.
! Use the most appropriate soft jaws for the shape of the workpiece they are to grip, its
dimensions, material, and surface roughness.
CAUTION ! Adjust the chuck pressure in accordance with the shape of the workpiece, its dimensions,
material, and surface roughness, and the machining conditions.
! The master jaws must be used at the central part of the optimum jaw stroke range.
! Do not strike the workpiece clamped in the chuck with a hammer or any similar implement.
This will impair machine accuracy and functions and shorten machine life.
! Finish the φD diameter to the same dimension as the part of the workpiece to be gripped
(to approximately H7). During machining, set the same chuck pressure as that used to grip
the workpiece or a little higher.
! Soft jaws are machined by intermittent cutting. Make the spindle speed as low as possible
accordingly. During machining, use an internal cutting tool of small ejection to prevent
chipping or chattering.
5-2-1 In the case of workpiece external gripping
Pecking
External
diameter: φW
The length for gripping should

generally be no less than the 1/3rd
of the total length of the workpiece.
(Recommended value)
TR100-00015
Fig. 5-2 Soft jaw machining (External gripping)
5-2
(1) Measure the jaw stroke (radius value) and the jaw stroke minimum diameter (φd) .
Jaw stroke
(radius value)
φd
TR100-00022
(2) Clamp the appropriate plug in the chuck jaw so that the plug diameter (φP) may be
equivalent to the value of “φd + jaw stroke (radius value)”.
Plug
φP
TR100-00018
(3) The jaw should be machined so that the diameter of gripping section (φD) may be equal to
or smaller than the workpiece external diameter (φW ). (φD≤ φW )
φD
TR100-00019
5-3
5-2-2 In the case of workpiece internal gripping
Pecking
Interal
diameter: φW
The length for gripping should

generally be no less than the 1/3rd
of the total length of the workpiece.
(Recommended value)
TR100-00020
Fig. 5-3 Soft jaw machining (Internal gripping)
( 1) Measure the jaw stroke (radius value) and the jaw stroke minimum diameter (φd) .
Jaw stoke
(radius value)
φd
TR100-00017
(2) Clamp the appropriate plug in the chuck jaw so that the plug diameter (φP) may be equal to
the value of “φd + jaw stroke (radius value)”.
Plug
φP
TR100-00023
5-4
( 3 ) The jaw should be machined so that the diameter of gripping section (φD ) may be equal to
or smaller than the workpiece internal diameter (φW ) . (φD ≤ φW )
φD
TR100-00024
z Finish the φD section to the same dimension as the part of the workpiece to be gripped (to
approximately H6) and to a surface roughness of no more than 6-S. During machining, set
the same chuck pressure as that used to grip the workpiece or a little higher.
CAUTION
5-2-3 Precautions for the use of non standard soft jaws
z The strenght of the machine guarding including the window unit has been calculated to
! contain the ejection of a chuck jaw when running at the maximum speed of the machine
spindle with chuck diameter and jaw weight as specified for the appropriate machine type.
WARNING
If heavier chuck jaws are used, it will be necessary to restrict the maximum speed of the
machine spindle.
The machine is supplied with standard soft jaws. For weight of standard soft jaw see Section 1-1
in Part 5.
The use of chuck jaws exceeding the weight of the standard soft jaw will require a reduction in
maximum permissible spindle speed to ensure safe operating conditions, as follows:
Jaw weight (per jaw) Maximum spindle speed restriction
Standard soft jaw weight Maximum speed is possible

Standard soft jaw weight x 1.5 Reduce maximum speed by 20%
Standard soft jaw weight x 2 Reduce maximum speed by 30%
For information regarding the relationship of chuck gripping force to spindle speed and height of
the soft jaw, refer to chuck manufacturers instruction manual.
5-5
5-3 Preliminary Knowledge
5-3-1 Automatic operation of the tailstock (QTN-200M/250M)

In addition to manual operation mode, fully automatic programmed operation/MDI operation
mode is available to operate the tailstock.
M-code M31
Low speed at
1.2 m/min (47 IPM)
D311S0014
Fig. 5-4
The tailstock continues to move forward at a low speed of 1.2 m/min (47 IPM) until it is pressed
against the workpiece. The forward tailstock movement lamp blinks while the tailstock is moving.
When the tail spindle is pressed against the workpiece and the selected thrust value is reached,
the tailstock will stop and a buzzer will sound. The forward movement lamp remains lighting
while the selected thrust is maintained with the tail spindle pressed against the workpiece.
M-code M32
High speed at
6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [500U]
4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [1000U]
D311S0015
Fig. 5-5
The tailstock moves backward to its home position at a high speed of 6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [for
center distance of 500U], or 4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [for 1000U]. The reverse tailstock movement
lamp blinks while the tailstock is moving.
The reverse movement lamp remains lighting while the tailstock stays at its home position.
5-6
M-code M741
High speed at
6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [500U]
4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [1000U]
[1] [2]
Low speed at
1.2 m/min (47 IPM)
[1]: Position of TAIL POS. 1 in SET UP MANAG. display

[2]: Position of TAIL POS. 1 – Distance specified in machine parameter R113
D311S0016
Fig. 5-6
[R113 = Deceleration distance for pressing (Setting unit: 0.001 mm, Default: 50 mm)］
The tailstock moves to the TAIL POS. 1 specified in the SET UP MANAG. display, first at a high
speed of 6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [for center distance of 500U], or 4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [for 1000U]
and then at a low speed of 1.2 m/min (47 IPM). The forward tailstock movement lamp blinks
while the tailstock is moving.
M-code M742
High speed at
6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [500U]
4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [1000U]
[1] [2]
Low speed at
1.2 m/min (47 IPM)
[1]: Position of TAIL POS. 2 in SET UP MANAG. display

[2]: Position of TAIL POS. 2 – Distance specified in machine parameter R113
D311S0016
Fig. 5-7
[R113 = Deceleration distance for pressing (Setting unit: 0.001 mm, Default: 50 mm)］
The tailstock moves to the TAIL POS. 2 specified in the SET UP MANAG. display, first at a high
speed of 6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [for center distance of 500U], or 4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [for 1000U]
and then at a low speed of 1.2 m/min (47 IPM). The forward tailstock movement lamp blinks
while the tailstock is moving.
5-7
M-code M743
[3]
High speed at
6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [500U]
4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [1000U]
[3]: Returning distance specified in machine parameter R115
D311S0018
Fig. 5-8
[R115 = Returning distance (Setting unit: 0.001 mm, Default: 50 mm)］

The tailstock is returned through the parameter-specified distance from the current position at a
high speed of 6.0 m/min (240 IPM) [for center distance of 500U], or 4.5 m/min (180 IPM) [for
1000U].
The reverse movement lamp blinks while the tailstock is moving.
! Start of automatic operation and rotation of spindle are in general prohibited (interlocked)
unless the tailstock is pressed against the workpiece or standing by at its home position.
Note that this safety interlock is canceled in particular with the tailstock being in the return
WARNING
position of the M743 command.
M-code M744
Use this M-code to cancel the interlock of the spindle rotation with reference to the tailstock.
In the mode of M744 the spindle can be rotated independently of the current position of the
tailstock.
In addition to the cancel code M745, program end, resetting and switching-off include cancel-
lation of the M744 mode.
! Take due care in the mode of M744 since spindle rotation can be started even without the
tailstock being pressed against the workpiece.
WARNING
M-code M745
Use this M-code to cancel the above-mentioned M744 mode.
5-3-2 Energy saving mode
1. Reduction in stand-by power consumption
For the QTN-200M/MS and -250M/MS, the stand-by electric power consumed by the machine
can be reduced for environmental protection.
- Automatic switching-off of the lighting unit
The lighting unit will be automatically turned off for energy saving after the lapse of a certain
time of lighting. The light, however, will be turned on again by opening the front door, operating
the foot switch or any control on the operating panel, etc., for a set-up job.
- Automatic switching-off of the chip conveyor
The chip conveyor will be automatically stopped for energy saving after the lapse of a certain
time of operation.
5-8
The stand-by power consumption reducing function can be made invalid by specifying the
machine menu.
MACHINE
(1) Press the machine menu key on the operating panel to call the machine menu on the
screen.
(2) Select the MAINTENANCE menu item of the machine menu.
OPTION MAIN CHUCK TAIL MAINTE-

SPINDLE THRUST NANCE
LIGHT CONVEYOR
OFF CAN. OFF CAN.
Fig. 5-9
(3) Select the LIGHT OFF CAN. or CONVEYOR OFF CAN. menu item to highlight it.
- Automatic deactivation of the lighting unit is invalid when the LIGHT OFF CAN. menu
item is highlighted.
- Automatic deactivation of the chip conveyor is invalid when the CONVEYOR OFF CAN.
menu item is highlighted.
2. Setting the timers for the automatic deactivation

The automatic deactivation in question is executed according to the settings of the following
parameters:
- Automatic switching-off of the lighting unit
When the front door is opened (during set-up):
Machine parameter T44 (Setting unit: 0.1 sec, Default: 9000 = 15 min)
When the front door is closed:
Machine parameter T43 (Setting unit: 0.1 sec, Default: 150 = 15 sec)
- Automatic switching-off of the chip conveyor
Machine parameter T45 (Setting unit: 0.1 sec, Default: 3000 = 5 min)
Note: ‘R’ and ‘T’ Parameters are only accessible on MS models when the main spindle head
is selected.
5-9
- NOTE -
5-10 E
PART 3
OPERATING NC UNIT AND
PREPARATION FOR
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
3-axis Specification (with/without No. 2 Spindle and Y-axis)
H734S30081E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
Rule
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are
“inexecutable” functions.
follows:

DANGER

life or body.
WARNING

machine damage.
CAUTION
HGENPA0029E S-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and
other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check,
solid check, and other functions, if provided.
! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed
rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those
of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from
the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational
speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine.
! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
function is executed without its thorough understanding.
! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
without a thorough understanding.
Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC
! Before using the following cutting conditions:

Function
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken –
! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
S-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in
unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event
WARNING
of contact with the tool.
! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
from the way it did before.
! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the
machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be
interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
units provided with EIA functions.)
! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the
tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function
will not work correctly. (This precaution applies only to the M640MT/MT 5X/T/T NEXUS/TN
and M640M Pro/MT Pro.)
! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs between the machines equipped with
M640M Pro (e-Series such as the INTGEREX e-410, e-650 and e-1060) and the machines
equipped with M640MT/MT 5X/T/T NEXUS/TN/MT Pro (such as the INTGEREX non e-
Series, the SQT Series, the MPX Series and the QTN Series).
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine
operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before
using this system.
Machine with M640MT/MT 5X/T/

Sample program Machine with M640M Pro
T NEXUS/TN/MT Pro
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! For the machines equipped with M640M Pro (e-Series such as the INTGEREX e-410, e-
650 and e-1060), programmed coordinates can be rotated using an index unit of the
MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA
program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180 degrees around
the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus side of the X-axis
in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the program is created
ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected positions may incite
collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command
(G50.1, G51.1).
! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
check function, the solid check function, and other functions, and confirm that the program
operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining
program to change in operational status.
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present
inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit
of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that
position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on
this path.
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the
tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.
S-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
CAUTION
! If the machine employs sliding surface structure, lubrication may prove to be insufficient
during continuous microfeed machining (see Note 1 below), and in the worst case, seizure
of the sliding surface could result. For these reasons, the sliding surface needs to be
maintained in a well-lubricated condition during such machining by, for example, inserting
an oil-film forming program (see Note 2 below).
List of applicable models and intended axes (Models that employ sliding surface structure)
Classification Machine model Axes with sliding surface structure
Lathes INTEGREX 50Y X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
INTEGREX 50YB X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
INTEGREX 70Y X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
SLANT TURN 450 X-axis, Z-axis
SLANT TURN 50N X-axis, Z-axis
TURNING CENTER M-4N X-axis, Z-axis
POWER MASTER X-axis, Z-axis
QUICK TURN 40 X-axis, Z-axis
MEGA TURN series X-axis, Z-axis
SUPER QUADREX 200/250 Z2-axis
SUPER QUICK TURN 200/250MY Y-axis
SUPER QUICK TURN 300MY Y-axis
Vertical machining FJV-35/50/60 Z-axis
centers MTV-515/655/815 Z-axis
V-40/60 Z-axis
For further details and more specific examples, refer to the relevant Machine Operating
Manual, Part 4, Section 1-2, “Precautions for Microfeed Machining (Models that Employ
Sliding Surface Structure)”.
Note 1: Continuous microfeed machining refers to the operation in which the movement of the
intended feed axis through strokes shorter than those required for lubrication is
continuously repeated.
Note 2: The oil-film forming program refers to a program that creates an oil film on the sliding
surface by moving the intended machining axis over a long stroke during machining.
S-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables
#3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the
corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough
WARNING
notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system
variables before starting the above operations.
! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being
taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the
active program.
! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
CAUTION turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
As a result, serious machine damage will result.
! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
operations. If the multiplier is set to 100 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial
movement will become faster than that expected.
S-6
OPERATIONAL WARRANTY FOR THE NC UNIT

The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
equipment
Operating Environment
1. Ambient temperature
During machine operation: 5° to 40°C (41° to 104°F)

Note: When power is turned on, if the thermal sensor detects an ambient temperature under
5°C, the hard disk warm-up status indicator lamp will light up and the NC unit will not
start operating at once. After automatic heating of the hard disk by its internal heater,
the lamp will go out and the NC unit will start. It takes about 20 minutes for temperature
to increase from 0 to 5°C in order to avoid condensation due to sudden changes in
temperature.
2. Relative humidity
During machine operation: 30 to 75 % (without bedewing)

Note: As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to
deteriorate quickly.
S-7
- NOTE -
S-8 E
CONTENTS
Page
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION............................... 1-1
1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation ........................................................1-1
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW ......................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display.........................................................2-1
2-2 Types of Displays ...............................................................................................2-4
2-3 DISPLAY MAP Display.......................................................................................2-5
2-4 Windows.............................................................................................................2-6
2-5 Task Bar of “Windows” .......................................................................................2-8
3 DATA SETTING METHODS................................................................ 3-1
3-1 Setting Data and Address...................................................................................3-2
3-2 Selecting Menu Data ..........................................................................................3-3
3-3 Erasing Data.......................................................................................................3-3
3-4 Modifying Data ...................................................................................................3-4
3-5 Incremental Input................................................................................................3-4
3-6 Saving Data onto the Hard Disk .........................................................................3-4
4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL

STATUS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4-1 POSITION Display..............................................................................................4-1
4-2 MEASURE Display .............................................................................................4-6
4-3 EIA MONITOR Display .......................................................................................4-9
4-4 MACHINING - MONITORING Display..............................................................4-12
C-1
4-5 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display................................................4-20
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP................................. 5-1
5-1 SET UP MANAG. Display...................................................................................5-1
5-1-1 For MAZATROL programs .................................................................................... 5-4
5-1-2 For EIA/ISO programs......................................................................................... 5-25
5-2 TRACE Display ................................................................................................5-26
5-3 SET UP RECORD Display ...............................................................................5-30
5-4 CHUCK JAW DATA Display.............................................................................5-34
5-5 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY Display .................................................5-36
5-6 BF SCHEDULE Display....................................................................................5-39
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION ............................. 6-1
6-1 PROGRAM Display ............................................................................................6-1
6-2 SHAPE CHECK Display .....................................................................................6-2
6-3 TOOLPATH Display ...........................................................................................6-4
6-4 PROCESS LAYOUT Display............................................................................6-17
6-5 TPC EDIT Display ............................................................................................6-23
6-6 PROGRAM FILE Display..................................................................................6-25
6-7 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display ..............................................6-30
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS....................................................... 7-1
7-1 TOOL DATA Display ..........................................................................................7-1
7-2 TOOL OFFSET Display....................................................................................7-30
7-3 TOOL LIFE Display ..........................................................................................7-38
C-2
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS .......................................... 8-1
8-1 CUTTING CONDITION (REGIST) Display .........................................................8-1
8-2 CUTTING CONDITION (PERCENTAGE) Display..............................................8-4
8-3 CUTTING CONDITION (TURNING) Display ......................................................8-6
8-4 CUTTING CONDITION (MILLING) Display ........................................................8-8
8-5 CUT LEARN Display ........................................................................................8-10
8-6 USER PARAMETER Display ...........................................................................8-12
8-7 MACHINE PARAMETER Display .....................................................................8-13
8-8 WORK OFFSET Display ..................................................................................8-14
8-9 MACRO VARIABLE Displays ...........................................................................8-19
9 DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE ......................................... 9-1
9-1 DATA I/O Display ...............................................................................................9-1
9-1-1 Display operations................................................................................................. 9-2
9-1-2 Data input/output in text file format ...................................................................... 9-21
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS ............................................. 10-1
10-1 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM) Display .........................................................................10-2
10-2 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM HISTORY) Display ........................................................10-3
10-3 DIAGNOSIS (PLC SIGNAL) Display ................................................................10-4
10-4 MAINTENANCE CHECK Display .....................................................................10-5
10-4-1 Data display for normal check items.................................................................... 10-5
10-4-2 Data display for long-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items) ....... 10-6
10-5 RUNNING CONTROL Display .........................................................................10-7
C-3
10-6 DIAGNOSIS (VERSION) Display ...................................................................10-13
10-7 DIAGNOSIS (MONITOR) Display...................................................................10-14
10-8 DIAGNOSIS (OPTION) Display......................................................................10-18
10-9 DATA ERASE Window ...................................................................................10-19
10-10 ACCUMULATED TIME Window.....................................................................10-19
C-4 E
PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION 1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
To machine workpieces, first you must mount the tools for machining to the turret and form raw
jaws. Then, programs and other various data for automatic operation must be set to the NC.
This chapter describes procedures to be carried out before automatic operation.
1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation

Supposing that the tooling, raw-jaw forming and adjustment of each part for operation have
already been completed, the subsequent operational steps are described below.
Tool data setting
- Coordinates data setting for the tools (Tool-setting data measurement)

- Registration of the tool shape and the conditions of its usage
Program creation
- Program data setting (See the Programming Manual.)

- Machining shape check
- Tool path check
- Confirmation of the process layout
Data setting for set-up job
- Setting of the program zero-point (Z-offset)

- Setting of chuck barriers, etc.
- Check of cutting in simulated form on the display
Automatic operation
For execution procedure for automatic operation, see the Part 4, AUTOMATIC OPERATION.
Note: Carry out the automatic operation always in the order above.
H734S3A010E 1-1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- NOTE -
1-2 E
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display

The liquid crystal display unit of the operation panel presents a specific display according to the
particular requirements. All displays are composed of the display areas shown below.
2 1
16
７ 15 11 9 10
12 13 14 3 4
D735S1001
No. Name No. Name

1 Title area 9 Date display area
2 Icon display area 10 Time display area
3 Message display area 11 Display area of the number of TPS points
4 Data input area 12 Rapid traverse override display area
5 Data display area 13 Spindle speed override display area
6 Cursor 14 Cutting feed override display area
7 Alarm display area 15 Spindle selection display area
8 Menu display area 16 Menubar display area
H734S3B035E 2-1
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
1. Title area
The current display title is displayed.
2. Icon dipslay area
An image abstractly presenting the current display.
3. Message display area
Directions for operation and data descriptions are displayed in inquiry form.
The character strings displayed here are referred to as “messages”.
4. Data input area
Data that has been set using address/numeric data keys is displayed.
5. Data display area
Data that has been input, data that the NC unit has processed, and other informations
specific to the current display are displayed.
6. Cursor
This is a marking which can be moved in the data display area vertically or horizontally.
You can set data at the position where the cursor is displayed, or modify or erase the data
displayed at the cursor position.
7. Alarm display area
If erroneous operations are carried out or if machine or NC unit trouble occurs, details of
those operations or trouble will be displayed here as an “alarm”.
If an alarm is displayed, you must remove the cause.
Refer to the Alarm List for further information on alarms.
8. Menu display area
The functions of the ten keys (menu keys) located directly below the LCD are displayed.
The entire character string displayed here is referred to as a “menu”.
Each time a menu changes over, the functions of each menu key also change.
9. Date display area
10. Time display area
Date and time of the current day are displayed respectively.
The contents of these areas, however, differ from the above to provide special indications
proper to some displays.
11. Display area of the number of TPS points.
Number of tool stop positions currently stored by the TPS function.
For details of the TPS function see Section 5-2 in Part 4.
12. Rapid traverse override display area
Indication of the current rapid traverse speed in percentage (0 to 100) with respect to the
maximum value preset in parameter A1.
For details of the rapid traverse override see Section 3-1 in Part 4.
13. Spindle/milling-spindle speed override display area.
Indication of the current spindle/milling-spindle speed either in percentage (0 to 150) with
respect to the programmed value during automatic operation, or in number of revolutions
per minute during manual operation.
For details of the spindle speed override see Section 3-3 in Part 4.
2-2
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
14. Cutting feed override display area
Indication of the current feedrate either in percentage (0 to 200) with respect to the
programmed value during automatic operation, or in feedrate code shown below during
manual operation.
For details of the cutting feed override see Section 3-2 in Part 4.
Feed rate Feed rate

Display Display
[mm (in.)/min] [mm (in.)/min]
0 0 (0.00) 130 52 (2.05)
10 1.0 (0.04) 140 72 (2.84)
20 1.4 (0.06) 150 100 (3.94)
30 2.0 (0.08) 160 140 (5.51)
40 2.7 (0.11) 170 200 (7.87)
50 3.7 (0.15) 180 270 (10.63)
60 5.2 (0.21) 190 370 (14.57)
70 7.2 (0.28) 200 520 (20.47)
80 10 (0.39) 210 720 (28.35)
90 14 (0.55) 220 1000 (39.37)
100 20 (0.79) 230 1400 (55.12)
110 27 (1.06) 240 2000 (78.74)
120 37 (1.46)
15. Spindle selection display area

Indication of the spindle currently selected (only for machines equipped with two work
spindles).
Spindle No. 1 (Main spindle): SP1
Spindle No. 2 (Subspindle): SP2
16. Menubar display area

This area displays items such as “File”, “Setup”, “Window”, and “Help”. Selection of these
items allows printing, various settings for each display, display of windows, and so on.
Note 1: After selecting “Print to file” for printing data such as program contents, be sure to save
those program contents in drive C. If they are saved in other drives, the program
reference destination will be changed and this may not allow a work number to be
selected until power is turned on next time.
Note 2: To print program data, specify pages in order from the first page. Otherwise, printing
may fail.
2-3
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
2-2 Types of Displays

To manufacture a product using the NC lathe, you must register various information, such as tool
data, chuck data, machining program data, etc., in the NC unit in advance. You must also check
registered information and the movements of each section of the machine during operation.
The NC unit provides the following types of displays to allow for a variety of jobs that are required
for machine operation:
1. Displays related to the machine operational status
These displays allows you to check the movements of each section of the machine and the
machining status.
2. Displays related to program creation
Use these displays to create, check, and/or edit a program appropriate for the type of
product to be machined.
3. Displays related to tools
Call these displays to register type and compensation data for the tool you are going to use.
4. Displays related to machining set up
These displays allows you to carry out data registration required for executing a machining
program, and other jobs.
5. Displays related to parameters
These displays are used to register the control elements (parameters) of the NC unit or
machine.
Data that YAMAZAKI MAZAK recommends is displayed; you can add or change data as
required.
Refer to the Parameter List for further details.
6. Displays related to data transference between the NC unit and an external hardware unit
Use these displays to check the registration status of machining programs or to transfer
machining program data or other data between the NC unit and an external hardware unit.
7. Displays related to diagnosis
These displays are presented for diagnosis and maintenance of the NC unit or machine.
8. Dispalys related to cutting conditions
Call these displays to register the data for automatic decision of cutting conditions.
2-4
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2-3 DISPLAY MAP Display

Function
The names of the displays that the NC unit can create are listed here.
Remarks
- This display gives a grouped list of display names which can be displayed on the following eight
displays:
・POSITION display ・PROGRAM display ・TOOL DATA display
・SETUP INFORMATION display ・PARAMETER display ・DATA I/O display
・DIAGNOSIS display ・CUTTING CONDITION display
Note: The names of the displays that will be called through these displays listed here are
not displayed on this display.
- Any of the name-listed displays can be directly selected from this display.
<Data display>
③
① ②
⑤
④
⑦
⑥
D734S0100E
2-5
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
<Display data description>

No. Item Unit Data description
① POSITION ー Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the POSITION display.
Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the PROGRAM
② PROGRAM ー
display.
Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the TOOL DATA
③ TOOL DATA ー
display.
SETUP Names of displays that can be directly selected from the SETUP
④ ー
INFORMATION INFORMATION display.
Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the PARAMETER
⑤ PARAMETER ー
display.
Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the DIAGNOSIS
⑥ DIAGNOSIS ー
display.
CUTTING Names of the displays that can be directly selected from the CUTTING
⑦ ー
CONDITION CONDITION display.
1. Display operations
Selection of the DISPLAY MAP display makes the DISPLAY MAP menu item and the name of
the immediately previous display assume a reverse display status. For a display whose name is
not displayed, however, the name of the display immediately previous to that display changes
into reverse display status.
Any of the name-listed displays can be directly selected from this display.
(1) Make the name of the display to be selected assume a reverse display status.
- Press the cursor key and move the cursor to the name of the display to be selected.
(2) Press the DISPLAY MAP menu key.
! The display the name of which is highlighted will be selected.
Note: The intended display can also be selected by pressing the INPUT key, instead of
the DISPLAY MAP menu key.
2-4 Windows
1. Concept of windows
The windows of this NC unit refer to boxes that display operational aid information during the
selected display mode.
2. How to display a window
Two types of windows can be displayed: a type that can be displayed by pressing menu key, and
a type that can be displayed by selecting through “Window” on the menu bar.
Thus, only the appropriate window can be displayed on each display.
1. Windows opened by pressing menu key
Windows appearing when the corresponding menu key, such as WORK No. and RESTART,
is pressed.
2. Windows selected through “Window” on the menu bar
Windows appearing when the WINDOW key is pressed and an option is selected from the
listing under “Window” on the menu bar.
2-6
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
3. Erasing windows
Basically, windows that have been displayed by the selection from the menu bar or by pressing
the corresponding menu key can be erased by repeating the same selection from the menu bar
or by pressing that menu key once again, respectively.
Note: Several certain windows will be auto-erased if a menu key or the display selector key is
pressed or if numeric data is set.
4. Window list
Displays on which the

Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
WORK No. A list of program work numbers registered in the NC unit. - POSITION
Notes: - PROGRAM
1. If the display of the above data spans over mulitiple pages, the next - SET UP
page or the previous page can be displayed by pressing the page - DATA I/O
- JAW CUT DATA
key or , respectively.
- EIA MONITOR
2. Display data in the window will not be changed even if a work - MEASURE
number is input in the NC unit using data input/output operation while - TRACE
this window is displayed.
PART SHAPE For the POSITION display, the machining shape of the program for - POSITION
which a work number searching operation has been performed is - PROGRAM FILE
displayed only on the XZ plane. For the PROGRAM FILE display, the - EIA MONITOR
desired program can be drawn only on the XZ plane.
PROGRAM MONITOR The contents of a program for which a work number searching operation - POSITION
has been performed are displayed (that is, for a MAZATROL program, - TOOL PATH
process data is displayed, or for an EIA/ISO program, program data is - TRACE
displayed).
Also, during automatic operation with the POSITION display remaining
on the monitor, the section currently being executed is displayed in
highlighted form.
During the tool path check mode, the section currently being checked is
displayed in reverse status.
RESTART Indication of restart position and modal information that corresponds to - POSITION
the restarting section existing during the restart mode after EIA/ISO
searching has been completed.
HANDLE Amount of interruption existing during manual handle interruption. - POSITION
CALCU. Provides functions of a pocket calculator. - All displays
CALCINFO Guidance for setting crossing point calculation data - PROGRAM (MAZATROL)
This window is displayed over multiple pages.
The next page can be displayed by pressing the page key .
The previous page can be displayed by pressing the page key .
Notes:
1. The page of the reverse shape data can be brought up by pressing
the INPUT key while a page of a crossing point calculation shape
data list remains on the display.
2. Reverse position can be moved using the cursor keys.
2-7
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
Displays on which the

Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
TOOL DATA Data on the tools registered in the NC unit - PROGRAM (MAZATROL)
Note:
Registered tool data can be displayed only during creation of
MAZATROL programs, and only the tool data appropriate for the unit
section indicated by the cursor will be displayed.
If the display of the above data spans over multiple pages, the next
page or the previous page can be displayed by pressing the
page key or , respectively.
TOOLINFO Guidance on the shape of the tool indicated by the cursor - TOOL DATA
TOOL FILE List of tool files registered on the TOOL FILE display, machine position - TOOL DATA
and spindle speed.
POSITION Same as the current position, machine position and spindle speed - SET UP
displayed on the POSITION display. - MACRO VARIABLE
- TOOL OFFSET
JAW FIG. Guidance on the shapes of jaws - CHUCK JAW DATA
HELP Detailed information on the position of the cursor is displayed during - PROGRAM (MAZATROL)
creation of MAZATROL program.
DATA Erasure of each data - DIAGNOSIS (ALARM)
FORMAT
ALARM Display of alarm remedial information upon occurrence of alarms - Any display
NAVIGATION A parameter is provided for the selection of whether this window is to be
displayed automatically upon occurrence of an alarm (P106 bit 7 = 1).
Manual display of the window can be done by the selection through
“Help” on the menu bar in any display as well as by pressing the
ALARM NAVI. menu key on the GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display.
Notes:
1. One alarm is described on one page. For multiple simultaneous
alarms, use the page keys and to display the next and
previous pages, repectively.
2. Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars if the window area is not
large enough to display the information in its entirety.
3. Remedial information is only provided for main alarms No. 200 to
No. 399.
4. The contents of the window remaining opened will not be cleared
together with clearence of the alarm itself.
CNC SIGNAL Indication of current states, such as machining mode (turning or milling), - Any display
C-axial condition, chucking state, positioning at the 2. home position,
etc.
CUSTOM DISPLAY Display of the execution modules (with the extension .exe) contained in - Any display
the following folder.
Folder of execution modules.... C:\CustomDisplay
Press the CUSTOM DISPLAY menu key to open the window. Pressing
the menu key, however, only causes an alarm if no execution modules
are registered.
2-5 Task Bar of “Windows”

The task bar of “Windows” can be displayed by positioning the mouse pointer on the bottom of
the display first and then clicking the left-side touch pad.
2-8 E
DATA SETTING METHODS 3
3 DATA SETTING METHODS
Registration of data in the NC unit is accomplished by setting data in each item displayed on the
LCD unit.
This chapter describes general methods of setting, erasing and modifying data, and related
precautions.
More specific methods of setting data are described in each section for operating display. Refer
to the relevant section. You will only need to use the following seven types of keys when setting,
erasing or modifying data:
D735S1004’
No. Name No. Name

1 Menu keys 5 Shift key
2 Data cancellation key 6 Clear key
3 Cursor keys 7 Input key
4 Address/numeric data keys
The NC unit has the feature that it uses interactive input. That is, the operator can set data in
sequence just by responding to inquiry messages issued by the NC unit. When setting data,
check the message display area to ensure that the data you are going to set is exactly what you
want to set. Usually, messages are displayed in one of the following two formats:
1) “************?”
2) “******** <MENU>?” ******* : Details of the data to be set
Set data if the message is displayed in format 1) above.
Select data from the menu if the message is displayed in format 2) above.
H734S3C018E 3-1
3-1 Setting Data and Address

Set data and address using this procedure:
(1) Place the cursor on the intended item.
- Press one of the cursor keys and move the cursor to the intended item.
- If the cursor does not appear on the LCD screen, press one of the cursor keys and then
when the cursor is displayed, move it to the intended item.
Pressing the cursor key or displays the cursor at the first item on the screen
where you can set data.
Pressing the cursor key or displays the cursor at the last item on the screen
where you can set data.
(2) Specify data with address/numeric data keys.
Example: To set data of “6.02”:
Press 6 ・ 0 2 in that order.
! The selected data is displayed in the data input area.
6.02 Data input area
- If you have carried out wrong key operations and non-intended data has been displayed in
the data input area, press the clear key to erase the data, and then specify the intended
data.
(3) Press the INPUT key.
! The data that has been selected in step (2) above is displayed in the item position
where you have set the cursor.
Note 1: Address data setting
Address data can be set by either pressing the address data keys as they are, or
pressing key and then entering the address data.
SHIFT
Address data marked with a large-size character in the middle of each key can be set
just by pressing the address data keys as they are.
Address data marked with a small-size character at the right bottom corner must be set
by pressing the key first and then pressing the address data key.
SHIFT
Example: To enter N, press the N) key.
To enter ), press the and N) keys in that order.

SHIFT
Note 2: Unless data is displayed at the corresponding item within the data display area, the
data will not be registered in the NC unit. After data selection using data keys, therefore,
the data must be registered by pressing the INPUT key.
3-2
DATA SETTING METHODS 3
3-2 Selecting Menu Data

Use this procedure to set non-numeric/alphabetic data:
(1) Place the cursor on the intended item.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1 above.
(2) Select data item from the menu displayed.
! Selected data item is displayed at the position where the cursor has been placed.
Note 1: In the remainder of this manual, selecting data from a menu will be called “menu data
selection”.
For the NC unit, all data can be set by “numeric/alphabetic data setting” or “menu data
selection”, or by combined use of these two methods.
Note 2: After selection from the menu, some specific types of data (such as exponents on the
MACRO VARIABLE display) may be displayed in the data input area, not directly at
the cursor position. If such is the case, the INPUT key must be pressed following
execution of step (2).
Note 3: The menu consists of the following three types of terms:
Terms on display selection
Data
Terms that represent a function
Pressing the menu key corresponding to a term representative of a function displays
that term in reverse form. Re-pressing the same menu key clears the reverse status of
the term.
A reverse display status indicates that the corresponding function is valid.
A normal display status indicates that the corresponding function is invalid.
Example:
Reverse display status
SHAPE Function valid SHAPE Function invalid

ERASE ERASE
3-3 Erasing Data

Erase data as follows:
(1) Place the cursor in the position where the data to be erased is displayed.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1.
(2) Press the CANCEL key.
! The data at the cursor position is erased (or cleared to 0).
Note: You may be able to erase data line-by-line or to erase the entire displayed data at one
time.
Some types of data, however, cannot be erased by using the CANCEL key.
3-3
3-4 Modifying Data

Modify data as follows:
(1) Place the cursor in the position where the data to be modified is displayed.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1.
(2) Set new data.
! The data at the cursor position is overridden with the new data.
3-5 Incremental Input

During data setting, you may see the function name INCRMENT INPUT in a menu.
Using this function, you can set desired data just by selecting an incremental or decremental
value for the original data.
Effectively use this function when increasing or reducing displayed data.
The procedure for using the incremental input function is as follows:
(1) Press the INCRMENT INPUT menu key.
! The display of INCRMENT INPUT changes to reverse display status.
(2) Select an incremental or decremental value for the original data.
Example: To reduce the data of “12.05” by –0.1:
Press − 0 ・ 1 in that order.
! The selected value is displayed in the data input area.

! The original data changes by the value that was selected in step (2) above.
In the example shown above, the original data changes to “11.95” (= 12.05 − 0.1).
3-6 Saving Data onto the Hard Disk

This NC unit is designed so that machining programs, setup data and process layout data are
saved onto the hard disk. If the NC unit is accidentally turned off by a sudden power interruption
or other events, entered data may not be saved. During data entry, therefore, perform the
following operations as appropriate for data storage:
- Machining programs
Press the PROGRAM COMPLETE menu key or change the PROGRAM display to another
one even halfway to save the machining program as far as it is prepared.
- Setup data and process layout data
Select another display to save the current data.
If, moreover, the NC unit should be turned off during the operation of the hard disk, saved data
may be damaged. Store machining programs, setup data and process layout data, therefore,
onto IC memory cards or other media.
" Never fail to back up and store machining programs, setup data and process layout data
onto an IC memory card, a floppy disk or other media.
The machining programs, setup data and process layout data saved on the hard disk may
CAUTION
not be restored if the hard disk should fail in function.
(See the Section, 9-1 DATA I/O Display, for saving data.)
3-4 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 4
4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS
4-1 POSITION Display

Function
This display shows various types of information about the operational status of the machine and
the workpiece-machining status.
Remarks
- When the POSITION display is selected, the various functions required for manual operation or
automatic operation will be displayed at the menu display area. The usage of each such menu
is described in chapters related to manual operation and automatic operation.
- The items related to B-axis (or W) and SPDL2 will be displayed only for the machine with No. 2
spindle.
<Data display> When the COMMAND menu item is OFF
① ③
⑤
⑭
④ 22
21 ⑥
28
⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩
D734S0230E
H734S3D080E 4-1

Current X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Current position of each axis in the workpiece coordinates system
①
position C degrees (W is displayed, instead of B, for QT-N.)
Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b (a' b')
a
Work numbers
a'
② – b
WNo. Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
b'
M: MAZATROL program
E: EIA/ISO program
(For data items a' and b', data is displayed only during execution of
subprograms.)
- If the program being executed is a MAZATROL program:
The identification numbers of the unit and sequence being executed
are displayed.
UNo. a - b
a: Unit number
b: Sequence number
③ UNo. –
- If the program being executed is an EIA/ISO program:
The identification numbers of the sequence and block being executed
are displayed.
UNo. a - b
a: Sequence number
b: Block number
Number and offset number of the tool being used
TNo. a - b
④ TNo. –
a: Tool number
b: Tool offset number
Actual quantity of machined workpieces, and the preset number of
workpieces to be machined (Parts count)
⑤ PC Pieces PC a (b)
a: Actual quantity on machined workpieces
b: Preset number of workpieces to be machined
mm/rev Combined feed rate of the X-axis, Z-axis and Y-axis (Feed rate per
(inch/rev) rotation)
X,Z,Y
⑥ FEED mm/min Combined feed rate of the X-axis, Z-axis and Y-axis (Feed rate per
(inch/min) minute)
C °/min Feed rate of the C-axis
min –1
Number of revolutions per minute of the spindle
⑦ SPDL m/min
Peripheral speed of the spindle
(feet/min)
⑧ ( ) – Selected spindle gear number
min –1
Number of revolutions per minute of the milling-spindle
⑨ MILL m/min
Peripheral speed of the milling-spindle
(feet/min)
⑩ ( ) – Selected milling-spindle gear number
NEXT
⑪ G,M,T – G-, M- or T-codes that are included in the next block being executed
COMMAND
⑫ Z-OFFSET mm (inch) Z-offset value predefined in the program being executed
⑬ C-OFFSET mm (inch) C-offset value predefined in the program being executed
Load status of each spindle (relative loads with respect to those existing
⑭ <Load meter> % at a 30-minute output rating are displayed in percentage)
(W is displayed, instead of B, for QT-N.)
4-2
<Data display> When the COMMAND menu item is ON
⑱
⑪
24 26 ⑲
23
⑫
⑬
25 27
⑳ 22
21
28
D734S0231E
The work number and name of the currently active program
WNo. a b ( a’
’ b’
’ ) c (c’
’)
⑱ WNo. ( ) ( ) ー a, b, a’
’, and b’
’ are the same as those of data item ②. See the
description of data item ②.
Also, c, c’
’ denote the program name. Data will be displayed in data
item c’’only during execution of a subprogram.
⑲ UNo. ー The same as that of data item ③. See the description of data item ③.
⑳ TNo. ー The same as that of data item ②. See the description of data item ②.
Display of the Jaw No. currently mounted on the chuck (only for machines
21 JNo. ー
with AJC option)
Display of the Pocket No. currently selected (only for machines with ATC
22 PKNo. ー
option having pockets)
Display of modal information
23 S,F,G ー S : Current S command value

F : Current F command value
G: All current G codes divided in groups (only for EIA/ISO programs)
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) The same as those of data item ①. See the description of data item ①.
24 POSITION
C degrees (W is displayed, instead of B, for QT-N.)
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Current position of each axis in the machine coordinates system.
25 MACHINE
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Movement amount of each axis in the next block (incremental value)
26 BUFFER
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) - Display of the G code in the active block
27 REMAIN - Remaining distance of each axis to be moved in the active block
C degrees
28 UNIT – Display of the active unit number
4-3
1. Data registration
On the POSITION display, the following data can be registered:

- Number of machined workpieces (a, item ⑤)
After machining, the total number of machined workpieces will be calculated and displayed at a
of item ⑤, if “1” (counting valid) is set in the COUNTER item of the end unit in the program.
- Target number of workpieces to be machined (b, item ⑤)
This value is used for quantitative restriction of workpieces to be machined.
When the total number of machined workpieces reaches the value set here, the machine will
stop.
A. Procedure for changing the actual quantity of machined workpieces and the target
number of the workpieces to be machined
(1) Place the cursor on the data item PC.
- To change the number of machined workpieces, move the cursor to the position a
indicated in the figure below.
- To set the target number of workpieces to be machined, move the cursor to the position b
indicated in the figure below.
PC 5 ( 10)
↑ ↑
a b
(2) Set new data.

- Key in new data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key to register the
data.
A. Counter setting
The area on the screen where the coordinates of the various axes are displayed is referred to as
counter, and modification of the coordinates displayed on the counter is referred to as counter
setting.
During the manual operation mode, the coordinates of each axis displayed on the current
position counter, item ①, can be freely changed as required.
(1) Select the manual operation mode.
(2) Place the cursor on the coordinate data to be changed. X 0.
Z 0.
- After calling up the cursor with a cursor key, move the C 0.
cursor to the data you want to change B 0.
Y 0.
(3) Set new coordinate data.
4-4
B. Work number selection
Any of the work numbers displayed on the POSITION display (that is, the work numbers of the
programs which can be used for automatic operation) can be selected.
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Press the WORK No. menu key.
! The menu item changes to a reverse display status and a work number listing window
is displayed.
(2) Enter the desired work number.
C. Barrier release
The barrier function can be deactivated.

(1) Press the BARRIER CANCEL menu key.
! The menu item changes to a reverse display status and the barrier function becomes
invalid.
- Pressing the menu key once again releases the highlighted status of the menu item and
makes the barrier function valid.
After barrier release, take extra notice of machine interference.
D. Command display
Machine positions and modal information can be displayed. To check further details, see the item
on <Display Data Description> above.
(1) Press the COMMAND menu key.
! The menu item changes to a reverse display status and commands are displayed.
- Pressing the menu key once again releases the reverse status of the menu item and
creates the normal display.
E. Shape drawing
The shape data in the selected program can be displayed in the window.
See the Section, 2-4 Windows for further details.
F. Main menu items for manual operation
- GEAR SHIFT and WORK LIGHT

See the chapter on manual operation for further details.
- POSITION PRESET
Refer to the description of G30.1 in Chapter 15 of the EIA/ISO Programming Manual.
G. Menu items for automatic operation
- OPTIONAL STOP
- HANDLE INTERUPT
- BLOCK SKIP
- DRY RUN
- MACHINE LOCK
- BARRIER CANCEL
- THR. POS. TEACH
See the chapter on automatic operation for further details.
Remark: The BLOCK SKIP menu function is only valid for EIA/ISO programs.
4-5
4-2 MEASURE Display

Function
This display displays the measurement result existing when a measurement unit (MES) in the
program has been executed.
Remarks
- When the MEASURE display is selected and the menu selector key is pressed, the various
types of functions required for manual operation or automatic operation can also be displayed
at the menu display area.
For usage of each function, refer to the sections on automatic operations.
- The items related to B-axis (or W) will be displayed only for the machine with No. 2 spindle.
<Data display>
①
②
⑧
⑨ ⑤
⑦
⑩ ⑥
D734S0232E
mm Coordinates of the measurement point that has been specified in
TARGET X,Z,Y
② (inch) measurement unit data (The coordinate data is displayed upon the start of
DATA execution of the measurement unit)
C degrees
mm Measurement data calculated by measurement point
X,Z,Y
③
MEASURED (inch)
DATA
C degrees
mm The machine position where the sensor actually turned on, and the
#1
④
MEASURE (inch) corresponding axis name. #1 and #2 denote the first and second
POINT measurement positions, respectively.
#2 degrees
4-6
mm Amount of tool offset
X,Z,Y
(inch) (Tool offset) = (Data ③) – (Data ②)
⑤ OFS AMT.
Amount of C offset
C degrees
(C offset) = (Data ③) – (Data ②)
Upper-limit value of the tolerance that has been specified in measurement
+/X
unit data
⑥ T LIMIT mm (inch)
Lower-limit value of the tolerance that has been specified in measurement
–/Z
unit data
Number of execution and measurement cycle time of each of workpiece
measurement, nose measurement, external measurement, Z-offset
measurement, and C-offset measurement
⑦ MES. INTERVAL ー
a (b)
a: Number of measurement cycles
b: Measurement cycle time
⑧ SNS ー ON/OFF status of the sensor
⑨ R mm (inch) Radius of the sensor tool probe

Number, offset number, and name of the tool to be offset
T a - b (c)
⑩ OFS T ー a: Tool number
b: Offset number
c: Tool name
Note: The meaning of the data item ① is the same as that displayed on the POSITION
display. See the Section POSITION Display.
On the MEASURE display, the following data can be registered:

- Number of measurement cycles (see a of item ⑦)
If 1 is set in the end unit item COUNTER of the program, the number of times that each type of
measurement has been executed will be automatically counted and displayed at a of data item
⑦.
The cycle count being displayed can be changed to the desired value as required.
- Measurement cycle time (see b of item ⑦)
The measurement interval that has been set on the SET UP MANAG. display is displayed at b
of item ⑦.
The value displayed here can be freely changed as required, and if the value is actually
changed, measurement will be executed in accordance with the new value.
Even if the value here is changed, however, the corresponding value on the SET UP MANAG.
display will not change
See the Section SET UP MANAG. Display, for further details of the measurement cycle.
4-7
A. Procedure for changing the number of measurement cycles and measurement cycle
time
(1) Place the cursor on the data to be changed.
Example: To change the number of execution cycle of nose measurement:

Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the display.
Then, move the cursor to the position shown in the figure below.
WORK 0 ( 1)
TOOL 3 ( 10)
EXT. 0 ( 1)
Z-OFFSET 0 ( 1)
C-OFFSET 0 ( 1)
Cursor
(2) Set new data.

- Key in new data using the data keys, and then press the INPUT key.
- The number of execution cycles of the other types of measurements and the
measurement cycle time can also be changed using the same procedure to that described
above.
When you select the MEASURE display, the screen will display the same menu as that
appearing on the POSITION display.
That is, the various functions required for manual operation or automatic operation can also be
selected on the MEASURE display.
See the Section POSITION Display for further details.
The operator can shift from the MEASURE display to the POSITION display by pressing the
POSITION menu key.
4-8
4-3 EIA MONITOR Display

Function
- The currently active block is displayed in a reverse status form on the program list.
- During block stop, the program section that succeeds the buffered area can be edited.
- The program can be restarted by specifying its starting position using the cursor on the
program list. Existing modal information, however, becomes invalid.
Remarks
- This display is a special one for EIA/ISO programs.
- EIA/ISO function is an optional function.
<Data display>
D734S0104E
Display of the EIA/ISO programs.
① EIA/ISO program ー
The currently active block is displayed in a reverse status.
② Work number ー Display of EIA/ISO program work number.
③ Comment ー Display of comment for the program displayed on the item ②.
4-9
1. EIA/ISO monitor function
- The EIA/ISO program that has been selected on the POSITION display is listed on this display.
During automatic operation, the currently active block is displayed in a reverse status (the
program scrolls as operation progresses, and the active section is continually displayed on the
screen).
N0200 G00 X100. Z10.

N0210 G01 Z-40. Active block
N0220 X120. Z-60.
N0230 X125. Z-73.
N0240 X150.
- If the program is a subprogram

If the program is an EIA/ISO subprogram, display will change over to the subprogram.
If the program is a MAZATROL subprogram, during execution of a MAZATROL program the
block line where a subprogram of the main program has been called up will remain displayed in
a reverse status.
2. Editing functions
(1) Bring the machine to a block stop during automatic operation (for example, press the FEED
HOLD button).
(2) Press the PROGRAM EDIT menu key.
- The section from the block line immediately succeeding the currently active block line, to
the NC stored block line currently being buffered, changes to a reverse display status and
cursor appears at the beginning of the line immediately succeeding that section (the area
from the position where the cursor has appeared, to the end of the program, can be
edited).
M
N0010 G01 X100. Z2. Active block
N0020 X99. Z0.
Blocks currently being buffered
N0030 X90. Z-10.
N0040 X93.5 Z-15.3
N0050 X100. Z-40.
Cursor N0060 G00 X102.
N0070 Z2.
N0080 X70.
N0090 G28 U0. W0.
M
(3) Edit the program.

- Similar editing operations to EIA/ISO program editing operations can be carried out. Refer
to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for further details.
(4) Press the EDIT END menu key.
(5) Execute automatic operation (press the CYCLE START button).
- Operation will progress according to the edited program. Extra care is therefore required
during program editing.
4-10
3. Restart 2 unmodal function
(1) Move the cursor to the block line to be selected.

- The position to be selected can be searched for using the FIND menu function as required.
Refer to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for the usage of the menu function.
…
　　
N0010 G01 X100. Z2.
Cursor N0020 X 99. Z0.
N0030 X 90. Z-10.
(2) Press the RESTART 2 NONMODAL menu key.

! The line on which the cursor is present will become highlighted, which denotes the
selection of the block as the restart position.
…
　　
N0010 G01X100. Z2.
Highlighted N0020 X 99. Z0.
display N0030 X 90. Z-10.
(3) Execute automatic operation (press the CYCLE START button).

! Automatic operation will restart from the reverse display section.
Note 1: To cancel the selection, press the RESET key. The selection cannot be cancelled by
changing over the display.
Note 2: To change the selection, repeat steps (1) and (2) above once again.
Note 3: The restart function and the restart 2 unmodal function differ as follows:
Restart function Restart 2 unmodal function
- Program data is calculated from the head of the The entire program data before the designated block
program up to the designated block, and during is ignored, and the program is restarted from that
this time, modal information setting, program error block, based on the modal information valid during
checking, etc. are performed. execution. Therefore, modal data should be
- Also, since the coordinates present before the previously designated.
designated block have been stored, positioning at Before executing step (1) described above, set modal
those coordinates is performed before the data using the MDI mode.
designated block is executed. See the description on MDI for further details.
4-11
4-4 MACHINING - MONITORING Display

Function:
- Displaying the changes in the machining load of the spindle, milling-spindle and each axis, and
the output characteristics of the spindle and milling-spindle.
- Setting the threshold for the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-pecking cycle.
Remarks
<Data display> with normal display of DRILL MONITOR menu item
X
Z
C
B
Y
D734S1021E
4-12
<Data display> with reverse display of DRILL MONITOR menu item
⑤
⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪
⑥
⑦
X
Z
C ②
B
Y ⑭
⑫
⑬
D734S1022E

- Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b ( c )
① WNo. ー a: Work number
b: Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c: Program name
X, Z, mm - Current position in the workpiece coordinate system

② POSITION B (W), Y (inch) (W is displayed, instead of B, for QT-N.)
C degrees - Current position in the workpiece coordinate system
- Peak and average load values for the monitoring data currently
displayed.
( a )
% PEAK b
③ LOAD or
AVERAGE c
kW
a: Number of the corresponding graph
b: Peak value
c: Average value
4-13
- Graphic display of spindle and milling-spindle output characteristics or

changes in machining load of the spindle, milling-spindle and feed
axes.
( a ) b
c e
a: Graph number
b: Graph title
1. For a graph of spindle/milling-spindle output characteristics

c: Spindle/milling-spindle output (kW)
④ Graphic display ― d: Spindle/milling-spindle speed (min–1)
e: Spindle/milling-spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with
respect to the spindle/milling-spindle speed.
The output peak and average output (for the displayed data
samplings) are indicated respectively by a red disk ● (in a
position of the abscissa corresponding to the spindle/milling-
spindle speed for the output peak) and a white triangle △.
2. For a graph of changes in machining load of the spindle/milling-
spindle and feed axes
c: Load (%)
d: Sampling time (sec)
e The load values applied during rapid traverse and cutting feed
are respectively displayed in light blue and green lines. White
and red lines refer to the average load and peak load during
cutting feed.
Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b c
( a’ b’) (c’)
a
Work numbers
a’
b
Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
⑤ WNo. — b’
c
Name of the program
c’
* For data items a’ and b’, data is displayed only during execution of
subprograms.
* For machine that displays a program name in 48 character, only the
first 16 characters are displayed for items c and c’.
- If the program being executed is a MAZATROL program:
UNo. a – a’
a : Number of the unit being executed
a’ : Number of the sequence being executed
⑥ UNo. ー
- If the program being executed is an EIA/ISO program:
UNo. a – a’
a : Number of the sequence being executed
a’ : Number of the block being executed
Name of the program unit currently being executed
⑦ UNIT — UNIT: a
a： Name of the unit
⑧ TNo. — Number of the current tool
⑨ TOOL — Name (type) of the current tool
mm
⑩ NOM-φ Nominal diameter and suffix of the current tool
(inch)
⑪ MAT. — Material of the current tool
4-14
⑫ PEAK N･m Peak value of the machining torque
⑬ THRESHOLD N･m Threshold for pecking by a drill (Note 1)
- Graphic display of the machining torque of the milling-spindle.
a
c
b
⑭ Graphic display ― a: Machining torque (N･m)
b: Sampling time (sec)
c: Machining torque of the milling-spindle is displayed in a green
line.
Red and yellow lines refer respectively to the peak value (for
the displayed data samplings) and the threshold for pecking by
a drill.
Note 1: Threshold is only displayed when a drill is currently mounted on the milling-spindle.
Note 2: The unit “N･m” denotes the torque (torsional moment) of the axis. If a disk with radius
of 1 meter, for example, is rotated at a force of 1 newton, a torque of 1 N･m will be
imposed on the axis of rotation.
Note 3: The load of the milling-spindle cannot be displayed on some machine models
(equipped with a universal invertor, for example). Accordingly, such models cannot
provide the drilling function with auto-pecking operations with reference to the cutting
load.
1. Display modes of the MACHINING - MONITORING display
This display is provided with the following two display modes (to be alternated by the DRILL
MONITOR menu function):
- Machining-monitoring mode
Select this mode (with DRILL MONITOR normally displayed in the menu display area) to
display the machining load of each axis and the output characteristics of the spindle.
- Drill-monitoring mode
Select this mode (with DRILL MONITOR highlighted in the menu display area) to display the
machining torque of the milling-spindle and to set the threshold for the cutting-load detection
type of drill auto-pecking cycle.
2. Selecting graphs to be displayed in the machining-monitoring mode
Two or four graphs can be displayed at the same time in the machining-monitoring mode.
- Four-graph display mode
Four graphs are displayed squarely at the same time. Process monitoring data from the past of
a maximum of 80 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
- Two-graph display mode
Two graphs are displayed vertically on the display at the same time. Process monitoring data
from the past of a maximum of 160 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
Note: Peak and average values displayed are those calculated from the monitoring data
currently being displayed graphically.
4-15
The following data can be displayed graphically in this mode:
Display item Display example Description

- Output characteristics of the spindle/milling-spindle.
• Red line:
Spindle/milling-spindle output characteristics
against the spindle/milling-spindle speed.
• Yellow line:
SPDL. OUTPUT Maximum rotational speed for the current tool (only
CURVE displayed for a valid setting [> 0]).
1 • Red disk ●:
MILL OUTPUT
Crossing point of the maximum output value and
CURVE
the corresponding spindle/milling-spindle speed
(within the displayed data samplings).
• White triangle △:
Crossing point of the average output value of the
displayed data samplings and the current
spindle/milling-spindle speed.
- Changes in the machining load of the spindle/milling-
spindle.
• Blue line:
Load value applied during rapid traverse.
• Green line:
SPDL. LOAD Machining load values applied during cutting feed.
2
MILL LOAD • Red line:
Maximum machining load value applied during
cutting feed.
• White line:
Average machining load value applied during
cutting feed.
- Changes in the machining load of the selected
X-AX LOAD servo-axis.
The meaning of lines is the same as for the graph of
Z-AX LOAD
the spindle machining load.
3 C-AX LOAD
B-AX LOAD
Y-AX LOAD
4-16
(1) Press the 2 GRAPH (or 4 GRAPH) menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box for graph
selection will appear:
(A) 2-graph display mode (B) 4-graph display mode
(2) Using the Tab key and the cursor keys, select the type of graph for each display section.
- Move the focus (reverse display) to the text box corresponding to the desired display area
by using the Tab key, and then select the type of the desired graph by using the cursor
keys.
Text box with

the focus

! The dialogue box for graph selection will be closed, the reverse display of the menu
item cleared and the graphic display will be made now in each section according to the
settings.
Note 1: The same data cannot be displayed on multiple graph sections. The setting for such a
display will cause the alarm 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT to be given.
Note 2: Selection of graph type can be repeated as often as required in the same display
mode.
3. Setting the threshold in the drill-monitoring mode
In the drill-monitoring mode, the pecking threshold level for the cutting-load detection type of drill
auto-pecking cycle can be set monitoring the machining torque of the milling/spindle. This drill
auto-pecking cycle will execute the pecking process only when the machining torque exceeds
the threshold level. The setting procedure is as follows:
(1) Drill an actual workpiece using the tool for which the threshold is to be set.
- Select a drilling hole depth that does not cause clogging with any chips. The drilling hole
depth should not exceed the value of [3 × tool diameter of the drill].
(2) Press the BORDER VALUE menu key.
(3) Enter the desired threshold seeing the graph-displayed machining torque and peak torque.
! The entered pecking threshold level is displayed in a yellow solid line on the graph.
! The same value is set in the corresponding item on the TOOL DATA display.
4-17
Note 1: Even if the threshold is changed during execution of the cutting-load detection-type drill
auto-pecking cycle, that new value will not become valid until the machining cycle is
completed.
Note 2: Do not perform the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-pecking cycle if the drill has
a tool diameter of 4 mm or less or is made of a material other than high-speed steel.
Otherwise, tool damage may result since the machining torque cannot be detected
accurately under those conditions.
4. Scale change in the drill-monitoring mode
A. Automatic vertical scale change
When a new drill is mounted onto the spindle, the scale for the vertical axis of the cutting torque
graph is changed automatically. The cutting resistance is calculated theoretically from the tool
diameter of the drill and then the optimum scale is selected automatically from nine types (1, 2, 5,
10, 20, 50, 100, 200 and 500 N･m).
Note 1: The scale will not be changed if a non-drilling tool is mounted onto the spindle.
Note 2: If automatic scale change has not occurred in the past, 10 N･m will be selected as the
initial value.
B. Manual vertical scale change
The scale for the vertical axis of the cutting torque graph can be changed to the desired value in
manual mode. The procedure is as follows:
(1) Press the SCALE CHANGE menu key.
(2) Enter the desired scale.
- The data that can be entered ranges from 0 to 655.35 N･m.
! The graph is cleared and then a new one is displayed with the new scale.
! During automatic operation, the graph is cleared temporarily and monitoring
commences from the beginning of the graph with the new scale.
5. Setting the display time scale
The time scale for graphic display can be changed in steps as required for an overview or an
enlarged view in detail.
(1) Press the CHANGE TIME menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box for time
scale selection will appear:
4-18
(2) Using the cursor keys, select a time scale as required.
- The knob displayed in the dialogue box can be moved by pressing a cursor key. Moving
the knob to the right (LONG) or the left (SHORT) prolongs or shortens the time which
corresponds to the right end of the abscissa for the graphs concerned.
Increasing the time scale Decreasing the time

for an enlarged view scale for an overview
- The display time can be selected from among eight or seven steps (for 2- or 4-graph
display mode) as shown below:
Drill-monitoring mode and

Machining-monitoring
Step Machining-monitoring
4-graph display mode
2-graph display mode
LONG 1 160 80
2 80 40
3 40 20
4 20 10
5 10 5
6 5 2.5
7 2.5 1.3
SHORT 8 1.3
Unit: sec

! The dialogue box for time scale selection will be closed, the reverse display of the
menu item cleared and the graphic display will be made now in each section according
to the settings.
4-19
4-5 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display

Function:
The machining time and spindle/milling-spindle output data are listed for each tool according to
the results of actual machine operation.
<Data display> with normal display of TOOL DISTINCT menu item
① ① ② ③
④
⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ○
27
D734S1003E
4-20
<Data display> with reverse display of TOOL DISTINCT menu item
① ① ② ③
④
⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ○
27
⑯ ○
22
○
22
⑰
⑱ ○
26
⑲
⑲ ○
23
⑳ ○
24
○
21 ○
25
D734S1004E
Work number of the machining program
WNo. a b (c)
① WNo. ― a : Work number
b : Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c : Program name
② TOTAL PROCES ― Total number of tool sequences in the program
③ TIME H/M/S Total machining time
④ NUM.OF ATC ― Number of ATC operations required for actual machining
RATIO OF - Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool
⑤ MACHINING ― - The display for a compound program is made in two strips for both
TIME headstocks.
⑥ ― Serial number of the machining process
⑦ TNo. ― Tool number
⑧ TOOL ― Tool name
⑨ TIME (sec) sec Machining time
⑩ AVERAGE kW Average value of spindle output
⑪ PEAK kW Peak value of spindle output
⑫ WNo. ― Work number of the program
⑬ UNo. ― Unit number
⑭ UNIT ― Unit name
- Tool sequence number (Point/Line/Face machining)
⑮ SNo. ―
- Distinction between roughing and finishing (Turning/Milling)
⑯ TIME RATIO % Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence
4-21

- Spindle speed specified in the tool sequence
⑰ RPM min–1
- Min. and max. rotational speeds for constant peripheral speed machining
m/min
⑱ C-SP Circumferential speed specified in the tool sequence
(feet/min)
mm/rev Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(inch/rev) (upper: Feed per revolution)
⑲ FR
mm/min Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(inch/min) (lower: Feed per minute)
⑳ DEP-A mm Axial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
21 WID-R mm Radial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
SPDL Ratio of the peak/average spindle load to the output characteristics,
22 %
PEAK/AVERAGE calculated for the tool sequence
- Number of teeth (cutting edges) of the tool (according to the setting on the
23 TEETH ― TOOL FILE or TOOL DATA display)
- No display for turning units
24 MAT. ― Material of the tool (according to the setting on the TOOL DATA display)
mm - Diameter of the tool (according to the setting on the TOOL DATA display)
25 DIAMETER
(inch) - No display for turning units
Spindle/milling-spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to the
spindle/milling-spindle speed, displayed for the tool sequence. The output
SPDL./MILL
26 ― peak and average output are indicated respectively by a red disk (in a
OUTPUT CURVE
position of the abscissa corresponding to the spindle/milling-spindle speed for
the output peak) and a white triangle.
Indication of headstock (for models of dual-headstock or with the 2.
27 HEAD ―
headstock)
Note: The output data (peak/average values) of the milling-spindle cannot be displayed on
some machine models (equipped with a universal invertor, for example).
1. Displaying data
The functions of this display cannot be used for a machining program which has not ever been
executed actually on the machine.
(1) Execute the desired program in the automatic operation mode.
- Refer to Chapter 1 for the procedure.
(2) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display.
! The results of the machine operation will be displayed in the total display mode
described in the following subsection.
- No data will be displayed if the automatic operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the automatic operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.
2. Display modes
A. Outline
This display has the following two display modes:

- Total display mode
The display is always made in this mode when the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT
display is selected.
4-22
In this display mode, the machining time and average spindle output are listed for each tool
sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the program.
- Tool-specific display mode
In this display mode, which can be selected and canceled by pressing the TOOL DISTINCT
menu key, data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can be selectively
displayed in further detail.
B. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode
(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under “RATIO OF MACHINING TIME”.
- For a program the execution of which has been completed, the machining time ratio for
each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed in a color-identified format
on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The items on the strip graph are
keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to those line items of the list
(machining time and average spindle output for each tool sequence) that are displayed at
the bottom of the graph.
Graphic display of
the ratio of
machining time
List
(2) Press a cursor key.

! The cursor will appear in the “TNo.” column.
! A black triangle (▲) will be displayed under the graph “RATIO OF MACHINING TIME”
to indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in
the display example below.
Indicates the item of

the selected tool
sequence
Cursor
4-23
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool sequence number.
! The black triangle will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can be visually
checked.
(4) Press the TOOL DISTINCT menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display contents will be changed
for a detailed view of the specified tool.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved and the
reverse display of the menu item cleared.
4-24 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 5
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP
5-1 SET UP MANAG. Display

Function
This display is used to input the various types of operational set up data required for executing
programs.
Operational set up data consists of the following:
- Z-offset data
- C-offset data
- Data related to chuck barriers
- Preset quantity of workpieces to be machined
- Measurement cycle time
- Data related to tail barriers
- Data related to workpiece delivering
- Data related to tailstock position
Remarks
- When the SET UP MANAG. display is selected and the menu changeover key is pressed, the
various types of function required for manual operation or automatic operation can also be
displayed at the menu display area.
For usage of each function, refer to the Operating Manual for the machine.
- The work numbers of the programs which have been registered on the PROGRAM FILE
display, and Z- and C-offsets are listed in the window, when the OFFSET WINDOW menu item
is turned on.
- The data related to tail barriers will not be displayed for the machine with No. 2 spindle or chuck
work machines.
- The data related to workpiece delivering will be displayed only for the machine with No. 2
spindle.
H734S3E081E 5-1
<Data display>
For machine without No. 2 spindle
① ② ③
④ ⑤
⑥ ⑧ ⑪
⑦ ⑨ ⑫
⑯ ⑩ ⑬ ⑰
⑭
⑮
D734S0234’E
For machine with No. 2 spindle
① ② ③
④ ⑤
⑥
⑦ ⑧ ⑧
⑨ ⑨ ⑰
⑯
⑩ ⑩
⑱ ⑲ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D734S0235E
5-2
① WNo. — Data of the program which has been selected in the foreground
② UNo. — mode.
Same as the data of display data items of the POSITION display.
③ TNo. —
④ JNo. —
⑤ PKNo —
Offset data from the reference workpiece zero-point to the program
⑥ Z-OFFSET mm (inch)
zero-point
Offset data from the machine zero-point of the C-axis to the
⑦ C-OFFSET degrees
program zero-point
⑧ CHUCK* — Identification of whether or not the chuck barrier is effective
⑨ JAW No.* — Number of the jaw to be used
⑩ GRIP DIA.* mm (inch) Diameter of that part of the workpiece that is to be chucked
⑪ TAIL BARRIER* — Identification of whether or not the tail barrier is effective
⑫ TAIL STOCK* — Identification of whether or not the tailsock is to be used
- Projection length of the tail spindle
QUILL EXT.or
⑬ — - Distance from the reference workpiece zero-point to the end of
REF.TO T/S*
the tailstock
⑭ TAIL POS.1 mm (inch) Tailstock pressing position 1
⑮ TAIL POS.2 mm (inch) Tailstock pressing position 2
⑯ COUNTER pcs. Preset quantity of workpieces to be machined
WORK Execution cycle time of each of workpiece measurement, nose
TOOL measurement, external measurement, Z-offset measurement and
MES. C-offset measurement.
⑰ EXTERNAL —
INTERVAL*
Z-OFFSET
C-OFFSET
⑱ No. — Registration number of workpiece delivering data (This number is
crosskeyed to the number that has been set in the data item SET
UP No. of each workpiece transfer unit (TRS).)
⑲ UNo. — Number of the workpiece transfer unit (TRS)
⑳ MODE — Operation pattern during the workpiece transfer unit (TRS)
TRS-a
a: Operation pattern (CHK, BAR or MOV)
(This pattern is crosskeyed to the data that has been set in the data
item MODE of each workpiece transfer unit (TRS).)
21 HEAD — If the data item MODE is TRS-CHK:
- The direction of delivery of the workpiece.
If the data item MODE is TRS-BAR:
- The number of the spindle at which the chuck is unclamped
before Z-axis movement.
1: No. 1 spindle
2: No. 2 spindle
(This data here is crosskeyed to the data set in the HEAD item of
the workpiece transfer unit (TRS).)
22 B1 mm (inch) If the data item MODE is TRS-CHK:
- B-coordinate in the machine coordinates system during
workpiece delivering
- B-coordinate in the machine coordinates system during
workpiece-rechucking
5-3

23 B2 mm (inch) If the data item MODE is TRS-CHK:
- B-coordinate in the machine coordinates system after workpiece
delivering
- B-coordinate in the machine coordinates system after workpiece-
rechucking
If the data item MODE is TRS-MOV:
- B-coordinate in the machine coordinates system to which the B-
axis is to move
24 Z-OFFSET mm (inch) Z-offset data which becomes valid after workpiece
delivering/rechucking, or B-axis movement
25 C1 degrees C-coordinate of the workpiece delivering position for No. 1 spindle
(C-coordinate in the machine coordinates system)
26 C2 C-coordinate of the workpiece delivering position for No. 2 spindle
(C-coordinate in the machine coordinates system)
27 C-OFFSET mm (inch) C-offset data which becomes valid after workpiece
delivering/rechucking
* : These items are valid only for MAZATROL programs.

Refer to the description of parameters B81 and B241 to B254 given in the Parameter List for the barrier function
applied to EIA/ISO programs.
5-1-1 For MAZATROL programs
On the SET UP MANAG. display, the following data for machining set up can be registered:
- Z-offset data (see data item ⑥)
Z-offset data refers to the offset data from the reference workpiece zero-point to the program
zero-point with the Z-axis set at the machine zero-point.
Z-OFFSET
Reference
Workpiece to be cut workpiece
zero-point
Program
Reference workpiece
zero-point
(Workpiece for tool set)
T3S013
When Z-offset data is input, the memory of the NC unit will store the positional relationship
between the nose of each tool mounted on the turret and the program zero-point (see the
Section, TOOL DATA Display).
For automatic operation, therefore, Z-offset data must be input for each program executed.
5-4
- C-offset data (see data item ⑦)
C-offset data refers to the offset data from the machine zero-point of the C-axis to the program
zero-point.
Input the data when the position of milling cast stock materials in the C-axis direction must be
stored into the memory of the NC unit in advance.
- Data related to chuck barriers (see data items ⑧ through ⑩)
Data must be set in data items ⑧ through ⑩ when chuck barriers are to be arranged. Setting
the data enables tools to be prevented from interfering with the chucks during manual or
automatic operation.
- Tailstock pressing position (see data items ⑭ and ⑮)
The NC powered tailstock allows up to two tailstock positions to be specified for each program.
It is possible by assigning the tailstock position data to move the tail spindle in accordance with
M-code commands.
- Preset quantity of workpieces to be machined (see data item ⑯)
Input the data when one program is to be repeatedly executed for continuous machining of
workpieces.
Machining will immediately stop when the quantity of machined workpieces reaches the preset
quantity of workpieces to be machined.
- Measurement cycle time (see data item ⑰)
If repeated execution of the same program is required, input the time intervals at which the
measurement unit (MES) within that program is to be executed.
Program First Second Third n-th n + 1-th

execution time time time time time
MES Yes No No No Yes

execution
Measurement cycle: n
The procedures for setting each type of set up data listed above are described below.
The following description assumes that the work numbers of the programs to be executed are
already input:
A. Procedure for setting Z-offset data
If known Z-offset data is to be set

(1) Place the cursor on the data item Z-OFFSET.
- Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the display. Then, move the cursor to the data
item Z-OFFSET.
- When the cursor (reversed item) is not placed in the SET UP DATA group, press the
key [TAB] to move the cursor into the SET UP DATA group.
(2) Set the Z-offset data.
- Key in the known data using the numeric data keys, and then press the INPUT key.
5-5
If unknown Z-offset data is to be set

If the Z-offset data to be set is unknown, the data can be set using either one of the following two
methods:
- Using the TEACH (tool-nose position data store) function
- Manual Z-offset measurement using a touch sensor
<Using the TEACH function>

(1) Index a tool whose tool set has already been completed.
- For information on tool set, see the Section, TOOL DATA Display.
(2) Bring the tool nose into contact with the edge of the workpiece.
- Move the X-axis and the Z-axis under manual operation to bring the tool nose into contact
with the edge of the workpiece.
(3) 1Place the cursor on the data item Z-OFFSET.
(4) 1Press the TEACH menu key.
! Pressing this menu key makes TEACH assume a reverse display status.
(5) Set the distance from the program zero-point to the tool nose in the Z-axis direction.
Example: If the program zero-point is present at the positions shown below:
+X Program zero-point
+Z
Workpiece Workpiece
5 mm
Input “0”. Input “5”.
T3S014
! The Z-offset data is set automatically and the reverse display status of the TEACH is
released.
5-6
<Manual Z-offset measurement using a touch sensor>
(1) Index the touch sensor.
- Prior to the start of manual Z-offset measurement, tool set for the touch sensor you are
going to use must be completed.
(2) Bring the touch sensor close to the edge of the workpiece.
- Move the X-axis and the Z-axis under manual operation until the probe of the touch sensor
has come to a position 5 to 10 mm (0.20 to 0.39 in.) away from the edge (measurement
surface) of the workpiece.
Measurement surface
Probe
Touch sensor
Workpiece
5 to 10 mm
(0.2 to 0.39 in.)
T3S015
(3) Place the cursor on the data item Z-OFFSET.

(4) Press the MEASURE Z-OFFSET menu key.
! Pressing this menu key makes MEASURE Z-OFFSET assume a reverse display
status.
The cutting feed mode is automatically selected at the same time, and the feed rate is
fixed at the measurement speed that has been specified using parameter U21.
(5) Set the Z-coordinate of the workpiece edge.
Example: If the program zero-point is present at the positions shown below:
+X
Program zero-point
+Z
Workpiece
Workpiece
5 mm

T3S090
5-7
(6) Press the axis move button to bring the touch sensor into contact with the edge of the
workpiece.
Example:
Z Z
Touch sensor
Workpiece
Measurement
X speed
T3S016
- The axis will stop moving when the touch sensor touches the edge of the workpiece.
- The Z-offset data will then be set automatically.
(7) Press the axis move button to move the touch sensor away from the workpiece.
- Press the button used for the axis movement in the opposite direction to that of the axis
move button you pressed in step (6) above.
(Because of the automatic interlock function, the axis cannot be moved using other axis
move buttons.)
- When the axis move button is released, following the stoppage of axis movement, the
interlock function will be released as a result and usual axis movement operations can be
subsequently carried out.
Note: When the Z-offset measurement unit (MES-ZOF) in the program is executed, the value
displayed at item ⑥ will be overridden with the value existing after measurement.
B. Procedure for setting C-offset data
If known C-offset data is to be set

(1) Place the cursor on the data item C-OFFSET.
item C-OFFSET.
(2) Set the C-offset data.
If unknown C-offset data is to be set

If the C-offset data to be set is unknown, the data can be set using either one of the following two
methods:
- Using the TEACH (tool-nose position data store) function
- Manual C-offset measurement using a touch sensor
5-8
<Using the TEACH function>
(1) Index a tool suitable for measuring the C-axis position.
- Select a milling drill, for example.
(2) Set the measurement reference point to the tool-nose position.
- Predetermine an easy-to-measure point as the measurement reference point, and move
each axis under manual operation so that the point is set in the tool-nose position.
Example:
Measurement
reference point
NM310-00334

! The message C-OFFSET <TEACH>? will be displayed.
(4) Press the TEACH menu key.
! Pressing this menu key makes TEACH assume a reverse display status.
(5) Set the angle formed by the program zero-point and measurement reference point.
Example: If the C-axis program zero-point is present at the positions shown below:
Program zero-point (same

position as the measurement
reference point)
+C
o
+ 60
o
–60
Program
zero-point
Program zero-point
Input “0”. Input “60”. Input “–60”.

NM210-00335
! The C-offset data is automatically set and the reverse display status of the TEACH is
released.
5-9
<Manual C-offset measurement using a touch sensor>

(1) Index the touch sensor.
(2) Bring the touch sensor close to the measurement surface.
- Move each axis under manual operation until the probe of the touch sensor has come to a
position 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.39 in.) away from the measurement surface.
Example:
Touch sensor
5 to 10 mm
(0.2 to 0.39 in.)
Probe
Measurement surface
NM210-00336

(4) Press the MEASURE C-OFFSET menu key.
! Pressing this menu key makes MEASURE C-OFFSET assume a reverse display
status.
The cutting feed mode is selected automatically at the same time, and the feed rate is
fixed at the measurement speed that has been specified using parameter U23.
(5) Set the C-coordinate of the measurement surface.
Example: If the C-axis program zero-point is present at the positions shown below:
Program zero-point (same position

as the measurement surface)
+C
Program + 60°
zero-point
– 60°
Program
zero-point

NM210-00337
5-10
(6) Press the C-AX or C-AX menu key to bring the touch sensor into contact with
the measurement surface.
Example:
Touch sensor
Measurement
speed
C-AX C-AX C-AX

CONNECT
T3S017’
- The C-axis will stop moving when the touch sensor touches the measurement surface.
! The C-offset data will then be set automatically.
(7) Press the C-AX or C-AX menu key to move the touch sensor away from the
measurement surface.
- Press the menu key for moving the C-axis in the opposite direction to that of the menu key
you pressed in step (6) above.
(Because of the automatic interlock function, the axis cannot be moved using the other
menu key.)
- When the C-AX or C-AX menu key is released, following the stoppage of axis
movement, the interlock function will be released as a result, usual axis movement
operations can be subsequently carried out.
Note: When the C-offset measurement unit (MES-COF) within the program is executed, the
data being displayed in data item ⑦ will be automatically overridden with the new
measurement data.
C. Procedure for setting data related to chuck barriers
For the machine with No. 2 spindle, set the data of the No. 1 or the No. 2 in the SPDL 1 or
SPDL 2 group, respectively.
(1) Place the cursor on the data item CHUCK.
- Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the display. Then, move the cursor to the
position ⑧.
(2) Specify whether or not the chuck barriers are to be made effective.
- Pressing the VALID menu key validates the chuck barriers.
- Pressing the INVALID menu key invalidates the chuck barriers.
! After a menu key has pressed, the cursor will move to the data item JAW No.
5-11
(3) Set the number of the jaw to be used.

- To check jaw numbers, press the CHUCK JAW DATA menu key to display the CHUCK
JAW DATA display.
- Set 0 if the collet chuck is to be used.
! After data has been set, the cursor will move to the data item GRIP DIA.
(4) Set the diameter of that section of the workpiece that is to be chucked.
Outer jaw Inner jaw
φ50 φ50
Workpiece

T3S018
- Input 0 if the collet chuck is to be used.

Note: Chuck shape data and chuck barriers:
The shape data of the chuck is registered in parameters B33 through B35.
B33
B35
B33: Chuck O.D.
B34: Chuck width
B35: Chuck I.D.

B34
T3S019
The shape data of chuck of the No. 2 spindle side is registered in parameters B69
through B71.
B69
B71
B33: Chuck O.B.
B34: Chuck width
B35: Chuck I.D.

B70
5-12
For three-jaw chucks, the chuck barriers are automatically arranged slightly outside the
chucks or jaws. In that case, they are arranged according to the following three factors:
- Chuck shape data within the parameters mentioned above
- Jaw shape data registered in the CHUCK JAW DATA display (Dimensions of the
section A through D)
- Workpiece-chucking diameter data set on the SET UP MANAG. display.
The position where the chuck barriers are arranged differs according to the selected
feed rate or other factors. In general, the barrier functions earlier as the feed rate
increases.
[When using the outer jaw]
B34 A
A B70
C
C
D B
B
BB D
B33 B69
dd dd
B35 B71
Workpiece
d : Workpiece-chucking diameter
: Chuck barrier
[When using the inner jaw]
B34 A
Workpiece
B A B70
B
C
C
D
D
B33 d d B69
B35 B71
d : Workpiece-chucking diameter
: Chuck barrier
5-13
For the collet chuck, the chuck barriers are only arranged according to the chuck shape
data registered in the above-mentioned parameters.
B34
B70
Workpiece Workpiece
B33 B69
B35 B71
: Chuck barrier
D. Setting data related to tail barriers
(1) Place the cursor on the data item TAIL BARRIER.

- Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the display. Then, move the cursor to the
position shown below:
TAIL BARRIER 0 Cursor

TAIL STOCK 0
REF. TO T/S 0
(2) Specify whether or not the tail barriers are to be validated.
- Pressing the VALID menu key validates the tail barriers.
- Pressing the INVALID menu key invalidates the tail barriers.
! After data has been set, the cursor will move to the data item TAIL STOCK.
(In the data item TAIL BARRIER, INVALID is preset as its initial value. To validate the
tail barriers, therefore, call the cursor on the display and move it to the data item TAIL
STOCK.)
(3) Specify whether or not the tailstock is to be used.
- Press the USE menu key if the tailstock is to be used when executing the program.
- Press the UNUSE if the tailstock is not to be used when executing the program.
! If USE has been set, the cursor will move to the data item QUILL EXT.
! If UNUSE has been set, the cursor will move to the data item REF. TO T/S.
5-14
(4) Set the projection length of the tailspindle.
- Using the data keys, specify the projection length shown in the figure below. Then, press
the INPUT key.
Tail spindle
Workpiece
Tail head
QUILL EXT. Tail body
T3S023
(5) Set the Z-coordinate of the tailstock end with respect to the reference workpiece zero-point.
- Set the data using the TEACH function.
For details for the data setting procedure, see <Setting the end Z-coordinate> below.
Reference
workpiece zero-point
Tailstock
REF. TO T/S
T3S024
(6) Specify tailstock positions for the NC powered tailstock.

- Assign data using the MEASURE TAIL POS. menu function. For details, see <Specifying
tailstock positions>.
Tail spindle
Workpiece
Tail head
QUILL EXT. Tail body
TAIL POS.
5-15
<Setting the end Z-coordinate>

(1) Index a tool which has already been set.
(2) Bring the nose of the tool into contact with the end of the tailstock.
- Move the X-axis and the Z-axis under manual operation until the tool nose has touched
the end of the tailstock.
Reference workpiece
zero-point
T3S025
(3) Place the cursor on the data item REF. TO T/S.

! The message T/S BARRIER SET <TEACH>? will be displayed.
! The TEACH will assume a reverse dispaly status.
! The data will be registered in the data item REF. TO T/S automatically and the reverse
display status of the TEACH will be cleared.
Note: Tailstock shape data and tail barriers:
Tailstock shape data is pre-registered in parameter B37 through B44.
Workpiece
B37: O.D. of the tail body
B38: Length of the tail body
B39: O.D. of the tail spindle
B40: Profection length with the tail
spindle resting at its
B43 B41 B39 B37
backward stroke end
B41: O.D. of the tail head
B44 B42: Length of the tail head
B43: Taper angle of the tail head
B44: Infeed diameter of the tail
head
B42 B40 B38

T3S026
Tail barriers will be arranged slightly outside the tailstock according to the tailstock
shpae data pre-registered in the above parameters (B40 excluded), and the data set in
the data item QUILL EXT. and REF. TO T/S on the SET UP MANAG. display.
5-16
Example: Arrangement of the tail barriers
Workpiece
B44 B43 B41 B39 B37 B37 × 3
Reference
workpiece
zero-point Z B42 I B38
I : Projection length of the tail spindle

Z : Z-coordinate of the tailstock end
: Tail barrier
T3S027
<Setting the projection length of the tailstock>

As for machines equipped with a motor-driven tailstock, the projection length of the tailstock
(QUILL EXT.) can be set automatically according to the relevant parameter settings.
When the automatic setting function is made valid by a particular setting in parameter B84 bit 7,
the setting in parameter B40 is used for the QUILL EXT. value, which data item is then ‘hidden’
on the SET UP MANAG. display. With the automatic setting function made invalid, the data item
in question is to be specified manually as required for each program.
Supplement: The automatic setting function can be made valid or invalid also by a selection
under “Setup” on the menu bar as shown below.
(“QUILL EXT.” option selected or checked: Automatic setting function Invalid)
(“QUILL EXT.” without check-off mark: Automatic setting function Valid)
5-17
<Specifying tailstock positions>

The NC powered tailstock allows the tailstock to be moved in accordance with M-code
commands by specifying tailstock positions.
TAIL POS.1 TAIL POS.2 Escape position

(M741) (M742) (M743)
Note: Although two tailstock positions can be specified for each program, when a
subprogram is called up, data that was set for that subprogram will be invalid and only
the data in the main program will be valid.
(1) Move the cursor to TAIL POS.1 (⑭) or TAIL POS.2 (⑮).
! The message TAILSTOCK POS.? is displayed.
Note: Thrust needs to be specified before moving the tailstock forward. Refer to the operating
manual of the machine for further details of thrust setting.
(2) Move the tailstock forward by pressing the tail spindle forward movement key to press
the tailstock against the workpiece.
! After pressing the workpiece and reaching the specified thrust, the tailstock stops
moving forward.
Remark: The position and thrust of the tailstock can be confirmed in the status display window.
Call up this window by selecting [Window] - [CNC Signal] on the menu bar of the
SETUP INFORMATION display. Tail thrust in pounds (lbs) can be displayed addi-
tionally according to the setting of bit 6 of parameter B84.
D734S1041’E
(3) Move the tailstock to the desired position and then press the MEASURE TAIL POS. menu
key.
! Display of the MEASURE TAIL POS. menu item is reversed.
! Data is automatically set in the cursor-indicated item and the reverse display of
MEASURE TAIL POS. is cleared.
5-18
E. Setting the quantity of workpieces to be machined
(1) Place the cursor on the data item COUNTER.

item COUNTER.
(2) Set the quantity of workpieces to be machined.
- Key in the desired quantity using the numeric data keys, and then press the INPUT key.
Note: The setting data in this procedure is displayed on the POSITION display. Data can be
changed on the POSITION display, if it is necessary. See the Section POSITION
Display.
F. Setting measurement cycle time
(1) Place the cursor on the data to be set.

item MES INTERVAL.
- When the cursor (reversed item) is not placed in the MES. INTERVAL group, press the
key [TAB] to move the cursor into the MES. INTERVAL group.
(2) Set the desired measurement cycle time.
- Key in the desired measurement cycle time using the numeric data keys, and then press
the INPUT key.
Example: If the program has the following structure:
UNo. MAT................................
① Common unit data
0 CBN STL
UNo. UNIT...............................
1 EDG FCE
② Machining unit data
UNo. UNIT...............................
10 MES DIA
③ Workpiece measurement unit data
UNo. UNIT COUNTER ........... CONT.

11 END 1 1 ④ End unit data
If 2 is set in MES INTERVAL and automatic operation is started, then the program will be
executed as follows:
①→②→③→④ →①→②→④ →①→②→③→④ →①→②→④
First time Second time Third time Fourth time

(Measurement) (No measurement) (Measurement) (No measurement)
Note: The setting data in this procedure is also displayed on the MEASURE display. Data
can be changed on the MEASURE display, if it is necessary. See the Section
MEASURE Display.
5-19
G. Setting Z-offset (C-offset) data of the registered programs
(1) Place the cursor on the data to be set.

- Pressing the OFFSET WINDOW menu key displays the OFFSET DATA LIST window.
Move the cursor to the Z-OFFSET (C-OFFSET) data item of the program for which data is
to be set.
(2) Set the Z-offset (C-offset) value.
- Enter the offset value using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
Note: During Z-offset (C-offset) data setting in the OFFSET DATA LIST window, only known
offset data can be set. If the offset data to be set is unknown, search for the work
number of the program to be set and then proceed as directed in Item, “A. Procedure
for setting Z-offset data”, or Item “B. Procedure for setting C-offset data”.
H. Workpiece delivering data (data items ⑱ through 27 )

Position of the B-axis during workpiece delivering/rechucking
Position of the B-axis after workpiece delivering/rechucking
Position of the C-axis during workpiece delivering
Z-offset data after workpiece delivering/rechucking or B-axis movement
To execute a compound program, the data for workpiece delivering listed above must be input
for each of the workpiece transfer units (TRS) specified in the program.
With DELIV POSI (delivering-position storage function), the listed data can be set automatically.
Data setting for workpiece delivering
Example: To deliver chuck workpiece from No. 1 spindle to No. 2 spindle:
(1) Move the B-axis to the workpiece delivery position.
- After chucking the workpiece on the No. 1 spindle side and placing the No. 2 spindle in the
unchucking state, move the B-axis to the workpiece delivery position under manual
operation.
Program zero-point
Workpiece delivery position

TSP014
Note: Assume that the Z-offset value on the No. 1 spindle side has already been set.
5-20
(2) Place the cursor at B1.
- Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the position shown below.
Example: No. UNo. MODE HEAD B1 B2 Z-OFFSET
1 4 TRS CHK 1 → 2 ■
2 ↑
Cursor
- The message CHUCKING POS. <TEACH> ? will be displayed.

(3) Press the TRANSFER POSITION menu key.
- TRANSFER POSITION will change to a reverse display status.
- The reverse display status of the TRANSFER POSITION will be cleared, and data will be
set at B1.
(5) Return the B-axis to the position for machining on the No. 2 spindle side.
(6) Place the cursor at B2.
Example: No. UNo. MODE HEAD B1 B2 Z-OFFSET
1 4 TRS CHK 1 → 2 -400 ■
2 ↑
Cursor
(7) Press the TRANSFER POSITION menu key.

- TRANSFER POSITION will change to a reverse display status.
- The reverse display status of the TRANSFER POSITION will be cleared, and data will be
set at B2 and Z-OFFSET.
Note 1: For TRS-BAR or TRS-MOV, data will be automatically set with the same procedure.
However, data cannot be set at the items marked with ◆.
Note 2: The Z-offset data automatically set at step (8) becomes valid for second-process
machining on the No. 2 spindle side (after workpiece delivering).
Note 3: Alarm message 425 DATA MISSING will be displayed if you press the TRANSFER
POSITION menu key before carrying out step (1) above.
Note 4: Alarm message 425 DATA MISSING will be displayed if you press the TRANSFER
POSITION menu key with the immediately preceding delivery data unset.
Note 1: If either TRS-CHK 2 → 1, TRS-BAR 1 or TRS-MOV has been programmed as the first
delivery unit by pressing the menu key, alarm message 425 DATA MISSING will be
displayed to indicate that Z-offset data calculation after workpiece deliver-
ing/rechucking or B-axis movement is impossible. In that case, set Z-offset data using
the numeric data keys and the INPUT key.
5-21
Notes on spindle orientation angle setting

When setting a spindle orientation angle in C1 or C2, take notice of the points listed below.
Note 1: The angle directions of spindle orientation are as follows:
No. 1 spindle No. 2 spindle
NM211-00033
The plus direction of orientation angles when seen from the directions of the arrows indicated in
the diagrams above are as follows:
No. 1 spindle No. 2 spindle

Parameter B19 = 0 Parameter C19 = 0
270° 90° 270° 90°
180° 180°
Parameter B19 ≠ 0 Parameter C19 ≠ 0
90° 270° 90° 270°
180° 180°
NM211-00347
Note 2: The spindle orientation angle will be handled as 0 degrees if not set in C1 or C2.
Note 3: If the spindle orientation angle that has been set in C1 or C2 is a minus value, it will be
handled as a plus value, as shown in the examples below. Also, if the value of the
angle includes a decimal point, all decimal digits will be ignored.
Example: –90 ↔ 270 90.1 ↔ 90
–180 ↔ 180
–270 ↔ 90
5-22
Note 4: Neither a graphics-based orientation path that has been set on the TOOL PATH
display or the TRACE display, nor a counter-based position is displayed.
Note 5: Feed hold, or stop with the RESET key, during spindle orientation becomes effective
after completion of the spindle orientation action. Stop with an emergency stop button
becomes effective on demand.
Phase matching for spindle
Set the phase difference between No. 1 and No. 2 spindles at C1 to execute phase matching.
Example: No. UNo. MODE HEAD B1 B2 Z-OFFSET C1 C2
1 1 TRS-CHK 1 →2 ◆ ◆ ② ◆
2 2 TRS-MOV ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
Designate at C1 (②) the phase difference to be made between both spindles during phase
matching.
Phase matching will not occur if no data is set (data item “C1” is left blank).
Setting range: –360 to +360 degrees
The phase difference is a relative one between No. 1 and No. 2 spindles.
0°
Phase difference: 0
–30° 0°
Phase difference: –30
0°
30°
Phase difference: 30
D732S3001
Note 1: Spindle phase matching is possible only while both spindles are in synchronization.
Note 2: The situation of phase matching is not displayed on the TOOL PATH display, the
TRACE display, or other graphic displays. Nor is position display by a counter made.
Note 3: When phase matching is executed, the spindles will rotate through a maximum angle of
360 degrees. Before transferring a workpiece, therefore, carry out the phase-matching
job at a position where interference between the workpiece and the chuck jaws does
not occur. See figure below.
Note 4: Once phase matching has been executed, the phase difference will be maintained until
spindle synchronization is released.
After workpiece transfer, release the spindle synchronization function as required.
5-23
Note 5: A spindle synchronous status is released by either pressing any one of the emergency
stop buttons or the RESET key, setting an M-command code (M381), or executing an
SEP independent unit.
Note 6: For a TRS CHK unit and a TRS BAR unit, after completion of workpiece transfer,
spindle synchronization is automatically released in the timing appropriate for the next
machining job.
Interference occurs.
Headstock 2
Headstock 1 Headstock 2
Select a non-interference position for phase matching.

D732S3002
- Pressing the WORK No. menu key allows you to search for the work number of the program
you are going to execute. See the Section POSITION Display.
- When you press the POSITION WINDOW menu key, the X-, Z- and C-coordinates in the
machine coordinates system and the X-, Z- and C-coordinates in the workpiece coordinates
system will be displayed in the window.
5-24
5-1-2 For EIA/ISO programs
With the exception of the barrier-canceling menu function, the barrier-related settings on the SET
UP MANAG. display are of no effect for the execution of EIA/ISO programs, for which the
following parameters are used to restrict the axis motion area. See the separate PARAMETER
LIST for more information.
Address Description Address Description

B33 Chuck outside diameter B48 Tool post reference position in Z
B34 Chuck width B241 Jaw shape dimension A (for chuck barrier)
B35 Chuck inside diameter B242 Jaw shape dimension B (for chuck barrier)
B37 Tail body outside diameter B243 Jaw shape dimension C (for chuck barrier)
B38 Tail body length B244 Jaw shape dimension D (for chuck barrier)
B39 Tail spindle outside diameter B245 Jaw shape dimension E (for chuck barrier)
Length of the tail spindle being retracted, or
B40 B246 Holder mounting position (for tool barrier)
Motor-driven tailstock extruding length
B41 Tail head outside diameter B247 Holder width in X (for tool barrier)
B42 Tail head length B248 Holder width in Z (for tool barrier)
B43 Tail head taper angle B249 Tool nose position in Z (for tool barrier)
B44 Tail head biting diameter B250 Tool nose position in X (for tool barrier)
B45 Tool post radius B252 Tail extruding length (for tail barrier)
B46 Tool post width B253 Workpiece length (for tail barrier)
Machine coordinate of the tip of the tailstock
B47 Tool post reference position in X B254
being retracted (for tail barrier)
Note: Set the B37, B39, B41, B44, B47 parameters in diametrical values.
B34 B48 B46
Tool post
B45
B241 B247
B249
B47/2
B242
B250
Spindle
nose
B246 B248
B243
B43
B41
B37
B33 B35
B245 B39
B244
Machine B254 B42 B40 B38

Chuck origin
B253 Tailstock
D734S2005
5-25
5-2 TRACE Display

Function
- On this display, the movement of the machine during the automatic operation mode and the
progress of machining of the workpiece are displayed.
Remarks
- For the inverted lathe and the vertical lathe, graphics is displayed vertically.
<Data display>
②
③
④
⑤
D734S0236E

Display of stock materials shape, machining pattern, tool shape and
① (Figure) —
program zero-point ( )
② Scale mm (inch) Scaling factor for the figure being displayed
③ WNo. — Work number of the program being displayed graphically
- Unit and sequence numbers being displayed graphically (only for
MAZATROL Programs).
④ UNo. —
- Sequence and block numbers being displayed graphically (only for
EIA/ISO programs)
⑤ TNo. — Number, offset number and tool name of the tool being displayed
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Actual position of each axis in the workpiece coordinates system
⑥
⑦ TIME H:M'S" Actual machining time duration is displayed.
5-26
1. Basic operations on the TRACE display
A. Trace operation (trace will be performed from the beginning of the program through to the
end)
(1) Press the WORKPICE FIGURE menu key.
! WORKPICE FIGURE changes into reverse display status, and the workpiece figure
that has been defined in the program is drawn. When drawing finishes, the reverse
display status of WORKPICE FIGURE will be cleared.
- The scaling factor for the figure is automatically set according to the size of the workpiece.
(2) Press the PART SHAPE menu key.
! PART SHAPE changes into reverse display status, and the shape of machining that
has been defined in the program is drawn. When drawing finishes, the reverse display
status of PART SHAPE will be cleared.
(3) Select the automatic operation mode.
MEMORY
- Press the automatic operation key .
(4) Press the CYCLE START button

! Relative motion between workpiece and tool will be displayed.
Example:
Shape of machining
Workpiece figure
B. Trace during the restart operation (trace will be performed from the middle of the program
through to the end)
(1) Display the workpiece figure and the shape of machining.

- See the description of steps (1) and (2) that has been previously given for “A. Trace
operation”.
(2) Select the restart operation.
- Press the RESTART menu key.
(3) Select the position where trace is to be started.
- Refer to the Operating Manual (Automatic operation) for data setting.
(4) Press the CYCLE START button.
! Trace is started from the position that was selected in step (3) above.
5-27
C. Trace during the single-process operation (trace will be performed only for one specific
process within the program)
(1) Display the workpiece figure and the shape of machining.

- See the description of steps (1) and (2) that has been previously given for “A. Trace
operation”.
(2) Select the single-process mode.
- Press the SINGLE PROCESS menu key.
(3) Select the unit where trace is to be performed.
- Refer to the Operating Manual (Automatic operation) for data setting.
(4) Press the CYCLE START button
! Trace is performed only for the process that was selected in step (3) above.
Note: Tracing is valid only for automatic operation. Before pressing the CYCLE START
button, make sure that machine interference does not occur.
2. Other menu functions on the TRACE display
A. For selecting the graphic display modes
- Pressing the WORK FIG ERASE menu key erases the workpiece figure.
- Pressing the SHAPE ERASE menu key erases the shape of machining.
- If the DISPLAY MODE menu key is pressed and the menu item is reversed, then the side view
and the front view are displayed on the screen which is divided into two areas.
・ In the inital display or when XZ
1 PLANES is in reverse display
status.
Side view
・ When XZ-XY 2 PLANES is in

reverse display status.
Side view Front view
5-28
・ When XY-XZ-XY 3 PLANES is
in reverse display status.
(Only valid for machines with
the No. 2 spindle)
Rear Side Front

view view view
- When you reverse STORE by pressing the menu key, the displayed figures (workpiece figure
and the shape of machining) will be stored into the memory of the NC unit even if you change
that display over to a different display.
- Using the SCALE CHANGE menu item allows you to enlarge or reduce the figure in scale on
the arbitrary position.
After pressing the menu key, move the cursor to nearly the middle of that portion of the figure
that you want to enlarge (or reduce) in scale. Then, set a new scaling factor.
Example:
If this part is required to be

enlarged, the cursor should
be moved as an arrow.
T3S010
Note: You do not need to carry out this step if you are going to enlarge (or reduce) the entire
figure.
- The ALL ERASE menu item can be used to erase the entire graphics of a workpiece.
- Use the COUNTER ERASE menu item to erase the entire character data (from WNo. to TIME).
Note: The tool motions displayed have the tool compensation and nose-R compensation
considered.
5-29
5-3 SET UP RECORD Display

Function
Various data required for program execution set-up is displayed.
(Displayed Data)
・Workpiece material ・Machine name
・Workpiece dimension ・Date
・Z-offset ・Part number
・C-offset ・Comment
・Data related to chuck barriers ・Data related to transfer
・Data related to tail barriers ・Data related to used tool
・Jaw shape
Remarks
- Printer output of this display allows next set-up to be readily executed.
- Display items of free setting are machine name, workpiece part number, and comment.
<Data display>
Note: Since display data will span over multiple pages, select the desired data using the page
keys.
(A)
⑬ ① ○
25
② ○
29
③ ○
30
○
28
⑦
⑧ ⑨ ⑩
⑪
④
⑤
⑥
⑫ ○
26
⑪
○
27
D734S1023’E
5-30
(B)
⑬ ① ○
25
⑭ ⑮ ⑯
⑳ ○
23
⑰ ○
21
⑱ ○
24
⑲ ○
22
D734S1024’E

Data of the program which has been selected in the foreground
mode.
① WNo. —
Same as the data of display data item ② of the POSITION display.
Data related to subprograms is not displayed.
② MATERIAL — Materials type of the workpiece to be machined
φmm×mm
③ WORK SIZE Dimensions of the workpiece to be machined
（φinch×inch）
Offset value from the origin of a reference workpiece zero-point to
④ Z-OFFSET mm (inch)
the program zero-point.
Offset value from the machine zero-point of the C-axis to the
⑤ C-OFFSET degrees
program zero-point
⑥ CHUCK — Identification of whether the chuck barriers are valid or invalid
The date when the program was last edited
⑦ DATE Y/M/D
Year Month Date
Identification of whether the jaws to be used for machining are outer
⑧ Jaw shape —
jaws or inner jaws
⑨ Jaw shape No. — Identification number of the jaws to be used for machining
⑩ Jaw name — Name of the jaws to be used for machining
Jaw dimensions/ Jaw dimensions/Workpiece gripping allowance
⑪ mm (inch)
GRIP DIA
Finishing shape
⑫ Finishing shape — Similar shape to that shown on the SHAPE CHECK display will be
drawn.
5-31

Identification of whether the displayed data is the data within the
⑬ NC or FILE —
NC unit or data that has been loaded from file
Number and ID code of the tool
Tool number and
⑭ — Same as the data of display data item ① of the TOOL DATA
ID code
display
Type of tool and the section to be machined
a b
⑮ Tool shape —
a: Type of tool
a: Section to be machined
Rotational direction Detailed data on the tool (⑲ to 26 )
⑯ of spindle/ — Same as the data of display data items ③ to ⑩ of the TOOL
Tool identification DATA display.
⑰ ACT-φ or NOSE-R mm (inch)
CUT DEPTH or mm/degrees
⑱
CUT ANGLE (inch/degrees)
TEETH or Piece/degrees/mm
⑲
EDG-ANG (piece/degrees/inch)
⑳ WIDTH mm (inch)
21 MATERIAL —
22 USAGE —
23 HOLDER —
Name of the tool
24 COMMENT — Same as the data of display data item ② of the TOOL DATA
display.
25 Page — Current page number and the total number of pages
a/b
a : Current page
b : Total number of pages
(A) and (B) are displayed on the first page and the second page,
respectively, and the number of pages of (B) increases according to
the number of tools to be used.
26 TAIL BARRIER — Identification of whether the tail barriers are valid or invalid
27 QUILL EXT. or mm (inch) - Projection length of the tail spindle
REF. TO T/S - Distance from the reference workpiece zero-point to the end of
the tailstock.
28 MACHINE — Name of the machine
29 No. — Part number of the workpiece
30 MEMO — Comments about the set-up
1. Data saving/reading
Data on the SET UP RECORD display can be saved on the file.
A. Data saving
(1) Press the FILE SAVE menu key.

! The Save File dialogue will be displayed.
(2) Set the desired file name and click the OK button.
! Data on the SET UP RECORD display will be saved (or punched) on the file.
5-32
B. Data reading
(1) Press the FILE LOAD menu key.

! The Load File dialogue will be displayed.
(2) Set the desired file name and click the OK button.
! The data saved on the file will be read into the NC unit. After all the data has been
loaded, the display presents the data sent from the file. On the item ⑬, “FILE” is
displayed.
Note: If the display is changed to another display, the data from the file is cleared and the
data of the foreground program is displayed.
The following data items can be set on the SET UP RECORD display:
A. Machine name
(1) Place the cursor on the data item “MACHINE”.

- Use the cursor keys to call up the cursor and to move it to the desired item.
(2) Enter the name of the machine, and then press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphanumeric keys to key in the data.
! The entered machine name will be registered and the cursor shifted to the data item
“No.”
B. Part number
Part number registration will facilitate the management of the printed data of this display.
(1) Place the cursor on the data item “No.”
(2) Enter the part number of the workpiece and then press the INPUT key.
! The entered part number will be registered and the cursor shifted to the data item
“MEMO”.
C. Comment
Comments (in one to two lines) about set-up will be quite useful in performing the next job for the
same program.
(1) Place the cursor on the data item “MEMO”.
(2) Enter comments about the set-up and then press the INPUT key.
! The entered comments will be registered on the first line and the cursor shifted to the
second line. Continue to make comments as required.
5-33
5-4 CHUCK JAW DATA Display

Function
This display is used for registering the shape data of the jaws to be used.
Remarks
The chuck barriers appropriate for the shape of the jaws you are going to use can be arranged in
accordance with the data registered in the CHUCK JAW DATA display. See the Section, SET
UP MANAG. Display for further details.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧
D7345S0110E
① No. ー Jaw number
② TYPE ー Outer/inner jaw identification
mm Dimension of each section of the jaw
③ A
(inch) Outer jaw Inner jaw
mm
④ B
(inch)
mm
⑤ C
(inch)
mm
⑥ D
(inch)
mm
⑦ E
(inch)
⑧ NAME ー Name of the jaws
5-34
On the CHUCK JAW DATA display, only the shape data of the jaws to be used can be
registered.
Procedure for registering jaw shape data
(1) Place the cursor on the data item TYPE.
Example: If the data of jaw No. 1 is to be set:
Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the display.
Then, move the cursor to the position shown in the figure below.
No. TYPE A B C D E
1
2 ↑
3 Cursor
(2) Select a jaw type from the menu.

- For the outer jaw, press the OD JAW menu key.
- For the inner jaw, press the ID JAW menu key.
(3) Set the dimension of each section of the jaw.
- Set in sequence the dimension of each section displayed on the JAW FIG. window
(sections A, B, C, D and E).
- Values down to the first decimal place can be input.
(4) Set the name of the jaw.
- After setting the name of the jaw using address/numeric data keys, press the INPUT key.
Note: Up to a maximum of 32 types of jaw shape data can be registered on the CHUCK JAW
DATA display.
Use the SET UP MANAG. display to specify which jaw is to be used when executing
the program.
5-35
5-5 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY Display

Function:
Displaying the changes in the speed and load of the spindle and the milling-spindle.
<Displayed data>
⑦ ①
③
⑤
④
⑥
D734S0111E
① Tool number — Numbers of the selected tools at that time
② Axis of abscissa sec Period of the graphic display
Axis of ordinate
③ min–1 Spindle/milling-spindle speed
(upper)
Axis of ordinate
④ % Spindle/milling-spindle load
(lower)
Graphic display
⑤ — Display of the changes in the spindle/milling spindle speed in a red line.
(upper)
Display of the changes in actual spindle/milling spindle load in a green
Graphic display line.
⑥ —
(lower) The average and peak load values can be additionally displayed
respectively in white and red lines for each tool.
⑦ SPDL or MILL — Display mode indicated with SPDL or MILL.
Note: The load of the milling-spindle cannot be displayed on some machine models
(equipped with a universal inverter, for example).
5-36
1. Displaying spindle load data
(1) Start the sampling of the spindle load data.

- Select the POSITION display, press the WINDOW
key and select “Spindle Load” through “File” on the
menu bar.
X
Z
C
(2) Select the SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY display.

Note 1: To stop sampling, press the WINDOW key once again first. Next after selecting “File”
from the menu bar, clear the check-off mark from “Spindle Load” by selecting the
“Spindle Load” option anew.
Note 2: Selection of this display during sampling, not after stopping it, will show the data that
has been obtained from the start of sampling to the moment of display selection.
Note 3: If sampling is stopped and then started anew, existing data samplings will be erased.
Note 4: Spindle/milling-spindle load data can be sampled for a maximum of one hour.
2. Display mode selection
A. Spindle load graphic display

Spindle load can be displayed graphically.
(1) Press the SPINDLE menu key.
! Spindle load is displayed graphically.
B. Milling-spindle load graphic display

Milling-spindle load can be displayed graphically.
(1) Press the MILL menu key.
! Milling-spindle load is displayed graphically.
C. Setting the display time scale

Upon selection of this display, sampled data will initially be displayed in its entirety.
The time scale for graphic display can be changed as required for an enlarged view of a specific
period.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message TIME (sec)?
displayed.
(2) Specify the desired time and press the INPUT key.
! The graphic display will be remade for the period from 0 (sampling start) to the
specified time, and the reverse display of the menu item cleared.
(3) Use the cursor and page keys to select the desired period (time section).
- Press the cursor keys to scroll (move) 1/5 of the current display period (time section) or the
page keys to scroll the entire period.
Use the keys for the later section (forward scrolling) and for the
earlier section (backward scrolling).
- This operation can also be performed on the scroll bar below the graph by using the
mouse.
5-37
D. Displaying the data of only a specific tool in enlarged form
Data of only a specific tool can be displayed in enlarged form.

(1) Press the CHANGE TOOL menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message TOOL No. <CURSOR,
INPUT>? displayed.
! The cursor will appear in the display area of tool numbers.
Cursor
SPDL
(2) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool number.
! The graphic display will be remade for an enlarged view of the specified tool, and the
E. Displaying the initial status of the graphic display
Once display period has been changed or only a specific tool has been selected for an enlarged
view, temporarily retrieve the initial status of this display to perform a similar modification anew.
(1) Press the PREDICT CHANGE menu key.
! The graphic display will return to the initial status (existing when the display was called
up).
3. Displaying additional data related to spindle/milling-spindle load
A. Displaying the average load

Average value of the actual spindle/milling-spindle load during cutting feed can be calculated and
displayed for each tool.
(1) Press the AVERAGE VALUE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the average load will be additionally
indicated in a white line for each tool.
- Press the same menu key once again to clear the display of the average load, and the
reverse display of the menu item will be cleared at the same time.
B. Displaying the peak load

Peak value of the actual spindle/milling-spindle load during cutting feed can be detected and
displayed for each tool.
(1) Press the PEAK VALUE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the peak load will be additionally
indicated in a red line for each tool.
- Press the same menu key once again to clear the display of the peak load, and the
reverse display of the menu item will be cleared at the same time
5-38
5-6 BF SCHEDULE Display

Function
This display is used to register and manage machining information for each program of
scheduled operation on a machine equipped with a bar feeder. On this display can machining
schedules be easily set up as well as edited using currently existing programs, and the progress
of automatic operation checked by the display data in the CURRENT column.
Remarks
This display allows a schedule to be laid for producing various parts in various quantities, as well
as for series fabrication.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
D734S0200E
Serial number of the data line for scheduled operation.
① No. — The line number of the program being executed in scheduled operation is
highlighted in reverse display.
② WORK No. — Identification number of the part program for scheduled operation
③ ORDER — Serial number of machining order for scheduled operation
④ CURRENT — Actual value of machining results (pieces) of scheduled operation
⑤ TARGET — Desired value of machining results (pieces) for scheduled operation
⑥ PROGRAM NAME — Name of the part program (as designated on the PROGRAM FILE display)
Identification number of the program to be executed for initial facing on each
⑦ TOP CUT WNo. —
bar stock.
5-39
The data items to be registered on the BF SCHEDULE display are: WORK. No., ORDER,
CURRENT and TARGET.
Note: The data cannot be edited during actual flow of the scheduled operation.
A. Setting the WORK No. item
(1) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line in the WORK. No. column.
(2) Use the numeric keys to enter the work number of the program for the scheduled operation.
- The alternative to typing is selection from the WORK No. window:
1. Press the WORK No. menu key.
! The display of the menu item is highlighted and a program listing window
appears.
2. Select the required one from among the programs listed in the window.
B. Setting the ORDER item
(1) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line in the ORDER column.
(2) Use the numeric keys to enter the number of machining order of the particular program for
the scheduled operation.
Note 1: A program with its machining order number remaining unset (0) is skipped in the flow of
the actual scheduled operation.
Note 2: Programs with one and the same machining order number are used for a series
fabrication.
C. Setting the CURRENT item
(1) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line in the CURRENT column.
(2) Use the numeric keys to preset the number of machined pieces for the particular program of
the scheduled operation.
D. Setting the TARGET item
(1) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line in the TARGET column.
(2) Use the numeric keys to designate the total number of pieces to be machined for the
particular program of the scheduled operation.
E. Setting the TOP CUT WORK No. item
(1) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the TOP CUT WORK No. data field.
(2) Use the numeric keys to enter the work number of the program for facing each new bar
stock.
Note: Leave the data field unset (0) when initial facing operation is not required at all.
5-40
2. Other display operations
A. Erasing all schedule data
(1) Press the SCHE. ALL ERASE menu key.

! The display of the menu item is highlighted
(2) Type “–9999” and then press the INPUT key.
! The existing schedule data are entirely erased and the menu item is returned to normal
display.
B. Setting for initial facing (Top Cut)
Use the TOP CUT FIRST menu item to select whether the scheduled operation is to be
introduced by a facing operation or to be started immediately.
- The designated program for initial facing is not executed when the menu item in question is
displayed normally.
- The scheduled operation begins with the facing operation when the display of the menu item is
highlighted.
C. Setting for using or skipping the schedule data
Use the SCHEDULE OPERAT. menu item to select whether the prepared schedule data are to
be used or skipped for the machine operation.
- The prepared schedule data are released for the actual machine operation by highlighting the
menu item in question.
- The machine can be operated independently of the schedule data when the menu item is
displayed normally.
5-41
3. Examples of setting up a bar feeder schedule
Examples of setting schedule data are given below for producing various parts in various
quantities, and producing by series.
A. For producing various parts in various quantities
The specified programs are executed repeatedly for the desired quantity and in the designated
order of machining.
Part A
Part B
Part C
Bar stock Chuck
C C B B B A A A A A
B×3
C×2 A×5
D734S0201E
B. For producing by series
Set one and the same number of machining order, and one and the same desired quantity, to
parts A, B, and C for producing by series of that order.
Part A
Part B
Part C
Bar stock Chuck
C B A C B A C B A
ABC ABC ABC
D734S0202E
5-42 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 6
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION
6-1 PROGRAM Display

Refer to the Programming Manual (when creating MAZATROL programs) or the EIA/ISO
Programming Manual (when creating EIA/ISO programs).
An example of display presentation (for MAZATROL programming)
D734S0112E
H734S3F036E 6-1
6-2 SHAPE CHECK Display

Function
Displaying the shape of machining that is defined in a program
Remarks
- This display mode can be used only while MAZATROL program creation or editing is in
progress. You can shift to this display directly from the DISPLAY MAP display.
- This display can be called up to check whether the data in a program is correct.
- Selection of this display causes automatic drawing of the workpiece shape.
<Data display>
④
①
③ ⑥
D734S0239E
① WNo. ー Same as data item of the POSITION display
② UNo. ー Unit and sequence number of the program displayed graphically
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Current position of the machining pattern in the workpiece coordinates
③ system is displayed.
④ Scale mm (inch) Scaling factor for the figure being displayed
⑤ ANGLE degrees Display angle of the workpiece
⑥ Graphic ー Display of material shape, machining shape and the program zero-point ( )
6-2
Selecting a shape display method

- If the SHAPE CONTINUE menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be continuously
displayed on the display.
- Each time UNIT SHAPE menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be displayed unit-by-
unit on the display.
- Each time SHAPE STEP menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be displayed step-
by-step on the display
Pressing the menu key displays the menu item in reverse status. The machining pattern will then
be displayed.
The reverse display status of the menu item will be cleared when display of the machining
pattern is completed.
- If, for example, the SHAPE STEP menu key is pressed during continuous display of the
machining pattern, or if the SHAPE CONTINUE menu key is pressed during step-by-step
display of the machining pattern, the later selected menu function is available.
Note: Operating procedures of menu items SHAPE ERASE, DISPLAY MODE, STORE and
SCALE CHANGE are the same as those on the TRACE display. Refer to the items in
the Section, TRACE Display.
6-3
6-3 TOOLPATH Display

Function
This display is used to display the tool path data commanded by the program. Data within
external storage units (tape reader or microdisk system) can also be used for tool path
displaying.
Remarks
- Only the program that has been selected on the PROGRAM display can undergo tool path
check.
- When the TOOL PATH display is presented, the appropriate scaling factor for the figure being
displayed will be automatically set according to the common data within the program and the
shape of the workpiece will be displayed.
- If machining process change is made on the PROCESS LAYOUT display, the tool path will be
displayed in the new process order.
<Data display>
⑤
①
②
③
④ ⑧
D734S0240E
6-4
No. Item Unit Data descritopn
① WNo. ー Work number and name of the program to be used for tool path checking
Number of the unit and sequence whose tool path is drawn (MAZATROL
program)
② UNo. ー
Number of the sequence and block whose tool path is drawn (EIA/ISO
program)
③ TNo. ー Tool number, offset number and tool name of the tool moving on the tool path
X,Z,B(W),Y mm (inch) Current position of the center of NOSE-R in the workpiece coordinates system
④
⑤ Scale ー Scaling factor for the figure being displayed
⑥ ANGLE degree Display angle of the workpiece
Display of the machining time obtained by tool path checking
TIME = Rapid feed movement distance + Cutting movement distance

⑦ TIME H: M’S” Rapid feed rate Cutting feed rate
+ Dwell time + MST processing time (designated in parameter)
Material shape, machining shape, tool nose position (▼), program zero-point
⑧ (Graphic) ー ( ) rapid feed movement path (dotted line), cutting feed movement path
(continuous line).
Note: For simultaneous rapid feed along both the X-axis and Z-axis, the tool path displayed
will have its starting point and ending point connected by a straight line.
1. Basic display operation

! Pressing this menu key changes the display of PART SHAPE to a reverse status and
continuously displays the machining pattern that has been defined in the program.
The reverse display status will be cleared when continuous display of the machining
pattern is completed.
(2) Select a tool path display method.
- If the CHECK CONTINUE menu key is pressed, the tool path will be displayed
continuously.
- Each time the CHECK STEP menu key is pressed, the tool path will be displayed step-
by-step.
Pressing the menu key changes the term in reverse display status and displays the tool
path.
The reverse display status of the menu item will be cleared when display of the tool path is
completed.
If the CHECK STEP menu key is pressed during continuous display of the tool path, or if the
CHECK CONTINUE menu key is pressed during step-by-step display of the tool path, the
later selected menu function will be available.
Note 1: During the tool path continuous display or the tool path stepped display, the display
operation will not stop even if you press the RESET key. Display operation can be
stopped by pressing the CLEAR key during these displays. If, after that, you press the
CHECK CONTINUE or CHECK STEP menu key once again, then the tool path will
restart being displayed from the beginning, not from the middle.
Note 2: If the tool setting data has not been set, this operation will be carried out using data set
in parameters B73 and B74.
6-5
- The machining pattern will be deleted, when the SHAPE ERASE menu key is pressed.
- The tool path will be deleted, when the TOOLPATH ERASE menu key is pressed.
- Operating procedures of menu items DISPLAY MODE, SCALE CHANGE, STORE and
COUNTER ERASE are the same as those on the TRACE display. See the Section TRACE
Display.
- When “Unit Point” through “Setup” on the menu bar is selected, the coordinates of the starting
point of the current unit and the ending point of the preceding unit are displayed.
Coordinate marking “▼” is also displayed.
This menu function is very useful for executing unit-to-unit data editing functions on the
PROCESS LAYOUT display, or for modifying the tool path between processes on the TPC
display.
Check of the tool path data within external storage units (tape reader or microdisk system)
(1) Connect the intended external storage unit to the NC unit.
- Connect the intended external storage unit (tape reader or microdisk system) to the NC
unit, and set paper tape or a microdisk in the tape reader or microdisk system.
(2) Select “Tape Mode” through “Setup” on the menu bar.
! ****E is displayed in the WNo. item on the display.
(3) Select a tool path display method.
- If the CHECK CONTINUE menu item is selected, the tool path will be displayed
continuously.
- If the CHECK STEP menu item is selected, the tool path will be displayed by one block
basis.
2. Window function (MONITOR window)
Pressing the PROGRAM MONITOR menu key displays the PROGRAM MONITOR window.
3. Changing over the TOOL PATH display to other displays
- Pressing the PROGRAM menu key allows you to shift to the PROGRAM display.
- Pressing the LAYOUT menu key allows you to shift to the PROCESS LAYOUT display.
6-6
4. Solid mode
The tool path specified in a MAZATROL program can be checked in a quasi-actual machining
image as shown below by executing the solid-model display function, so that a cutting area error
and other abnormalities can be detected in an earlier stage and the test cutting time can be
saved correspondingly.
D734S1025E
Remark: For the inverted lathe and the vertical lathe, graphics is displayed vertically.
Example: For the inverted lathe
D734S1080’E
6-7
<Operation>
Operating procedure for solid display is described below.
(1) Press the SOLID MODE menu key to select the solid mode.
! Pressing the SOLID MODE menu key on the TOOL PATH display selects the solid
mode.
D734S1026E
! For the selected MAZATROL program, the material shape is created automatically.
- The material shape defined in the MTR unit and common unit is created automatically.
- The shapes of the chuck, tailstock and jaw are also created automatically. (This will occur
only when parameters for barrier setting (B33-B43) and necessary data on SET UP
MANAG. display have been set. That is, when the same conditions as those for normal
TOOL PATH display are satisfied, those shapes are created.)
- For machines with a 2nd spindle, no display is made for the tailstock. For MULTIPLEX
machines, no display is made for the chuck.
MULTIPLEX
Single-spindle model with tailstock Model with 2nd spindle
(or dual-spindle model)
Chuck
Jaw
Tailstock
6-8
- The machining shape on a lathe cannot precisely be displayed in the solid mode unless
the data concerned have been set as required. The table below shows the necessary data
items and the state of display in default of them.
Data items In default or with setting of 0

Display of tool with the length calculated from
TOOL SET X/Z
TOOL SET = 0
TOOL DATA Shape (ACT-φ, CUT ANGLE,
No display of tool
WIDTH, etc.)
HOLDER No display of tool holder
Z/C-OFFSET Display of chuck at a position for Z/C-OFFSET = 0
SETUP
GRIP DIA Display of jaws for GRIP DIA = 0
INFORMATION
JAW No./dimensions No display of jaws
Holder dimensions No display of tool holder
PARAMETER Chuck dimensions No display of chuck
Tailstock dimensions No display of tailstock
- Tool path check in the solid mode can surely trace the tool’s motion in the axis-position
counters, but cannot display any image for the following tool types:
SPT and MSP.
(2) Change the display color for each item as required.
- Select the “Environment Setup” option through “Setup” on the menu bar to display the
following window:
Select the desired item. Indication of colors Color palette

currently selected
- Proceed as follows to change the color:

1) Click an item the display color of which is to be changed: WORK, TOOL, SURF.
(machining surface), BACK. (background), TAP, SECTION, CHUCK (chuc or tailstock)
or JAW.
2) Change the color indicated in the box next to the item name by selecting the new color
from the palette.
* Default colors are gray for WORK, red for TOOL, yellow (or light blue for tap) for
SURF., blue for BACK, light blue for TAP, green for SECTION, dark olive color for
CHUCK and light olive color for JAW.
- Use the item “TURRET” to select whether the turret is to be displayed graphically or not.
6-9
(3) Select the sectional view to be displayed for the solid mode.
D734S1027E
- Pessing the SECTION menu key displays the section-setting menu as shown above.
(Initially, NONE and 0 menu items are displayed in reverse.)
- To selesct a section, first select a menu item from 0 to 270. Then press the menu key 1/2
or 1/4.
- The 1/2 section display will change as follows according to the selection from among 0, 90,
180 and 270.
1/2 section display - 0 1/2 section display - 90
6-10
- The 1/4 section display will change as follows according to the selection from among 0, 90,
180, and 270
- Chuck, jaws and tail spindle will be displayed sectionally as well as the workpiece.
(4) Execute the tool path check.
! In addition to the solid, machining type (number of the current unit), tool type (number
of the current tool), current position of the center of NOSE-R in the workpiece
coordinates system and machining time are simultaneously displayed as shown in the
example below.
Info. on
unit/tool
Current
position of
NOSE-R
center
Machining
time
[1] [2] [6] [3] [4] [5] D734S1028E
6-11
- Select a tool path display method using the following menu functions.
[1] Continuous display of the tool path
CHECK CONTINUE：
Pressing this menu key displays the tool path continuously.
[2] Step-by step display of the tool path
CHECK STEP：
Pressing this menu key displays the tool path step-by-step. If the CHECK CONTINUE
menu key is pressed during step-by-step display of the tool path, the later selected
menu function will be available.
If the CHECK STEP menu key is pressed during continuous display of the tool path,
the tool path display will stop temporarily (step-by-step display mode will be selected).
[3] Enlargement and reduction of the solid
Press the ZOOM + / − menu key and, with the menu item displayed in reverse, use the
cursor keys to enlarge and reduce the solid given on the display.
[4] Rotation of the solid
Press the ROTATION menu key and, with the menu item displalyed in reverse, use the
cursor keys to rotate the solid given on the display.
[5] Movement of the solid
Press the MOVE menu key and, with the menu item displayed in reverse, use the
cursor keys to move (shift) the solid given on the display.
[6] Display of the workpiece before machining
Press the WORKPICE FIGURE menu key to call back the figure of the unmachined
workpiece without cancelling the modifications described under [3], [4] and [5] above.
Note: Even during the tool path check, the functions of the menu items ZOOM + / −
ROTATION and MOVE are effective to simultaneously execute the operations [3], [4]
and [5].
6-12
Function of the cursor keys for ZOOM + / –, ROTATION and MOVE functions
Current display of the solid
Relationship between cursor keys and menu functions

Selected
function
ZOOM + / – ROTATION MOVE
Cursor
key
Enlargement Right turn around horizontal axis Upward
Reduction Left turn around horizontal axis Downward
No function
Right turn around X-axis To the left
No function
Left turn around X- axis To the right

D735S1032
The solid display is modified as follows with each key operation:
- ZOOM + / –: Enlarges the solid to 1.5 times or reduces it to 2/3 times.
- ROTATION: Rotates the solid through 15 degrees.
- MOVE: Moves the solid vertically or horizontally through 1/20 of the display area.
6-13
(5) Select the section display mode for the finished machining shape.
- The operational procedure is the same as that described in step (3).
(6) Terminate the solid mode display.
- Pressing the SOLID MODE menu key terminates the solid mode display.
Note: Workpiece shape created with this mode cannot be saved.
! Any operation in the solid mode (tool path drawing, display modification) will be forcibly
terminated and the TOOL PATH display will be displayed again.
5. Checking for collision in the solid mode
Solid mode display can be used to check the program data for eventual collision of the tool or
tool holder with the workpiece or chuck jaw, etc.
A. Display of parts and components concerned
Checking for collision in the solid mode requires entry of the data illustrated below for displaying
the parts and components concerned: workpiece, chuck, jaws, tool holder, tailstock and so on.
<Jaw data> <Tool post data>

CHUCK JAW DATA (A to E) B45 B46 B45 (Radius), B46, <Jaw data>
+ B11 (Pocket quantity) CHUCK JAW DATA (A to E)
B267 (Jaw offset) B50 B51 +
B49
B265 (Jaw quantity) B268 (Jaw offset)
<Holder data> B266 (Jaw quantity)
B33 <TOOL DATA> B49, B50 and B51
A + * For type 1
Protrusion length
C B
D
B37
B35 B39
B41
B43 B70
B34
B42
E
B71
B40
B38
<Tailstock data>
<Material shape data> B37 to B43
MTR unit data in the
MAZATROL program
B69
<Chuck data> <2nd spindle data>
B33, B34 and B35 B69, B70 and B71
D734S1009
- Only tool posts of turret type can be displayed graphically.

- Display of turret can be selected or cancelled as required.
- In addition to the CHUCK JAW DATA (in the SETUP INFORMATION display), parameters
B265 to B268 are provided to display the chuck jaws more detailedly (for turning operations,
too).
- The top surface of the holder is displayed at a position distant from the tool tip by the protrusion
length.
6-14
- The parameters for tool holder are divided into the following four sets according to the types of
holder:
Type 1 B49 B50 B51
Type 2 B52 B53 B54
Type 3 B55 B56 B57
Type 4 B58 B59 B60
The types (positive or negative) of the value in B49, B52, B55 and B58 correspond with the
mounting position of tool holder on the turret, as illustrated below.
Example: For type 1
If B49 > 0 If B49 < 0

(parallel with the axis of workpiece) (perpendicular to the axis of workpiece)
B49
Reference point of
Turret the turret Turret
B50
B51 B50
B51 B49
D734S1010
B. Description of checking
The program data can be checked for collision by executing the tool path check in the solid
display mode.
- An occurence of collision causes the corresponding alarm to be displayed.
- Sections undergoing the collision with the tool or holder will be indicated in a color distinct from
that of normal cutting.
Note: The alarm will not be caused anew during subsequent checking after a collision even if
the section of the collision, which is then treated as having been removed, comes to
suffer repetitive collision.
6-15
C. Supplementary description
- Irrespective of the components concerned, all the sections of collision are indicated in the same
distinct color.
- For machines with the 2nd headstock, checking function does not cover eventual collision with
the components (chuck, jaws, etc.) on the other side.
Eventual collision cannot

be checked.
Components on the other side

(Not selected for display)
D734S1011
- Multiple eventual collisions during one step of tool path check can all be indicated and treated
as having been removed, indeed, but the alarm can only refer to the section of the first collision.
- The colliding section on the tailstock in the turning mode will be “removed” roundedly.
6-16
6-4 PROCESS LAYOUT Display

Function
This display is used to change the process order in the program.
Remarks
- Only MAZATROL program can be subjected to PROCESS LAYOUT display operations.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ① ② ③ ④ ⑤
D734S0209E
6-17

① Data attributes ー Data with relay point, added data, and deleted data
a
a ： Attributes of data
↓ ： Data where an escape relay point has been set
↑ ： Data where an approach relay point has been set
b ： Data where approach and escape relay points have been set
+ ： Added data
– ： Deleted data
Blank : Normal data
Note 1: Data items ↓ , ↑ , and b will be displayed when relay points

are set on the TPC display or the TPC EDIT display.
Note 2: Data items + and – may be immediately displayed if the process
layout data is modified during program editing.
Refer to the Programming Manual for further details of the TPC display, and
see the Section, TPC EDIT Display to check further details of process-to-
process data editing.
② UNo. ー - Unit number
a – b
a : Identification of machining
R : Roughing
F : Finishing
b : Unit number
③ UNIT ー Unit name and part to be machined
④ TOOL/WNo. ー Name of tool to be used for machining or work number
⑤ TYPE ー Operating pattern of the headstock set in the SEP unit data (See the
Programming Manual for the operaing pattern of each headstock)
No data can be registered on the PROCESS LAYOUT display.
A. Setting process layout
On the PROCESS LAYOUT display, all processes are displayed in machining order.
Determining the execution order of a program by editing the execution order of each process is
referred to as process layout.
Two methods are available for process layout:
Automatic Edit Rough machining-first
Program First
Manual Edit Shift
6-18
1. Rough-machining First
This method is used to automatically edit the process order according to the priority order.
Example 1: Move all rough-machining processes before the finish-machining processes
according to the priority order.
R1 BAR OUT R1 BAR OUT

R2 EDG FCE R2 EDG FCE
F2 EDG FCE R3 BAR OUT
R3 BAR OUT F2 EDG FCE
F3 BAR OUT F3 BAR OUT
R4 MGV FCE R4 MGV FCE
F4 MGV FCE R5 MGV OUT
R5 MGV OUT F4 MGV FCE
F5 MGV OUT F5 MGV OUT
Priority
Machining mode
order
Roughing in turning mode (BAR, CPY, CNR, EDG, GRV, DRL #0, DRL #1, DRL #2, MNP)
Measuring units (MES-TOL, MES-EXT, MES-ZOF)
1
Order of unit number of auxiliary units (M)
Order of unit number of subprogram units (SUB)
Finishing in turning mode (BAR, CPY, CNR, EDG, GRV, TAP, DRL #3)
2
Order of measuring units (MES-DIA, MES-STP, MES-GRV, MES-WID, MES-COF)
3 Roughing in milling mode (MDR #0, MDR #1, MDR #2, MGV, LCT, RGT, LFT, MMP)
4 Finishing in milling mode (MDR #3 MTP, BOR, MGV, LCT, RGT, LFT)
2. Program First
This method is used to return the machining order that has been changed using the tool
layout function to the original order (status existing when the program was created).
Example 2: Return the process layout in the Example 1 to the original order.

R3 BAR OUT F2 EDG FCE
F2 EDG FCE R3 BAR OUT
R4 MGV FCE R4 MGV FCE
R5 MGV OUT F4 MGV FCE
F4 MGV FCE R5 MGV OUT
F5 MGV OUT F5 MGV OUT
3. Shift
This method is used to shift one process within a program to the position of another process
within the program.
Example 3: Shift F2 between R3 and F3
R1 BAR OUT
R2 EDG FCE
F2 EDG FCE
R3 BAR OUT
F3 BAR OUT
6-19
<Rough-machining First>
(1) Press the ROUGH PRIORITY menu key.
! ROUGH PRIORITY will change to a reverse display status.
! The reverse display status of ROUGH PRIORITY will be cleared.
! The processes will be automatically rearranged according to the predetermined priority
order.
<Program First>
(1) Press the PROGRAM PRIORITY menu key.
! PROGRAM PRIORITY will change to a reverse display status.
! The reverse display status of PROGRAM PRIORITY will be cleared.
! The program layout will be returned to the status existing when the programs were
created.
<Shift>
(1) Set the cursor on the line of the process to be moved.
- Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the line of the process to be moved.
(2) Press the MOVE menu key.
! MOVE will change to a reverse status.
(3) Move the selected line of the process and press the INPUT key.
- Move the selected line pressing the cursor key and press the INPUT key.
Program editing following a process layout operation may cause the process layout function to
be cleared.
If a program editing is performed following the process layout operation, the message PROC.
LAYOUT ERASE Y<1>, N<0>? will be displayed:
Setting 1 will execute the data that has been edited and clear the process layout function.
Setting 0 will keep the process layout function valid and cancel the data that has been edited.
If the message shown above is not displayed, it may become necessary for the corresponding
process layout data modifications to be checked on the PROCESS LAYOUT display. The alarm
436 LAYOUT NOT COMPLETE will be displayed at that time if an attempt is made to execute
tool path checks or automatic operation prior to checking those modifications.
A message appears during edit operation if one of layout deleting conditions is set. At this time,
you can stop editing.
6-20
<Operations that cause process layout functions to be deleted or layout data to be modified.>
After process layout, if that program is edited, the layout data may be automatically deleted or
modified. The following lists operations that cause such deletion or modification:
Program edit operations Process layout edit operations
a) Unit deletion A) Rough-machining First
b) Sequence deletion B) Process Shift
c) Unit insertion C) Program First
d) Sequence insertion
e) Unit copying
f) Program copying
g) Unit name change (MES included)
h) Change of TNo. from a blank to data
i) Change of TNo. from data to a blank
j) Change of TNo. to other values
a b c d e f g h i j
A △ ○ △ ○ △ × △ △ △ ○ × : Process layout is deleted.

* * * △ : Contents of process layout are changed
B △ ○ △ ○ △ × △ △ △ ○ (confirmation of changement is necessary).
* * * ○ : Process layout is not deleted.
◎ : Layout by program first
C ◎ ○ ◎ ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ○
* : Process layout is deleted during END unit
If the process layout data has changed, the changes must be checked on the PROCESS
LAYOUT display.
The checking procedure is described below.
<Checking after process layout data has changed>

(1) Select the PROCESS LAYOUT display.
! The new process layout data will be displayed.
! The markings + and - will be displayed at the data attribute items of the data
additions to and deletions from the old process layout data.
(2) Check the new process layout data and then press the INPUT key.
! Data with a displayed marking - at its data attribute item will be deleted, and data
with a displayed marking + will have that + marking deleted.
B. Setting process-to-process data editing
It is possible to set the approach relay points for each process and the escape relay points after
machining for the preceding process. Data that has thus been set is saved as TPC data. Refer to
the Programming Manual for details of TPC data.
Use the TPC EDIT display to set data during unit-to-unit data editing. See the Section TPC EDIT
Display.
(1) Set the cursor on the process number of the data to be edited.
- Press a cursor key, and move the displayed cursor to UNo. item on the line corresponding
to the process data to be edited.
6-21
(2) Press the TPC EDIT INPUT menu key.

- This displays the following menu:
TPC EDIT
- Unit number (UNo.) of the line where the cursor was positioned, and that on the line
immediately preceding that line will be displayed in reverse form to indicate that the data
section between these two processes can be edited.
Example: Editing the data section between a BAR OUT finishing process and an GRV
OUT roughing process:
1) Move the cursor to R3 GRV OUT. 1) Press the TPC EDIT INPUT menu key.

R3 GRV OUT R3 GRV OUT
F3 GRV OUT F3 GRV OUT
Note: The reverse-displayed lines can be moved by pressing the cursor key, and the
data section between the corresponding processes can be edited.
(3) Press the TPC EDIT menu key.
! The display will then change over to the TPC EDIT display.
(4) Carry out process-to-process data editing operations.
- Set approach relay points, escape relay points, and other data, on the TPC EDIT display.
For further details of data setting, see the Section TPC EDIT Display.
- When approach relay points or escape relay points are set, the attributes of data on the
PROCESS LAYOUT display will be displayed.
- Edits are saved as TPC data.
6-22
6-5 TPC EDIT Display

Function
The type of operation between the processes displayed on the PROCESS LAYOUT display will be
set.
Remarks
- This display can be called up only from the PROCESS LAYOUT display. Data that has been
set here will be saved as TPC data. Refer to the Programming Manual for details of TPC data.
<Data display>
①
( ② ) ( ③ )
⑤
⑥
D734S0116E

Unit with escape - The unit data where escape relay points are to be set
① ー
relay points data - The data cannot be modified on the TPC EDIT display.
a b c d e f
a : Type of relay point which has been set
↓ : Escape relay point
↑ : Approach relay point
b : Approach relay point and escape relay point
Contents of unit with
b : Unit number
② escape relay points
ー c : Unit name
data
d : Section to be machined (only for turning unit)
e : Machining ID within the unit data
R: Roughing
F: Finishing
Tool sequence number → Milling unit
f : Tool to be used
6-23

- Details of the unit for which approach relay points are to be set.
Contents of unit with These unit details are the same as those of the unit for which escape
③ approach relay ー relay points are to be set.
points data
- The data cannot be modified on the TPC EDIT display.
- Relay point data to be assigned to the normal escape route
<Turning unit>
[a]
b c d e
<Milling unit>
[a]
b f c
ESCAPE RELAY
④ ー a: Whether relay points can be set
POINT
AUTO: Relay points cannot be set
MANU: Relay points can be set
b: X-coordinate of relay point
c: Z-coordinate of relay point
d: M code
e: Spindle speed
f: Y-coordinate of relay point
- The tool change position for the unit with designated approach relay
points
a b c d e
a: Data setting in parameter P17
b: Data setting in parameter U1
⑤ ROTATE POSITION ー c: Data setting in parameter U2
d: Machine coordinate X of fixed point (Unit: mm (inch))
e: Machine coordinate Z of fixed point (Unit: mm (inch))
- See the Parameter List for further details of parameters.
- When the unit for which approach relay points are to be set is a milling
unit, this item is not displayed.
- Data to be executed prior to the start of the machining unit for which
approach relay points are to be set
a b c d
a, b: M codes
⑥ Auxiliary position ー
c: Gear stage number
d: Tool offset number
- When the unit for which approach relay points are to be set is a milling
unit, this item is not displayed.
APPROACH RELAY - Relay point data to be assigned to the normal approach route
⑦ ー
POINT The data is the same as the corresponding ESCAPE RELAY POINT.
Unit with approach - Unit data where approach relay points are to be set
⑧ ー
relay points The data cannot be modified on the TPC EDIT display.
The following data can be registered on the TPC EDIT display.

- Escape relay points
- Approach relay points
- Tool change position of the unit with approach relay points data (for turning units)
- Auxiliary data for the unit with approach relay points data (for turning units)
Data setting procedures are the same as those for TPC data setting. For TPC data setting, see
the Programming Manual.
- Pressing the EDIT END menu key ends edits and displays PROCESS LAYOUT display.
6-24
6-6 PROGRAM FILE Display

Function
Displaying the work numbers and other data of the programs pre-registered in the NC unit
Remarks
The following operations can be carried out for the pre-registered programs:
- Name assignment
- Work number change
- Erasure
- Program copy
- Directory change
- Program transfer
<Data display>
⑤ ⑥ ⑦
① ② ③ ④
D734S0210E
Work number of a pre-registered program, and program type
identification (MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs)
① WORK No. ー
M: MAZATROL program
E: EIA/ISO program
Size of the registered program
② SIZE ー MAZATROL program: displayed in block
EIA/ISO program: displayed in byte
③ PROGRAM NAME ー Name of the registered program
④ WRITE DATE Y/M/D Date when the program was edited
6-25

⑤ DIRECTORY ー Name of the currently selected directory
⑥ TOTAL PROGRAM ー Number of registered programs
Usage ratio of the memory
⑦ MEMORY USED ー a%
a: Usage ratio (=[Used memory]/[total memory])
Program name setting

For easy identification of programs pre-registered in the NC unit, a name consisting of
alphabetic/numeric letters can be assigned to each program.
Even without a program name, however, program execution itself is not affected.
(1) Place the cursor on the work number for which a program name is to be input.
- After calling up the cursor on the screen with one of the cursor keys, move the cursor to
the work number of the intended program.
(2) Press the NAME INPUT display.
! The display status of NAME INPUT changes to reverse and the following window is
displayed.
(3) Set a program name and press the INPUT key.

! The name is set on the line where the cursor is presented.
- Set a program name using address/numeric data keys.
- Work number change

A work number is set during creation of a program. The work number of each program pre-
registered in the NC unit can be changed as required.
- Program erasure
This operation refers to erasing each NC-registered program separately. Carry out this
operation if a registered program becomes unnecessary.
- Program copy
This operation enables the previously registered programs within the NC unit to be copied. Use
this function to newly create the same programs as those which have been registered.
- All program erasure
This operation refers to erasing all NC-registered programs at one time.
- Opening the shape drawing window
Shape drawing is a function that draws the sequence data of an NC-registered program in the
window. See the Section, POSITION Display to check further details of the drawing function.
Procedures for using these functions are described below.
6-26
A. Work number change
(1) Place the cursor on the work No. to be changed.

(2) Press the PROGRAM RENUMBER menu key.
! The display status of PROGRAM RENUMBER changes to reverse, and the cursor
appears on the screen.
(3) Set a new work number and press the INPUT key.
! The old work number is overriden with the new one.
Note: At step (3), if you set the work number of a different program pre-registered in the NC
unit, alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS will be displayed.
B. Program erasure
(1) Press the PROGRAM ERASE menu key.

! The display status of PROGRAM ERASE changes to reverse.
(2) Set the work number of the program to be erased and press the INPUT key.
! The selected program is erased.
Note: If you set the work number of a program not pre-registered in the NC unit at step (2),
alarm 423 NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM will be displayed.
C. Program copy
(1) Move the cursor to the line where the work number of the program to be copied is displayed.
- The cursor can be set at any of the items present on the line where the intended work
number is displayed.
(2) Press the PROGRAM COPY menu key.
! PROGRAM COPY will then reverse and the following window will appear on the
display.
(3) Enter a new work number, and press the INPUT key.
! A program having the same contents as those of the original will be created under the
new work number.
Note: At step (3), if you set the work number of a different program pre-registered in the NC
unit, alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS will be displayed.
6-27
D. All program erasure
(1) Press the ALL ERASE menu key.

! The display status of ALL ERASE changes to reverse and the message ALL ERASE <–
9999 INPUT>? is displayed.
(2) Set –9999.
! All the programs pre-registered in the NC unit are erased.
Note: If you set a value other than –9999, alarm 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT will be displayed.
E. Opening the shape drawing window
(1) Set the cursor on the work number of the program that contains the shape data to be drawn.
- After displaying a cursor on the monitor by pressing a cursor key, move the cursor to the
work number of the program that contains the shape data to be drawn.
! PART SHAPE will reverse.
! The shape drawing window will open.
See the Section, POSITION Display to check the types of data displayed in the shape
drawing window.
- Press the PART SHAPE menu key again if the shape drawing window is to be cleared.
! PART SHAPE will then become the normal status.
! The shape drawing window will close.
Note: Alarm 480 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed if an EIA/ISO program
without shape data is designated during step (2) above.
F. Directory change
The program storage area in the NC unit is divided into the following three sub-areas:
- STANDARD PROGRAM area:
Stores programs created on the PROGRAM display and used for MEMORY operation.
- BACKUP PROGRAM area:
Backs up (secures) each program of standard program area.
- HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area:
Stores programs used for Hard Disk operation (optional function).
6-28
Use the following procedure to change the area of the programs to be displayed on the
PROGRAM FILE display:
(1) Press the DIR. CHANGE menu key.
! The display status of DIR. CHANGE changes to reverse and the following window
appears:
(2) Using the cursor keys, select the desired storage area.
! The programs stored in the selected area will be listed on the display.
G. Program transfer
Use the following procedure to transfer a program from one storage area to another:
(1) Press the PROGRAM TRANSFER menu key.
! The display status of PROGRAM TRANSFER changes to reverse and the following
window appears:
(2) Specify the work number of the program to be transferred and select the destination area.
! The specified program will be transferred to the selected storage area.
- Using the mouse, click the MOVE check box to clear the “√” mark so that the program
from the source area is not cleared upon completion of the transfer.
- Using the mouse, click the OVER WRITE check box to allow the data to be overwritten
without causing an alarm in case the specified work number should be occupied in the
destination area.
6-29
6-7 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display

Function:
The machining time and spindle/milling-spindle output data are listed for each tool according to
the estimates made by the checking operation on the TOOL PATH display. The machining time
can therefore be reduced effectively.
Remarks:
- The navigation function gives modification data so that cutting conditions can be optimized for
each tool.
- Recommended tools are presented to allow more effective machining with each tool type.
<Data display> with normal display of TOOL DISTINCT menu item
① ① ② ③
④
⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ○
27
D734S1012E
6-30
<Data display> with reverse display of TOOL DISTINCT menu item
① ① ② ③
④
⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ○
27
⑯ ○
22
○
22
⑰
⑱ ○
26
⑲
⑲ ○
23
⑳ ○
24
○
21 ○
25
D734S1013E
Work number of the machining program currently selected on the
PROGRAM display.
WNo. a b (c)
① WNo. ―
a : Work number
c : Program name
② TOTAL PROCES ― Total number of tool sequences in the program
Total machining time estimated on the basis of the checking operation on
③ TIME H/M/S
the TOOL PATH display.
Number of ATC operations required for the machining.
④ NUM.OF ATC ―
Not displayed till completion of tool layout.
RATIO OF - Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool
⑤ MACHINING ― - The display for a compound program is made in two strips for both
TIME headstocks.
⑥ ― Serial number of the machining process
⑦ TNo. ― Tool number
⑧ TOOL ― Tool name
⑨ TIME (sec) sec Estimated machining time
⑩ AVERAGE kW Estimated average value of spindle output (see Note 2.)
Not displayed (used only for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT
⑪ PEAK kW
display)
⑫ WNo. ― Work number of the program
⑬ UNo. ― Unit number
6-31

⑭ UNIT ― Unit name
- Tool sequence number (Point/Line/Face machining)
⑮ SNo. ―
- Distinction between roughing and finishing (Turning/Milling)
⑯ TIME RATIO % Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence
- Spindle speed specified in the tool sequence
⑰ RPM min–1
- Min. and max. rotational speeds for constant peripheral speed machining
m/min
⑱ C-SP Circumferential speed specified in the tool sequence
(feet/min)
mm/rev Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(inch/rev) (upper: Feed per revolution)
⑲ FR
mm/min Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(inch/min) (lower: Feed per minute)
⑳ DEP-A mm Axial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
21 WID-R mm Radial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
SPDL Ratio of the peak/average spindle load to the output characteristics,
22 %
PEAK/AVERAGE estimated for the tool sequence
- Number of teeth (cutting edges) of the tool (according to the setting on the
23 TEETH ― TOOL FILE or TOOL DATA display)
- No display for turning units
24 MAT. ― Material of the tool (according to the setting on the TOOL DATA display)
mm - Diameter of the tool (according to the setting on the TOOL DATA display)
25 DIAMETER
(inch) - No display for turning units
Spindle/milling-spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to
SPDL./MILL
26 ― the spindle/milling-spindle speed, estimated for the tool sequence. The
OUTPUT CURVE
average output is also estimated and indicated by a white triangle.
Indication of headstock (for models of dual-headstock or with the 2.
27 HEAD ―
headstock)
Note 1: No significant data can be presented on this display till completion of the checking
operation for the desired program on the TOOL PATH display.
Note 2: The average value of spindle output is estimated according to the particular workpiece
material, and the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output are
described and stored for each material in a text file (c:\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt) on
the hard disk as shown below.
The indication of the average output will be zero (0) in case the text file contains no
descriptions for the workpiece material specified in the program.
6-32
c：\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt ←　File name
[Material-1]
Name=FC250 ←　Workpiece material
Coeff-1=38
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=139 Description of the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output
Coeff-5=105 for a workpiece made of FC250. Do not change the values inadvertently.
Coeff-6=295
Coeff-7=1500
Coeff-8=25
[Material-2]
Name=FCD450
Coeff-1=31
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=142
Coeff-5=105
Coeff-6=294
Coeff-7=1100
Coeff-8=25
[Material-3]
Name=S45C ※ “eng” in the file name corresponds with the language currently selected
Coeff-1=23 for the display mode.
　　M ※ No registration for a new material can be made arbitrarily since the file
　　M only contains coefficients strictly certificated.
1. Displaying data
The functions of this display cannot be applied for a machining program which has not yet been
checked on the TOOL PATH display.
(1) Select the TOOL PATH display.
- The desired program must have been selected beforehand on the PROGRAM display.
(2) Carry out the checking operation completely.
- Refer to Section 6-3 for the checking procedure.
(3) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT display.
! The estimates of the machine operation will be displayed in the total display mode
described in the following subsection.
- No data will be displayed if the checking operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the checking operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.
2. Display modes
A. Outline
This display has the following two display modes:

- Total display mode
The display is always made in this mode when the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT
display is selected.
In this display mode, estimated machining time and average spindle output are listed for each
tool sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the program.
6-33
- Tool-specific display mode

In this display mode, which can be selected and canceled by pressing the TOOL DISTINCT
menu key, data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can be selectively
displayed in further detail. Moreover, cutting conditions specified in the program can be
modified through this display.
B. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode
(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under “RATIO OF MACHINING TIME”.
- For a program the tool-path checking of which has been completed, estimated machining
time ratio for each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed in a color-
identified format on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The items on
the strip graph are keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to those line
items of the list (estimated machining time and average spindle output for each tool
sequence) that are displayed at the bottom of the graph.
Graphic display of the

ratio of estimated
machining time
List
(2) Press a cursor key.

! The cursor will appear in the “TNo.” column.
- A black triangle (▲) will be displayed under the graph “RATIO OF MACHINING TIME” to
indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in the
display example below.
Indicates the item of

the selected tool
sequence
Cursor
6-34
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool sequence number.
! The black triangle will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
estimated machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can
be visually checked.
(4) Press the TOOL DISTINCT menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display contents will be changed
for a detailed view of the specified tool.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved and the
C. NAVIGATE window
In the tool-specific display mode, machining navigation (guidance) information can be displayed
in a window to reduce the machining time for the selected tool sequence.
The cutting conditions and know-how for developing the capabilities of your machine to their
maximum are supplied in the machining navigation information.
(1) Press the NAVIGATE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the window for the machining
navigation information will be displayed.
Press the same menu key once again, and the window will be closed and the reverse display of
the menu item cleared.
" Do not follow in actual machining the navigation given here which may not apply to any
conditions of tool, jig, workpiece etc. without strictly checking for the operational safety.
WARNING
D. EXAMPLE window
In the tool-specific display mode, the MAZAK-recommended effective tools are presented in a
window for the selected tool sequence.
(1) Press the EXAMPLE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the window for the recommended
effective tools will be displayed.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the window will be closed and the reverse
display of the menu item cleared.
" Do not use in actual machining the cutting conditions presented here which may not apply
to any conditions of tool, jig, workpiece etc. without strictly checking for the operational
safety.
WARNING
3. Modifying the cutting conditions
In the tool-specific display mode, cutting conditions specified in the PROGRAM display can be
modified through this display.
Note: Modification and incorporation of the cutting conditions into the program will not
immediately update the data in this display. Perform the checking operation anew on
the TOOL PATH display for that purpose (modification of the program data on the
PROGRAM display is of course not required).
6-35
A. Modifying the cutting conditions
The cutting conditions specified in the program can be modified in the tool-specific display mode.
The modified conditions, however, will not be incorporated into the program until the WRITE
PROGRAM menu function is executed.
(1) Select the tool-specific display mode.
- Cutting conditions cannot be modified until the tool-specific display mode has been
selected for the desired tool sequence.
(2) Press the C-COND CHANGE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the cursor will be placed on the text
box “C-SP” in the CUTTING COND. display area, which indicates that the values in this
area can now be modified.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the data modification will be prohibited once
again and the reverse display of the menu item cleared.
Example:
(a) With normal display of the menu item (b) With reverse display of the menu item
Cursor
Note: It is possible to edit the four cutting conditions displayed in the CUTTING COND.
display area (C-SP, FR, DEP-A and WID-R), of which, however, only those
corresponding to the selected tool sequence are subjected to the edition.
Refer to the Programming Manual - MAZATROL - for the description of the data
items of the tool sequence.
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired text box.
- The cursor can only be placed on the available boxes.
(4) Specify new cutting condition and press the INPUT key.
! The value selected by the cursor will be overridden by the new data.
B. Cancelling the modification
Before execution of the WRITE PROGRAM menu function, the modification data can any time
be canceled and the original data retrieved by the following procedure:
(1) Press the CLEAR DATA menu key.
! The entire text data in the CUTTING COND. display area will be changed to the original
data (current settings on the PROGRAM display).
- This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of the display status of the C-
COND CHANGE menu item, unless the WRITE PROGRAM menu function has been
executed.
6-36
C. Incorporating the modification into the program
Carry out the following operation to incorporate the modified cutting conditions into the program:
(1) Press the WRITE PROGRAM menu key.
! The modified cutting conditions will be incorporated definitely into the program.
- This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of the display status of the C-
COND CHANGE menu item.
Note: Once this menu item has been selected, the modification clearing operation described
in item 2 above will only retrieve the modified values (the original data will have been
cleared from the memory).
6-37
- NOTE -
6-38 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 7
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS
7-1 TOOL DATA Display

Function
This display is used to register the following data for each tool mounted on the turret:
- Tool-setting data - TOOL EYE adjustment data
- Tool wear offset data - Tool shape data
- Tool life management data
<Data display>
Tool data list

Information on the tool selected
from the list at left
D734S0246E
A list of tool data is displayed at left, and detailed information on the tool selected from the list will
be displayed at right. Either of the two areas can be selected by using the Tab key and the
current selection is indicated by the reverse display of the title “TOOL LIST” or “TNo. **:
CONTENTS” in magenta.
Detailed information at right will change to the compensation information display or shape
information display by pressing the INPUT TOOL SET or EDIT TOOL menu key, respectively.
Compensation information display: ........Tool-setting data, tool wear compensation data, other
compensation data and tool life management data
Shape information display:.....................Shape and diameter of tools, etc.
The operation of the cursor and page keys differs as follows according to the selected area:
Key TOOL LIST area CONTENTS area

Cursor keys Selection of a tool data line Selection of a data item
Page keys Selection of a page of list Selection of a tool data line on the list page
H734S3G081E 7-1
1. List display
<Data display>
①②⑩ ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧
⑨ D734S1029E
<Display Data Description>

① TNo. — Tool number
② ID code — Tool ID code
③ TOOL — Shape of tool and the section to be machined
degrees - Cutting angle of the turning tool or the cutting depth of the grooving tool
④ No./EDG-ANG
mm (inch) - Number of edges of the milling tool
Rotational direction of the spindle and left-handed/right-handed tool
⑤ FW/RV R/L —
identification, or the rotational direction of the milling tool
⑥ ACT-φ/NOSE-R mm (inch) Actual diameter of the tool or the radius of the tool nose
Usage of the tool
R: Roughing
⑦ RF (Tool usage) —
F: Finishing
C: Common-use
Status of the tool
⑧ STS — OVER: Tool life reached
BR: Tool is broken
Page number being displayed and the total number of pages existing
⑨ PAGE — PAGE a/b

a: Page number being displayed
b: Total number of pages existing
⑩ Direction — Application direction of the tool (Note)
Note: The data item “direction” is only provided for the INTEGREX machines equipped with
the M640T. This addition allows the ID code to be used extendedly and independently
of the designation of application direction which has been done by assigning the ID
code “H” or V” for machines with the NC equipment T PLUS.
1H←, 1J↓, 2H←, 2J↓ and so on are displayed in data columns ①, ② and ⑩ upon
initialization of the TOOL DATA display’s data. (1H← and 1J↓ on the M640T
correspond respectively with 1H and 1V on the T PLUS.)
NC ID code Direction ID code Direction Remarks

M640T H ← J ↓ The ID code can be used independently of the direction.
T PLUS H (←) V (↓) The ID code must include the designation of the direction.
7-2
2. Compensation information display
<Data display>
⑨
D734S0120E

① TNo. — Tool number and ID code
Tool-setting data in the X- and Z-axis direction
mm The value from the reference position within the tool holder (tool
② TOOL SET X,Z
(inch) reference position) to the tool nose in the X- and Z-axis direction is
displayed, if the tool length entry function is selected.
mm
③ WEAR COMP. X,Z,Y Tool wear offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis direction
(inch)
mm Maximum available tool wear offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis
④ MAX WEAR X,Z,Y
(inch) direction
mm
⑤ EASY COMP X,Z,Y Easy wear offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis direction
(inch)
mm
⑥ CONS. COMP X,Z,Y Fixed value offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis direction
(inch)
mm
⑦ TL EYE CM X,Z TOOL EYE adjustment data in the X- and Z-axis direction
(inch)
LIFE min Maximum available tool operation time
⑧ TIME
USED min Cumulative tool operation time
LIFE pcs Maximum number of workpieces that the tool can machine
⑨ NUMBER
USED pcs Total number of workpieces the tool has machined
7-3
<Data registration>
On the TOOL DATA display, the following data can be registered:
1. Tool-setting data (item ②)
Storing data related to the positional relationship between the nose of each turret-mounted
tool and the reference workpiece zero-point into the NC unit is referred to as “tool-setting”.
The tool-setting data “TOOL SET X and TOOL SET Z” refers to the distance from the tool
nose to the reference workpiece zero-point while the X- and Z-axis stay at the machine
zero-point.
+X
Reference workpiece
Workpiece to be machined z TOOL SET X = x × 2

0 (Diameter value)
x TOOL SET Z = z
+Z
Program zero-point Z-offset Reference workpiece

zero-point
Once tool-setting data has been input, the tool nose can always be located correctly at the
programmed position simply by setting the distance from the reference workpiece zero-point
to the program zero-point (Z-offset) for each workpiece you are going to machine.
To execute automatic operation, tool-setting data must be input for all tools you are going to
use.
2. Tool wear offset data (item ③)
As workpiece machining progresses, increasing wear on the tools may gradually deviate the
actual nose positions of the tools from the program-designated dimensions. Set any such
errors in this data item to carry out tool offset.
If tool offset is required following measurement of machined workpieces, tool wear offset
data must be input.
Tool wear offset data will be automatically corrected by the offset value when a workpiece
measurement unit (MES-DIA, MES-STP, MES-GRV, MES-WID, or MES-DIS) or a nose
measurement unit (MES-TOL) is executed.
3. Maximal available tool wear offset data (item ④)
Set the maximal available tool wear offset data. When the tool wear offset data reaches this
data, the tool is regarded to be exhausted.
Setting such data enables spare tools to be indexed automatically.
4. EASY COMP. (easy wear offset) function (item ⑤)
Use this function when the degree of wear which will progress according to the particular
amount of machining can be estimated from the experience of the operator beforehand.
Set offset intervals in LIFE of NUMBER.
Set the offset amount in the data item EASY COMP.
As machining progresses, data that has thus been set in EASY COMP is added to the
WEAR COMP data at the designated offset intervals.
7-4
Example:
If it can be estimated that machining of 100 workpieces using tool of TNo. 1 causes the tool
to wear by 0.01 in its X-axial direction and 0.013 in its Z-axial direction, then set data as
follows:
EASY COMP X 0.01 Z 0.013

NUMBER LIFE 100 USED 0
Also, suppose that the WEAR COMP at that time has the following data:
WEAR COMP X 0. Z 0.
After 99 workpieces have been machined using this program, the display changes as
follows:
NUMBER LIFE 100 USED 99 ← The data becomes 99.
After one more workpiece has been machined using this program, the TOOL DATA display
further changes as follows:
WEAR COMP X 0.01 Z 0.013 ← The amount of easy offset data has been
added.
NUMBER LIFE 100 USED 0 ← Since the offset interval value is 100, the value
0, not 100, is displayed after 99 has been
displayed.
Note 1: Bit 1 of parameter P15 must be set to 1 to make easy wear offset valid.
Note 2: Tool life management in terms of number of machined workpieces and machining
time cannot be used together with easy wear offset; if easy wear offset function is
used, only life management in terms of maximum wear can be used.
Note 3: The amount of easy offset data is not added when no data is set on the MAX
WEAR item.
5. CONS. COMP (fixed value offset) function (items ⑥)
During workpiece measurement in a measurement unit (MES), if a sensor turns on in the
offset area, data that has been set in the CONS. COMP data item of this display will be
added to that of the WEAR COMP data item. Thus, measurement errors due to swarf are
minimized.
In the normal measurement mode (when data is not set in CONS. COMP), if a sensor turns
on in the compensation area, the difference between the target value and the value at which
the sensor has turned on will be added to WEAR COMP.
Example:
Set the CONS. COMP data for the tool for which MES DIA is applied as follows:
CONS.COMP X 0.01 Z 0.
Also, suppose that the display at that time has the following data.
WEAR COMP X 0. Z 0.
Assume that after measurement, the dimensions of the workpiece have entered the offset
area. Also, assume that the difference from the target value is 0.013. Since 0.01 has been
set in CONS. COMP, WEAR COMP is incremented by 0.01. Data is therefore displayed
as follows:
WEAR COMP X 0.01 Z 0.
7-5
Note: Set bit 3 of the parameter P105 to 1, to make the fixed value offset function
available.
6. TOOL EYE adjustment data (item ⑦)
TOOL EYE adjustment data refers to the difference that may occur between the program-
defined machining shape and the actually measured shape when workpieces are machined
with a tool for which tool-setting was executed using TOOL EYE.
Since thermal displacement of the machine may cause incorrect measurements, TOOL
EYE adjustment data should be set for any measurement errors to be automatically
corrected.
7. Time (item ⑧)
Set the life time and used time of the tool.
8. Number (item ⑨)
Set the maximum number of workpieces that the tool can machine and the total number of
workpieces the tool has machined.
Set each data while the right area of the display is selected (“TNo. **: CONTENTS” is displayed
in magenta-reverse and the right area is surrounded by the magenta frame).
When the right area is not selected, press the Tab key to select the right area.
When the shape information is displayed, press the INPUT TOOL SET menu key to display the
compensation information.
The operating procedure for setting each type of data mentioned above is described below.
A. Setting tool-setting data
Two methods are available for setting tool-setting data:

- Using the TEACH (nose position store) function
- Manual nose measurement using a TOOL EYE (TOOL SET MEASURE) (option)
Note 1: The TOOL EYE, however, cannot be used to set tool-setting data for touch sensors.
For further details refer to the description on touch sensor operation.
Note 2: Tool-setting data for each tool (tool nose reference point) is described at the end of this
section. Refer to this description.
Note 3: Use the MDI operation mode to select a tool for which the TOOL SET MEASURE
function is to be applied. The tool with an ID CODE (suffix) cannot be selected in
manual operation mode, which is possible, indeed, by inputting “T0100.1”, for example,
in the MDI mode for a tool No. 1 with suffix A.
Method using the TEACH function

(1) Index the tool for which the tool-setting data must be set (press the TOOL SELECT button in
manual operation mode).
First set the TOOL SET X.
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to TOOL SET X.
(3) Bring the tool nose into contact with the O.D. surface (or I.D. surface) of the reference
workpiece.
- Move each axis under manual operation until the tool nose has touched the workpiece as
shown below.
7-6
Example:
TNo. 2
φ50
Reference Reference workpiece

workpiece zero-point
- Any workpiece whose dimensions are known can be reference workpiece.

(5) Input the X coordinate value of the tool nose position (diameter value) from program zero-
point.
- In the example shown above, set 50.
! The value of TOOL SET X will be set automatically, and the cursor will move to data
item Z of TOOL SET.
Then, set the TOOL SET Z.
(6) Move the tool nose away from the reference workpiece and bring it anew into contact with
an edge of the workpiece.
10
Reference Reference
workpiece workpiece
zero-point

(8) Input the Z coordinate value of the tool nose position from program zero-point.
- In the example shown above, set –10.
! The value of TOOL SET Z will be automatically set.
7-7
Manual nose measurement using a TOOL EYE (TOOL SET MEASURE)

(1) Press the MSR UNIT ON menu key.
- The TOOL EYE will move out to the predetermined measuring position.
Note: Be extra careful not to bring the arm of the TOOL EYE into contact with the tool or
workpiece during TOOL EYE OUT/IN operations. If contact is likely to occur, either
move the turret to a safety working zone or remove the workpiece.
(2) Index a tool that requires setting of tool-setting data (take care that no interference occurs).
(3) Move the tool nose close to the sensor of the TOOL EYE.
(4) Press the TOOL SET MEASURE menu key (first, set the TOOL S X).
- The LIST INPUT window will be displayed and the line of the currently indexed tool will
change into a reverse display status.
Example: If tool No. 3 was indexed during procedural step (2) above:
1 -250. -250. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
2 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
3 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
4 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
5 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
6 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
7 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
8 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
9 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
10 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
11 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
12 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
13 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
14 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
15 -200. -200. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
16 -250. -250. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
D734S0121E
- The cutting feed mode will be automatically selected and the feed rate will be fixed at the
measuring speed specified in parameter U21.
7-8
(5) Bring the tool nose into contact with the sensor located in the X-axis direction.
Example:
② ①
X
LED
Z Z
① X
! A “beep” sound will occur, the LED in the middle will go out, and the movement of the
axis will stop.
- The value of TOOL S X will be set automatically.
- The reverse status of the line in the procedural step (4) will be cleared.
(6) Move the tool nose away from the sensor.
- Press the axis move button used to move that axis in an opposite direction to that of ② in
procedural step (5) above.
(Because of an interlock function, the axis cannot be moved even if other axis move
buttons are pressed.)
- The other axes can be moved after the movement of the selected axis has been
temporarily stopped by releasing the axis move button.
(7) Press the TOOL SET MEASURE menu key. Then, set the TOOL S Z.
(8) Bring the tool nose into contact with the sensor located in the Z-axis direction.
! The value of TOOL S Z will be set automatically.
(9) Move the tool nose away from the sensor.
(10) Return the TOOL EYE to its storage point.
- Press the MSR UNIT OFF menu key.
- If, following the above setting operations, tool-setting data is also to be set for other tools,
repeat procedural steps (2) through (9) above.
Note: For drill, tap, or other such tools having a specific diameter, corrections must be made
for the radial data after tool-setting data has been input using the above method.
7-9
Example 1: If tool-setting data measurement has been performed for a tool such as that
shown below (MDR EDG):
X
d/2
Z
● : Reference point of the tool nose

d : Tool diameter
T3S054
In the Z-axis direction, the reference point of the tool nose will be measured directly. In the
X-axis direction, however, the position that is offset through “d” (d/2 × 2: diameter value) in a
plus direction from the reference point of the tool nose will be measured.
Therefore, if the value of TOOL SET X which has been measured during tool-setting data
measurement is “a”, then the correct value of TOOL SET X will be “a – d”.
Example 2: If tool-setting data measurement has been performed for a tool such as that
shown below (MDR OUT):
X
d/2
● : Reference point of the tool nose

d : Tool diameter
T3S0055
In the X-axis direction, the reference point of the tool nose will be measured directly. In the
Z-axis direction, however, the position that is offset through “d/2” in a plus direction from the
reference point of the tool nose will be measured.
Therefore, if the value of TOOL SET Z which has been measured during tool-setting data
measurement is “b”, then the correct value of TOOL SET Z will be “b – d/2”.
Measuring direction and correction data
X
Corrected
to “a – d”
Z
Corrected Corrected
to “b + d/2” to “b – d/2”
Corrected
to “a + d”
T3S056
If the values of TOOL SET X and TOOL SET Z which have been measured during tool-
setting data measurement are “a” and “b”, respectively, then correction data for the tool with
7-10
a diameter value “d” can be represented as shown above according to the measuring
direction.
How to correct tool-setting data
Tool-setting data can be more easily corrected by using the INCREMENT INPUT function in
the following order:
1) Place the cursor on the data to be corrected.
2) Press the INCRMENT INPUT menu key.
3) Set addition data (–d/2, +d/2, –d, +d) to the data to be corrected.
Note: During manual interruption in the automatic operation mode, the tool-setting data
measurement using a TOOL EYE must not be executed. When such an operation is
executed, the coordinate system cannot be guaranteed for the restarted automatic
operation.
B. Setting tool wear offset data
(1) Calculate the tool wear offset data.

Example: If the measured diameter value of a machined workpiece is 30.24 mm for a
programmed diameter value of 30.00 mm, as shown below:
TNo. 1
φ30 φ30.24
Machining pattern Measured value of a

definded in the program machined workpiece
T3S057
Tool wear offset data for TNo. 1 becomes:

(Wear offset data) = (Programmed data) – (Measured data)
= 30 – 30.24
= –0.24 (mm)
(2) Place the cursor on the data item in which you want to set data.
(3) Set the value that was calculated during step (1) above.
7-11
C. Setting tool life management data
The life of the tools mounted on the turret can be managed using one of three methods:
- Tool life management according to the machining time
- Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces
- Tool life management according to the amount of wear
<Tool life management according to the machining time>

(1) Place the cursor on the data item LIFE of the TIME column.
(2) Set the maximum available machining time for the tool.
- The NC unit cannot manage the life according to the machining time for a tool whose
setting under TIME LIFE remains 0.
- The application time is automatically counted up during actual cutting feed of the tool, and
displayed in the data item USED of the TIME column in minutes (according to the internal
processing in seconds). When the application time reaches the LIFE setting, “OVER” will
appear under STS in the TOOL LIST area with the tool’s display items “TNo.” (with an ID
code) and “TOOL” being highlighted in magenta.
- The display items “TNo.” (with an ID code) and “TOOL” in the TOOL LIST area will be
highlighted in yellow when the tool’s application time “approaches” the LIFE setting.
The judgment of the approach to the life time is made according to the following
parameters:
P66 (Method of judgment)
= 0: The rate of the application time to the life time has reached the value of P67.
= 1: The remaining serviceable time has descended to the value of P67.
P67 (Reference value of judgment)
P66 = 0: Critical rate of the application time to the life time (in %).
P66 = 1: Critical remaining serviceable time (in minutes).
Note 1: The expiry of the serviceable life will not merely be indicated by the display of “OVER”
under STS, but also cause the alarm 177 TOOL LIFE EXCEED TIME. The function for
automatic replacement of the life tool with a spare one can now be applied to continue
machining by suppressing the interruption of automatic operation due to the alarm.
Note 2: The judgment of tools approaching the expiry of their life is not effectuated if parameter
P67 remains set to 0.
Note 3: The current value of the item USED can be changed manually as required.
<Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces>

(1) Place the cursor on the data item LIFE of the NUMBER column.
(2) Set the maximum available number of workpieces to be machined by the tool.
- The NC unit cannot manage the life according to the number of machined workpieces for a
tool whose setting under NUMBER LIFE remains 0.
Note 1: The expiry of the serviceable life will not merely be indicated by the display of “OVER”
under STS, but also cause the alarm 178 USED TOOL NUMBER EXCEED. The
function for automatic replacement of the life tool with a spare one can now be applied
to continue machining by suppressing the interruption of automatic operation due to the
alarm.
Note 2: The current value of the item USED can be changed manually as required.
7-12
<Tool life management according to the amount of wear>
(1) Place the cursor on the data item X of MAX WEAR.
(2) Set the maximum permissible amount of tool wear in the X-axis direction.
- If 0 remains set, tool life management according to the amount of wear in the X-axis
direction will not occur.
(3) Set the maximum permissible amount of tool wear in the Z-axis direction.
- If 0 remains set, tool life management according to the amount of wear in the Z-axis
direction will not occur.
Note: If, during automatic workpiece measurement or automatic nose measurement, the
absolute value of the data setting in the data item WEAR COMP exceeds the data
setting in the data item MAX WEAR, then the data will change into a reverse display
status and an alarm message 179 X-MAX OR Z-MAX OFFSET OVER will be
displayed to indicate that the tool life has expired and the tool must therefore be
replaced with a new one.
D. Setting easy wear offset and fixed value offset data
(1) Move the cursor to the desired data item.

(2) Set the data using numeric data keys.
E. Setting TOOL EYE adjustment data
(1) Calculate the TOOL EYE adjustment data.

- Index the tool that requires setting of TOOL EYE adjustment data. Carry out manual nose
measurement using a TOOL EYE.
- Machine a workpiece with this tool and calculate the TOOL EYE adjustment data from the
programmed value and the measured value.
Example: If the measured diameter value of a machined workpiece is 30.004 mm for a
programmed diameter value of 30.00 mm, as shown below:
(TOOL EYE adjustment data) = Programmed data – Measured data
= 30 – 30.004
= –0.004 (mm)
TNo. 1
φ30 φ30.004
Machining pattern Measured value of a

definded in the program machined workpiece
T3S057
(2) Place the cursor on the data item you want to set data.
(3) Set the value that was calculated during step (1) above.
Note: Set the data in the Z-axis direction in the same manner.
7-13
F. Tool setting point for each tool
<Turning tool> ● : Tool setting point (Tool nose reference point)
Type of
machining Outer diameter Inner diameter Edge
Type of tool (OUT) (IN) (EDG)
General cutting tool

(GNL)
Grooving tool
(GRV)
Threading tool
(THR)
Pilot hole drill

— —
(DRL)
Tapping tool
— —
(TAP)
Workpiece
measurement
touch sensor
(SNS)
7-14
<Milling tool>
Type of
machining Outer diameter Inner diameter Edge
(OUT) (IN) (EDG)
Type of tool
Milling drill
—
(MDR)
Milling tap —
(MTP)）
Boring bar
—
(BOR)
End-milling tool
(EML)
—
Face-milling tool
(FML)
7-15
3. Shape information display
<Data display>
- Turning tool
GNL・SPT tool GRV tool
② ⑧
③ ⑨
④ ⑩
⑤ ⑪
⑥ ⑫ ⑮
⑦ ⑬ ⑯
⑭
D734S0210E D734S0211E
THR tool DRL tool
D734S0212E D734S0213E
7-16
TAP tool Sensor tool
⑱
⑲
D734S0214E D734S0215E

② SHAPE — Type of tool
③ PART — Part of tool to be used for machining
Rotational direction of the spindle and left-handed/right-handed tool
④ CUT DIR. —
identification
⑤ NOSE-R mm (inch) Radius of the tool nose
⑥ CUT ANGLE degrees Cutting angle of the tool
⑦ EDG-ANG degrees Angle of the tool nose
⑧ HOLDER — Type of tool holder (0-4)
Identification of whether the tool is used for roughing, finishing or both
⑨ USAGE —
machinings
⑩ WIDTH mm (inch) Width of the tool shank
⑪ MATERIAL — Name of tool material
⑫ COMMENT — Tool name or IDNo.
⑬ GROUP No. — Designation of spare tool group
Offset number after replacement with a spare tool in EIA/ISO programs
⑭ OFS No. —
(this data is displayed only if optional EIA/ISO function is available)
⑮ GRV DEPTH mm (inch) Maximum cutting depth of the grooving tool
⑯ TIP-WID mm (inch) Tool width of the grooving tool
⑰ ACT-φ mm (inch) Actual diameter of the tool
⑱ TAP TYPE — Type of tapping (fixed/floating)
⑲ REC. FEED % Return speed ratio of the fixed tapping
⑳ RADIUS mm (inch) Radius of the touch sensor probe
7-17
- Milling tool
MDR tool MTP tool
② ⑦
③ ⑧
④ ⑨
⑤ ⑩
⑥ ⑪ ⑬
⑫ ⑭
⑱
⑲
D734S2001E D734S2002E
BOR tool EML・FML・MSP tool
⑮
⑮
⑯
⑰
D734S2003E D734S2004E
7-18

② SHAPE — Type of tool
③ PART — Part of tools to be used for machining
④ M-SP ROT. — Rotational direction of the tool
⑤ ACT-φ mm (inch) Actual diameter of the tool
⑥ EDG-ANG degrees Angle of the tool nose
⑦ HOLDER — Type of tool holder (0-4)
⑧ WIDTH mm (inch) Width of the tool shank
⑨ MATERIAL — Name of tool material
⑩ COMMENT — Tool name or IDNo.
⑪ GROUP No. — Designation of spare tool group
Offset number after replacement with a spare tool in EIA/ISO programs
⑫ OFS No. —
(this data is displayed only if optional EIA/ISO function is available)
⑬ TAP TYPE — Type of tapping (fixed/floating)
⑭ REC. FEED % Return speed ratio of the fixed tapping
Identification of whether the tool is used for roughing, finishing or both
⑮ USAGE —
machinings
⑯ CUT DEPTH mm Stock removal per cut
⑰ No. pcs Number of teeth
⑱ MAX.ROT. min–1 Maximum milling spindle speed
⑲ BORDER N"m Threshold for pecking by a drill
<Data registration>
On the TOOL DATA display, data related to the type and shape of tools mounted on the turret
can be registered.
(1) Enter the type and name of the tool (item ② for both turning and milling tools).
- From the menu select the type of the tool mounted on the turret.
General cutting tool Grooving tool Threading tool Pilot hole drill
GNL GRV THR DRL
Tapping tool Special cutting tool Touch sensor
TAP SPT SNS
Milling drill Milling tap Boring bar End-milling tool
MDR MTP BOR EML
Face-milling tool Special milling tool
FML MSP
7-19
(2) Set the section to be machined (item ③ for turning and milling tool).
From the menu select a menu item in the diagram below according to the section to be
machined (or measured).
OUT
OUTER
DIAMETER
EDG EDG
EDGE EDGE
(BAK)
IN IN
INNER INNER
(BAK) DIAMETER
Note: If SPT is selected for item ②, select a menu item from 001 to 009.
(3) CUT DIR. (item ④ for turning tool)
From the menu, select in which direction the spindle is to be rotated when machining the
workpieces and whether the tool is a left-handed tool or a right-handed tool.
1) When GNL, GRV, THR or SPT is selected:
RIGHT RIGHT LEFT LEFT
2） When DRL or TAP is selected:
7-20
(4) M-SP ROT. (item ④ for milling tool)
- From the menu, select the rotationl direction of the milling-spindle during machining.
ANGLE ANGLE
(5) NOSE-R (item ⑤ for turning tool)

- Set the radius of tool nose.
(6) CUT ANGLE (item ⑥ for turning tool), EDG-ANG (item ⑦ for turning tool, item ⑥ for
milling tool)
- Set the shape of the tool nose for general cutting tool (GNL).
WIDTH
EDG-ANG ACT-φ
EDG-ANG
CUT ANGLE WIDTH
NOSE-R
(7) GRV DEPTH (item ⑮ for turning tool), TIP-WID (item ⑯ for turning tool)
- Set the maximum cutting depth of
the grooving tool and tool width of WIDTH
the grooving tool.
TIP-WID
GRV DEPTH
NOSE-R
(8) ACT-φ (item ⑰ for turning tool, item ⑤ for milling tool）
- Set the actual diameter of the tool.
7-21
(9) TAP TYPE (item ⑱ for turning tool, item ⑬ for milling tool), REC. FEED (item ⑲ for
turning tool, item ⑭ for milling tool）
- Select the tapping type (fixed/floating) by using the menu function. When fixed tapping is
selected, the override of the return from the hole bottom can be specified in percentage.
This setting is not available for floating tapping.
Note 1: Fixed (that is, synchronous) tapping is an optional function.
Note 2: Fixed (synchronous) tapping is achieved either by the rotation of the turning
spindle or the milling-spindle. It is not possible to apply both types in the flow of
one program.
Note 3: Fixed (synchronous) tapping by a turning spindle cannot be executed by the
second spindle.
(10) RADIUS (item ⑳ for turning tool)
- Set the radius of the touch sensor
probe. WIDTH
RADIUS
(11) HOLDER (item ⑧ for turning tool, item ⑦ for milling tool)
- Select the number of the tool holder to be used (1 to 4).
- As listed in the table below, set shape data for the tool holder you will use in parameters
B49 through B60 in advance.
Note 1: Set 0 if no tool holders are to be used.
Note 2: Tool barriers appropriate for the shape of the selected tool holder are arranged
automatically.
7-22
Holder No. 1 2 3 4
A: Location of the tool holder
A B49 B52 B55 B58 B: Width of the tool holder
B B50 B53 B56 B59 (X-axis direction)
C: Width of the tool holder
C B51 B54 B57 B60 (Z-axis direction)
Set A in a plus value, when the holder is mounted Set A in a minus value, when the holder is
on the turret as shown in the diagram. mounted on the turret as shown in the diagram.
Turret Turret
A
B Holder
B Holder
C
T3S071 T3S072
C A
: Reference point of turret
(12) USAGE (item ⑨ for turning tool, item ⑮ for milling tool)
- Set the usage of the tool using the menu key.
This data is referred when the tool is selected automatically in MAZATROL programs.
Press the ROUGH TOOL menu key, when the tool is used only for roughing.
Press the FINISH TOOL menu key, when the tool is used only for finishing.
Press the COMMON TOOL menu key, when the tool is used for both finishing and
roughing.
(13) WIDTH (item ⑩ for turning tool, item ⑧ for milling tool)
- Set the tool width.
(14) MATERIAL (item ⑪ for turning tool, item ⑨ for milling tool)
- Select the tool material from the menu.
Register the material on the CUTTING CONDITION (PERCENTAGE) display in advance.
This data is referred when the cutting condition is selected automatically in MAZATROL
programs.
(15) COMMENT (item ⑫ for turning tool, item ⑩ for milling tool)
- Set the tool name using address or numeric data keys.
Note: Tool name can be registered and displayed when bit 5 of parameter P6 is set to 0.
Tool ID number can be displayed when bit 5 of parameter P6 is set to 1.
To display the tool ID number, the machine must have the corresponding function.
The tool ID number cannot be displayed without function even by changing the
parameter. On this display, the tool ID number can only be displayed. It cannot be
registered.
7-23
(16) GROUP No. (item ⑬ for turning tool, item ⑪ for milling tool)
- Automatic indexing of spare tools is performed by assigning the same group number
(spare tool group number) to tools of the same type.
This data is available for both MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs (T32
compatible mode).
When the same group number is set for the first tool you are going to use and for its spare
tool, the spare tool is automatically indexed when the life of the first tool you are going to
use expires.
Example: Setting TNo. 2 in the program causes the tool of TNo. 4 to be automatically
indexed when the life of the tool of TNo. 2 expires. In addition, the tool of TNo.
7 will be indexed when the life of the tool of TNo. 4 expires.
TNo. SHAPE ・・・ GROUP No.
1 GNL OUT
2 GNL OUT 1234
3 GRV OUT
Same
4 GNL OUT ・・・ 1234
group
5 THR OUT
6 GNL IN
7 GNL OUT 1234
・
・
Note 1: The number of tools you can register under the same group number is not limited.
Note 2: Spare tools are indexed in order designated in bit 0 and 1 of parameter P6.
Note 3: The conditions for automatic indexing of spare tools differ according to the set value in
parameter P18. See the Parameter List for further details.
(17) OFS No. (item ⑭ for turning tool, item ⑫ for milling tool)
- The offset number to be used after spare tool change is designated for an EIA/ISO
program (T32 compatible mode).
Example: If data has been set on the TOOL DATA display as shown below.
Program
TNo. Group No. Offset No.
T0101
1 4321
・
3 4321 8 ・
Machining data
・
・
M99
Continuous machining
When the life of tool of TNo. 1 is reached, tool of TNo. 3 will become a spare
tool for that tool since both are of the same group. If, therefore, the program
has the configuration shown below, section “T0101;” will operate as “T0308;”
(TNo. 3 with offset No. 8) when the life of tool of TNo. 1 is reached.
(18) MAX. ROT. (item ⑱ for milling tool)
- Set the maximum allowable speed (min–1) for the milling tool.
(19) BORDER (item ⑲ for milling tool)
- Set the threshold value of cutting load on the drill for auto-pecking. Determine the value
with the aid of the DRILL MONITOR menu function on the MACHINING-MONITORING
display.
7-24
Following operations can be executed on the TOOL DATA display.
A. Interchanging tool data
This operation refers to interchanging registered tool data on a tool number bases.
Carry out this operation if you have changed the mounting positions of tools.
(1) Place the cursor on an item of the line whose data is to be interchanged with the data of
another line.
Example: When interchanging the data of the tool of TNo. 2 with the data of the tool of
TNo. 4:
Call the cursor on the display by pressing the cursor key, and move the cursor
to the position shown in the figure below.
D734S0220E
(2) Press the T DATA CHANGE menu key.

(3) Select the tool number of the tool whose data is to be interchanged with the data that was
selected above.
- In the example shown above, select 4.
- An interchange will be made between the data indicated by the cursor and the data
present on the line having the selected tool number.
D734S221E
7-25
B. Adding the tool
You can set tools with the same number, but with different usage.
(1) Move the cursor to the line on which the tool number is to be added.
Example: Adding the tool to TNo. 2
- Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the position shown below.
D734S222E
(2) Press the INSERT menu key.

! Following menu will be displayed.
A B C D E F G H >>>
①
J K L M N P Q R >>>
②
S T U V W X Y Z >>>
③
- Pressing the >>> menu key changes the menu in order of ①→②→③→①.
(3) Select the suffix for the tool to be passed with the menu.
- When the A menu key is pressed, TNo. 2A will be added.
D734S223E
C. Erasing tool data
This operation refers to erasing registered tool data on a tool number basis. Carry out this
operation if you have dismounted an unnecessary tool from the turret.
(1) Place the cursor on an item of the line on which the data to be erased is displayed.
(2) Press the ERASE menu key.
! Data present on the line with the cursor will be erased.
7-26
D. Entering incremental data
When the INCRMENT INPUT menu key is pressed and then the amount of data to be added is
entered, the particular data will be added as incremental data to existing data.
E. LIST INPUT window
Pressing the LIST INPUT menu key displays the LIST INPUT window, while the cursor is placed
at TOOL SET item.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④
⑤ D734S0136E

① TNo. — Tool number
mm
② TOOL S X,Z Tool-setting data in the X- and Z-axis direction
(inch)
X,Z, mm
③ WEAR COM Tool wear offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis direction
Y (inch)
X,Z, mm
④ MAX WEAR Maximum available tool wear offset data in the X-, Z- and Y-axis direction
Y (inch)
a/b
⑤ Page —
<Setting tool-setting data>

(1) Move the cursor to the item for which tool-setting data is to be set.
(2) Set the tool-setting data with numeric data keys.
Note: Set other data with the same procedure as mentioned above.
7-27
F. Tool length input
Set bit 6 of parameter P110 to 1, and tool length data externally measured can be inputted and
used in an internal processing for the automatic setting of the TOOL SET data.
With the above-mentioned parameter setting, the compensation information display is extended
by the tool length input items as shown below:
For a turning tool

mm - Tool length data A and B (Position of tool tip with respect to the tool’s
① LENGTH A, B
(inch) reference position)
<Data registration>
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item of LENGTH.
(2) Enter the position of the tool tip with respect to the tool’s reference position (refer to the
explanatory illustrations given below).
- The arrow indicates the positive direction.
! The entered length data will be automatically converted to the tool-setting values for
updating the existing ones.
Note: Only incorrect tool-setting data may be obtained if the parameter settings concerning
the tool’s reference position or the entered data of LENGTH should be inadequate.
Turning
Tool’s ref. pos.
LENGTH A
LENGTH B
D734S1008 (R)
The tool’s reference position is determined by parameters B257 and B258.

These parameters should represent the “tool-setting” values of the tool’s reference position, that
is to say, its coordinates with respect to the reference workpiece origin.
Address Contents
B257 Tool’s reference position X
B258 Tool’s reference position Z
7-28
<Relation between tool’s reference position and LENGTH A and B (arrow: positive)>
LENGTH A
LENGTH B
B258
B257
Reference workpiece origin

D734S1011 (L)
The LIST INPUT window, moreover, can be used for inputting the tool length data.
Press the menu selector key with the LIST INPUT window being displayed on the screen, and
then select the LENGTH INPUT menu item. The window will then enter the length input mode
where the column of “TOOL S” X and Z is replaced with that of “LENGTH” A and B.
The available input items of LENGTH are highlighted in magenta.
To cancel the length input mode and retrieve the tool-setting data input mode for the LIST INPUT
window, select the LENGTH INPUT menu item anew with its display being highlighted.
LIST INPUT window (normal) Display in the length input mode
Note: The length input mode is automatically cancelled by an application of the menu
function TOOLSET MEASURE or TEACH as well as by the selection of another
display.
G. LIFE TOL SEARCH menu function
Use this function to search the area after the currently selected tool for tools the life of which is
over.
(1) Press the LIFE TOL SEARCH menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message LIFE TOOL SEARCH
<INPUT>? will be displayed.
7-29

! The NC unit will verify in the above-mentioned area the existence of tools whose life is
over, and present the data line of such a tool in highlighted state on the display. If no
such tools are (more) found, the alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be
displayed.
Not only tools of expired life (highlighted in magenta) will be searched for here, but also
those “approaching” the expiry of their serviceable life (highlighted in yellow).
7-2 TOOL OFFSET Display

Function
- Registering the amounts of offsets corresponding to the selected offset number and the nose-
R offset data to be used during EIA/ISO program execution
- Registering the data set in the OFS-No. item on the TPC-display for MAZATROL programs.
Remarks
- The tool offset number must be specified in the program to be executed.
- For further details, refer to the Programming Manual (in the case of MAZATROL programs) or
the EIA/ISO Programming Manual (in the case of EIA/ISO programs).
<Data display>
This display allows type A (geometric offset display) or type B (geometric offset/wear offset
display) to be designated by appropriately setting bit 2 of user parameter P6.
See the Parameter List for further details of parameters.
- Type A (Geometric offset display)
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
D734S0140E
7-30
- Type B (Geometric offset and wear offset display)
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑥
D734S0141E
Note: Wear offset data is considered only for display type B.
① No. — Tool offset number
② X mm (inch) Amount of tool offsetting in the X-axis direction
③ Z mm (inch) Amount of tool offsetting in the Z-axis direction
④ NOSE-R mm (inch) Radius of the tool nose (for EIA/ISO programs only)
⑤ Y mm (inch) Amount of tool offsetting in the Y-axis direction
Code that indicates the direction of the virtual tool nose (0 to 9) (for
⑥ DIRCTN —
EIA/ISO programs only)
⑦ X mm (inch) Amount of tool wear offset in the X-axis direction
⑧ Z mm (inch) Amount of tool wear offset in the Z-axis direction
⑨ NOSE-R mm (inch) Amount of tool nose wear offset (for EIA/ISO programs only)
⑩ Y mm (inch) Amount of tool wear offset in the Y-axis direction
PAGE a / b
⑪ PAGE —
7-31
On the TOOL OFFSET display, the following data can be registered:

- Amount of tool offset (item ②, ③, ⑤, ⑦, ⑧ and ⑩)
The amount of tool offset is the data that compensates for any differences between the
program-specified workpiece dimensions and the actually machined workpiece dimensions.
(Amount of offset) = (Programmed value) – (Value that was measured after machining)
The amount of tool offset can be used to machine workpieces of the intended dimensions
without changing the corresponding programmed data.
The amounts of tool offset that have been registered on this display can be used for a
MAZATROL program and an EIA/ISO program (however, a tool offset number must be
specified in the program to be executed).
Tool offsetting can also be performed just by setting data in the WEAR COMP. item of the
TOOL DATA display without using the amount of tool offset that have been registered on the
TOOL OFFSET display. In this case, tool offset number specification in the program to be
executed is not required. See the Section, TOOL DATA Display for further details.
- Radius of the tool nose (nose-R) and the direction of a virtual nose (item ④, ⑨ and ⑥)
These two types of data relate to nose-R offset data to be used with an EIA/ISO program.
During MAZATROL program execution, therefore, the two types of data are ignored and,
instead, data that has been set in the NOSE-R item of the TOOL DATA display becomes valid.
Nose-R offset is a function that compensates for any cutting errors arising from the roundness
of the tool nose.
Also, a virtual nose refers to a “reference point of the tool nose on a programmed path”. The
cutting errors mentioned above can be correctly compensated for by specifying the radius of
the tool nose and the direction of a virtual nose.
Procedures for registering the above two types of data are described below (for the sake of
convenience of description, the statement made below assumes that data is to be set in items ②,
③, ④ and ⑤ in that order for type A and ②, ③, ④, ⑦, ⑧, ⑨ and ⑥ in that order for type
B).
7-32
A. Amount of tool offset in the X-axis direction (item ②)
Two methods are available for the data setting:

- Direct entry from the keyboard
- By entering the tool-setting data (TOOL SET) with the TEACH menu function
Note: The application of the TEACH menu function on this display requires the corresponding
setting of bit 3 of parameter P8 (to “1”).
Machine zero-point
Reference point for

tool offsetting
= Zero-point of the
reference workpiece
TOOL SET X
TOOL SET Z
D734S0203
Procedure for direct entry

(1) Place the cursor on the data item X (for type B, X of GEOMETRIC OFFSET).
the data item X on the intended line (for both type A and B).
(2) Set the amount of tool offset in the X-axis direction (for type B, geometric offset amount)
- Set the amount using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (for both type A and B).
Procedure using the TEACH menu function
Follow the procedure below to use the TEACH menu function (storage of the relative position of
the reference workpiece zero-point to the tool nose, with the tool carriage’s X- and Z-position
corresponding to the machine zero-point) for setting tool offset data:
(1) Index the tool for which the tool-setting data must be set (by pressing the TOOL SELECT
button in manual operation mode).
(2) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line of the X column.
(3) Bring the tool nose into contact with the O.D. (or I.D.) surface of the reference workpiece.
- Carry out axis movements under manual operation until the tool nose has touched the
workpiece as shown below.
- Any workpiece whose dimension in question is known can be used as a reference one.
7-33
Example: TNo. 2
φ50
Zero-point of the
Reference reference workpiece
workpiece = Reference point for
tool offsetting

! The display of the menu item is highlighted.
(5) Input the X coordinate of the tool nose position (diameter value) from the program zero-
point.
- In the example shown above, enter 50.
! The required amount of tool offset in the X-axis direction is automatically set and the
menu item is returned to normal display.
B. Amount of tool offset in the Z-axis direction (item ③)
Two methods are available for the data setting:

- Direct entry from the keyboard
- By entering the tool-setting data (TOOL SET) with the TEACH menu function
Note: The application of the TEACH menu function on this display requires the corresponding
setting of bit 3 of parameter P8 (to “1”).
Procedure for direct entry
(1) Place the cursor on the data item Z (for type B, Z of GEOMETRIC OFFSET).
- Move the cursor with cursor keys to the data item Z on the intended line (for both type A
and B).
(2) Set the amount of tool offset in the Z-axis direction (for type B, geometric offset amount).
- Set the amount using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (for both type A and B).
Procedure using the TEACH menu function
Follow the procedure below to use the TEACH menu function (storage of the relative position of
the reference workpiece zero-point to the tool nose, with the tool carriage’s X- and Z-position
corresponding to the machine zero-point) for setting tool offset data:
(1) Index the tool for which the tool-setting data must be set (by pressing the TOOL SELECT
button in manual operation mode).
(2) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required line of the Z column.
(3) Bring the tool nose into contact with an edge of the workpiece.
- Carry out axis movements under manual operation until the tool nose has touched the
workpiece as shown below.
- Any workpiece whose dimension in question is known can be used as a reference one.
7-34
10
Reference Zero-point of the

workpiece reference workpiece
= Reference point for
tool offsetting

! The display of the menu item is highlighted.
(5) Input the Z coordinate of the tool nose position from the program zero-point.
- In the example shown above, enter –10.
! The required amount of tool offset in the Z-axis direction is automatically set and the
menu item is returned to normal display.
C. Radius of the tool nose (item ④)
(1) Place the cursor on the data item NOSE-R (for type B, in geometric offset amount).
- Move the cursor with cursor keys to the data item NOSE-R on the intended line (for both
type A and B).
(2) Set the radius of the tool nose.
Example:
Nose R
- Set the value using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (for both type A and B)
- For type A, proceed to article G.
D. Amount of tool wear offset in the X-axis direction (item ⑦)
(1) Place the cursor on the data item X of WEAR COMP.

- Move the cursor with cursor keys to the data item X on the intended line (only for type B).
(2) Set the amount of tool wear offset in the X-axis direction.
- Set the amount using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (only for type B).
E. Amount of tool wear offset in the Z-axis direction (item ⑧)
(1) Place the cursor on the data item Z of WEAR COMP.

- Move the cursor with cursor keys to the data item Z on the intended line (only for type B).
(2) Set the amount of tool wear offset in the Z-axis direction.
- Set the amount using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (only for type B).
7-35
F. Amount of tool nose wear offset (item ⑨)
(1) Place the cursor on the data item NOSE-R of WEAR COMP.
- Move the cursor with cursor keys to the NOSE-R item on the intended line (only for type
B).
(2) Set the offset amount of the tool nose radius.
- Set the value using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (only for type B).
G. Code for the direction of the virtual tool nose (item ⑥)
(1) Place the cursor on the data item DIRCTN.

- Place the cursor with cursor keys on the data item DIRCTN on the intended line (for both
type A and B).
(2) Set a code (0 through 9) that denotes the direction of a virtual nose.
- Codes denoting the direction of a virtual nose are preset as follows:
Virtual nose point
Nose point direction 1 Nose point direction 2 Nose point direction 3
Nose point direction 4 Nose point direction 5 Nose point direction 6
Nose point direction

Nose point direction 7 Nose point direction 8 (0 or 9)
(Nose center)
- Set a number (0 through 9) using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key (for both
type A and B).
7-36
Note 1: The maximum number of sets of offset data you can register on the TOOL OFFSET
display is 32 (for Type A) or 16 (for Type B) per page. Therefore, registering more than
32 (for Type A) or 16 (for Type B) sets of offset data requires displaying the next page.
- Pressing the page key displays the next page.
- Pressing the page key displays the previous page.
On the TOOL OFFSET display, POSITION window can be displayed.

Note 2: If the optional EIA/ISO function is not available, data on the NOSE-R and DIRCTN is
not displayed.
Remark 1: Keeping cursor position
When # mark is added to “Keep Cursor Position” in the “Set up” on the menu bar,
the cursor is displayed on the last set position while re-opening the display. The
cursor position is not moved automatically after setting numeric data.
Remark 2: Incremenntal First
When # mark is added to “Incremental First” in the “Set up” on the menu bar, the
INCRMENT INPUT menu item will be displayed in reverse and the incremental
input method will become initial input method.
7-37
7-3 TOOL LIFE Display

Function
Use the TOOL LIFE display to manage tool life data when using standard EIA/ISO function.
Remarks
- This display can be selected only when using standard EIA/ISO function.
- Data set on this display will become valid only for EIA/ISO programs, when bit 3 of the
parameter P16 is set to 1.
- Data set on the TOOL LIFE display does not have any relationship to the data set on the
displays related to tools.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦
PAGE ⑧
D734S0142E
7-38
Tool group number and spare tool change number
① GROUP No. — a-b

a: Group number
b: Spare tool change number
② TNo. — Tool number
③ OFFSET No. — Tool offset number
④ LIFE TIME min Maximum available tool operation time
Maximum number of workpieces that the tool can machine or maximum
⑤ LIFE NUM. or CNT pcs/time
number of times the T code command can be given
⑥ USED TIME min Cumulative tool operation time
Total number of workpieces the tool has machined or number of times
⑦ USED NUM. or CNT pcs/time
the T code commands has already been given
PAGE a / b
⑧ PAGE —
On the TOOL LIFE display, following data can be registered:

1. Tool number
Set in data item ② the number of the tool whose life is to be managed.
Setting of multiple tool numbers to form one group allows automatic indexing of the spare
tools corresponding to that group.
If a tool number already existing in one group is set, the marking ◆ will be displayed at
data items ④ to ⑦ to indicate that data cannot be set in these data items.
The tool status is displayed in reverse form as follows:
・Indexed tool .............................Blue
・Tool whose life has expired .....Pink
・Skipped or damaged tool.........Red
Note: Use user parameter K72 to set the number of tools to be used as one group. See the
Parameter List for further details of parameters.
2. Offset number
Set in data item ③ the identification number of the offset data to be used during program
execution. See the Section TOOL OFFSET Display to check further details of offset data.
7-39
3. Tool life management data

1) Operating time/quantity of workpieces (T code execution times)
Set in data items ④ and ⑤ the maximum permissible operating time for the tool and
the number of workpieces which can be machined using that tool (or number of
maximum available T code execution times), respectively.
It depends on the particular setting of user parameter P18 which of the two items the
system will use to manage tool life. See the Parameter List for further details of
parameters. Use bit 1 of user parameter P106 to select life management based on
quantity of machined workpieces or T code execution times. See the Parameter List
for further details of parameters. The method that has been selected here also
becomes valid for the item ⑦ (USED NUM. or CNT), described below.
To select the management method based on quantity, set the total number of
workpieces at which the life of the tool is likely to expire, or to select the management
method based on count, set the total number of repeat times of T-code execution at
which the life of the tool is likely to expire.
2) Cumulative operating time/quantity (count)
Set in data items ⑥ and ⑦ the cumulative operating time for the tool and the
cumulative number of workpieces which have been machined using that tool (or
cumulative number of T code execution times), respectively.
These two values are automatically incremented in order each time a workpiece is
machined, and when the previously registered tool life is reached, the display status of
those values will reverse.
If, at that time, multiple tools have been registered within the corresponding group, the
next numbered tool will be auto-indexed. Bit 0 of user parameter P106 can be used to
select whether, if all tools within the group reach their respective lives, the machining
operation is to be immediately stopped or to be continued using the finally indexed tool.
See the Parameter List for further details of parameters.
The procedures for setting the data described above are described below.
The description given below assumes that the data of the turret-mounted tools has been set
on the TOOL DATA display.
A. Setting tool number
(1) Place the cursor on the data item TNo.

the data item TNo. for the intended group.
(2) Set the tool number.
- Set the tool number to be managed using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key.
B. Setting offset number
(1) Place the cursor on the data item OFFSET No.

the data item OFFSET No.
(2) Set the offset number.
- Set the offset number using numeric data keys and press the INPUT key.
7-40
C. Setting tool life management data
You can manage the life of the tools mounted on the turret using one of the following three
methods.
(a) Tool life management according to machining time
(b) Tool life management according to the number of machined workpieces
(c) Tool life management according to the number of T code execution times
It depends on parameter setting which method is available.
Management according to machining time (a)
- Set user parameter P18 to 2.
Management according to the number of machined workpieces (b)
- Set bit 1 of user parameter P106 to 0.
Management according to the number T code execution times (c)
Management according to machining time or number of machined workpieces (a or b)
Management according to machining time or number of T code execution times (a or c)
(For parameter details, see the Parameter List).
After parameter setting, set the data.
(1) Place the cursor on the data item TIME or NUM. (CNT) of LIFE.
- For management of tool life of group No. 1-1 according to TIME:
Move the cursor to the position in the diagram below with cursor keys.
GROUP OFFSET LIFE USED GROUP OFFSET LIFE USED

No. TNo. No. TIME NUM. TIME NUM. No. TNo. No. TIME NUM. TIME NUM.
1-1 1 1 0 0 0 0 9-1 0 0 0 0
1-2 2 1 0 0 0 0 9-2 0 0 0 0
2-1 3 2 0 0 0 0 10-1 0 0 0 0
Cursor
(2) Set the maximum available tool operating time or maximum number of workpieces that the
tool can machine (or maximum number of T code execution times)
- Set the maximum available tool operation time in minutes. However, it is processed in
seconds within the NC unit.
- If 0 remains set, tool life management will not occur.
7-41
Note 1: The cumulative operating time for the tool in the cutting feed mode is displayed in
minutes on TIME of USED. Although the operating time is integrated in seconds
within the NC unit, the value that has been converted into minutes is displayed on this
data item.
If data of USED reaches the data that has been set in LIFE, the display will reverse and
the alarm message TOOL LIFE REACHED will be displayed. The corresponding tool
must be replaced with a new one in that case.
Instead, that tool can be automatically replaced with a spare one so that machining
continues.
See the description of “Tool life management data”, given above.
Note 2: Data displayed in either TIME or NUM. (CNT) of USED can be changed to any other
data using the following procedure:
(1) Set the cursor on either TIME or NUM. (CNT) of USED.
(2) Set the desired data.
Note 3: The type of tool life management data depends on the particular setting of user
parameter P18. Although TIME can be used together with either NUM. or CNT, NUM.
and CNT cannot be used together since only either one of them is to be selected using
bit 1 of user parameter P106.
For the CNT method, the display of NUM. becomes CNT as shown in the diagram
below.
See the Parameter List, for details of parameters.
Example of an display made if bit 1 of user parameter P106 is 1:
GROUP OFFSET LIFE USED GROUP OFFSET LIFE USED
No. TNo. No. TIME CNT TIME CNT No. TNo. No. TIME CNT TIME CNT
1-1 1 1 0 0 0 0 9-1 0 0 0 0
1-2 2 1 0 0 0 0 9-2 0 0 0 0
2-1 3 2 0 0 0 0 10-1 0 0 0 0
2-2 4 2 0 0 0 0 10-2 0 0 0 0
M M
M M
7-42
Selecting TOOL LIFE display will display the menu Ι as the initial menu. With the cursor
displayed on the screen, pressing the menu selector key will display the menu ΙΙ.
TOOL TOOL
(Ι) DATA OFFSET
GROUP ERASE TOOL TOOL

( ΙΙ ) SEARCH DATA OFFSET
① ②
The terms marked as ① and ② above denote functions that relate to entered data.
These functions can be used to carry out the following operations:
A. Searching for a group
Any of the group numbers that have been registered on this display can be found by this
operation.
B. Deleting data
Data that has been registered on this display can be deleted on a line-by-line basis.
The operating procedures are described below.
A. Searching for a group
(1) Call up the cursor on the screen.

- Call up the cursor by pressing the cursor key.
(2) Press the GROUP SEARCH menu key.
- Press the menu selector key once to display the GROUP SEARCH menu item. Pressing
the GROUP SEARCH menu key will change the menu item to a reverse display status.
(3) Set the group number to be searched and press the INPUT key.
- The cursor will be displayed on the first TNo. of the group to be searched.
Note: The alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be displayed when the group number
that has not been registered is set in the step (3).
B. Deleting data
(1) Place the cursor on the line of the data to be cleared.

- After calling up the cursor on the screen, move the cursor to the line of the data to be
erased.
- ERASE will change to a reverse display status.
- The line where the cursor is displayed will be cleared.
Note: The registered data is displayed over several pages.
- Pressing the page key displays the next page.
- Pressing the page key displays the previous page.
7-43
- NOTE -
7-44 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 8
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
8-1 CUTTING CONDITION (REGIST) Display

Function
Registering the materials types of workpieces and tools that are to be selected for automatic
setting of cutting conditions on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
Remarks
- Data that has been registered on this display can be used only for a MAZATROL program.
- Initially, YAMAZAKI-recommended data is displayed. You can change or add data as required.
<Data display>
D734S0224E
① WORK MAT ー Workpiece material name
② TOOL MAT ー Tool material name
H734S3H023E 8-1
1. Registering data
The CUTTING CONDITION (REGIST) display allows the names of the materials of workpieces
and tools to be registered using character strings of alphabetic characters and arabic numerals.
(1) Display the cursor by pressing the cursor key.
(2) Move the cursor to any of the workpiece materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.16 or the
tool materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.8.
(3) Input the appropriate name using the alphabetic, numeric data keys, and then press the
INPUT key.
- Up to eight characters can be set. The maximum number of workpiece materials types is
sixteen, and that of tool materials types is eight for each tool.
- Press the CANCEL key to delete the input name.
Supplementary description
The workpiece and tool material names (WORK MAT. and TOOL MAT.) in the cutting conditions
can be taken in and out as a text file of the hard disk. Use the item “File” on the menu bar to
perform these operations.
1. File saving and file loading
- File saving
The workpiece and tool material names indicated on the CUTTING CONDITION display
are saved onto the hard disk as a text file (material.txt).
- File loading
The text file (material.txt) of the workpiece and tool material names saved on the hard disk
is loaded into the NC unit.
2. Format of the text file
[WORK] (a) Title
1,
2,
3,
(b) Material 4,
5,
name
6,
7,
8,
[TURNING TOOL]
1,
2,
3,
4,
(a) Title
The title denotes the category of the material data described under it as listed below.
Title Meaning
WORK Workpiece material
TURNING TOOL Tool material
Note: The characters enclosed in brackets [ ] are used as the keyword to construct the file.
Do not enter any comment on this character line. Otherwise, the data may not be read
correctly during file loading.
8-2
(b) Material name
Materials are described.
2,
The first numeral denotes the material number corresponding to the title given above. The
material name can be entered after the comma “,”.
Example 1:
File
［ WORK］ “S45C” is registered as workpiece material No. 1.
1,S45C
2,...
Note 1: The material name can consist of a maximum of eight half-size characters (or four
normal-size characters).
Note 2: The character string of the material name must not begin or end with a half-size null
code. This code can only be used within the character string.
Example 2: Leading/trailing half-size null code.
File ［WORK］ An example of incorrect description
1,　S45C
( _ denotes a half-size null code.)
2,....
Example 3: Half-size null code within a character string

File ［TURNING TOOL］ An example of correct description
1,HSS B
2,...
Note 3: Do not enter one and the same material name repeatedly under the same category.
Example 4:
File ［WORK］ An example of incorrect entry
1,S45C
(Loading of this file only registers “S45C” and “FC” as
2,S45C
3,FC workpiece material No. 1 and 3 respectively; entry of No.
4,S45C 2 and 4 is ignored.)
8-3
8-2 CUTTING CONDITION (PERCENTAGE) Display

Function
Registering cutting-condition automatic setting coefficients according to the materials type of the
workpiece and tool.
Remarks
- Initially, YAMAZAKI-recommended data is displayed. You can change or add data as required.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
D734S0225E
No. Item Unit Descripton

WORK MAT
① ー Workpiece material name
(Workpiece material)
R-SPD% Setting coefficient of peripheral speed during rough-machining according
② %
(Workpiece material) to workpiece material
F-SPD% Setting coefficient of peripheral speed during finish-machining according
③ %
(Workpiece material) to workpiece material
R-FEED% Setting coefficient of feed rate per spindle rotation during rough-
④ %
(Workpiece material) machining according to workpiece material
R-DEPTH% Setting coefficient of maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
⑤ %
(Workpiece material) according to workpiece material
TOOL MAT
⑥ ー Tool material name
(Tool material)
8-4
R-SPD% Setting coefficient of peripheral speed during rough-machining according
⑦ %
(Tool material) to tool material
F-SPD% Setting coefficient of peripheral speed during finish-machining according
⑧ %
(Tool material) to tool material
R-FEED% Setting coefficient of feed rate per spindle rotation during rough-
⑨ %
(Tool material) machining according to tool material
R-DEPTH% Setting coefficient of maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
⑩ %
(Tool material) according to tool material
On the CUTTING CONDITION (PERCENTAGE) display, the following data can be registered:
- Cutting-condition automatic setting coefficients appropriate for the materials type
8-5
8-3 CUTTING CONDITION (TURNING) Display

Function
Registering the fundamental data for automatic setting of the cutting conditions (peripheral speed,
feed rate, etc.) to be used in turning units.
Remarks
- Initially, data that YAMAZAKI MAZAK recommends is displayed. The data can be changed as
required.
- The cutting conditions to be used in a turning process are calculated automatically in
accordance with the data that has been registered on this display and on the CUTTING
CONDITION (PERCENTAGE) and TOOL DATA displays, data that has been set in the
program to be executed, and parameter settings. Refer to the Programming Manual for
calculation expressions.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ① ② ③ ④
D734S226E
8-6

m/min
① R-SPD Peripheral speed during rough-machining
(feet/min)
m/min
② F-SPD Peripheral speed during finish-machining
(feet/min)
mm/rev
③ R-FEED Feed rate per spindle rotation during rough-machining
(inch/rev)
mm
④ R-DEP Maximum depth of cut during rough-machining
(inch)
On the CUTTING CONDITION (TURNING) display, the following data can be registered:
- The peripheral speed, feed rate per revolution and maximum depth of cut that are to be set for
roughing during each turning unit, and the peripheral speed during finishing.
The terms displayed under MODE on the screen denote the machining units and the sections of
machining that are listed below:
BAR: Bar-materials machining unit OUT: Outer diameter section
CPY: Copy-machining unit IN: Inner diameter section
CNR: Corner-machining unit FCE: Face
EDG: Edge-machining unit BAK: Back
THR: Threading unit
GRV: Grooving unit
DRL: Drilling unit
TAP: Tapping unit
Procedures for registering the above-mentioned data are described below (for the sake of
convenience of description, the statement made below assumes that data is to be set in order of
item number).
(1) Set the cursor on the data item R-SPD.
! After calling up the cursor on the screen with one of the cursor keys, move the cursor to
the data item R-SPD on the intended line.
(2) Set a spindle peripheral speed for roughing.
! The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item F-SPD.
(3) Set a spindle peripheral speed for finishing.
! The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item R-FEED.
(4) Set a feedrate per spindle revolution for roughing.
! The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item R-DEP.
(5) Set a maximum depth of cut for roughing.
! The designated value is displayed.
Note: Data setting in items marked with ◆ is not required.
8-7
8-4 CUTTING CONDITION (MILLING) Display

Function
Registering the fundamental data for automatic setting of the cutting conditions (peripheral speed,
feed rate, etc.) to be used in milling units.
Remarks
- Initially, data that YAMAZAKI MAZAK recommends is displayed. The data can be changed as
required.
- The cutting conditions to be used in a milling units are calculated automatically in accordance
with the data that has been registered on this display and on the CUTTING CONDITION
(PERCENTAGE) and TOOL DATA displays, data that has been set in the program to be
executed, and parameter settings. Refer to the Programming Manual for calculation
expressions.
<Data display>
D735S0227E

m/min
① R-SPD Peripheral speed during rough-machining
(feet/min)
m/min
② F-SPD Peripheral speed during finish-machining
(feet/min)
mm/rev
③ R-FEED Feed rate per milling spindle rotation during rough-machining
(inch/rev)
8-8
On the CUTTING CONDITION (MILLING) display, the following data can be registered:
- The peripheral speed and feed rate per revolution that are to be set for roughing during each
milling unit, and the peripheral speed during finishing.
The terms displayed under MODE on the screen denote the machining units and the sections of
machining that are listed below.
MDR: Milling-drilling unit OUT: Outer diameter section
MTP: Milling-tapping unit FCE: Face
BOR: Boring unit BAK: Back
MGV: Mill-grooving unit
LCT: Mill-line center-machining unit
RGT: Mill-line right-machining unit
LFT: Mill-line left-machining unit
CIR: Circular milling unit
Procedures for registering the above-mentioned data are described below (for the sake of
convenience of description, the statement made below assumes that data is to be set in order of
item number).
(1) Set the cursor on the data item R-SPD.
the data item R-SPD on the intended line.
(2) Set a milling-spindle peripheral speed for roughing.
- The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item F-SPD.
(3) Set a milling-spindle peripheral speed for finishing.
- The designated value is displayed and the cursor moves to the data item R-FEED.
(4) Set a feed rate per milling-spindle revolution for roughing.
- The designated value is displayed.
Note: Data setting in items marked with ◆ is not required.
8-9
8-5 CUT LEARN Display

Function
The CUT LEARN display is provided to store those modifications on the cutting conditions that
are performed by the operator with the aid of the VFC function. This display can only be selected
when the function for learning cutting conditions is made valid by the corresponding parameter
(P105 bit 2 = 1).
Remarks
The data stored in this display will be given priority in the automatic setting of cutting conditions
for a MAZATROL program if the related basic conditions agree with the stored ones. Otherwise,
the data stored in the CUTTING CONDITION display will be used for that purpose.
<Data display>
BAR OUT CBN STL CARBIDE 65.-100. 65.-100. F " 251 " "
BAR OUT CBN STL COATHSS 65.-100. 65.-100. R 165 " 0.33 3.0
MGV OUT CBN STL CARBIDE 65.-100. 65.-100. F " 251 " "
MGV OUT CBN STL COATHSS 65.-100. 65.-100. R 78 " 0.21 "
D734S1014E
<Menu functions>
- LEARN OFF
Used to protect a specific data against further modification. Position the cursor on the desired
data line and press the LEARN OFF menu key. The display of the menu item will then be
reversed and the message MODIFICATION IMPOSSIBLE? will appear. Press the INPUT key
to apply the protect function. The protection will then be indicated by a symbol on the left of the
No., the reverse display of the menu item will be cleared and the item itself will be replaced by
LEARN.
Pressing the menu key anew with the item reversely displayed will only clear the reverse
display.
8-10
- ERASE
Used to clear a specific data. Position the cursor on the desired data line and press the ERASE
menu key. The message ERASE <INPUT>? will then appear. Press the INPUT key to clear the
specified data.
display.
- LEARN
Used to cancel the protect function. Position the cursor on the desired data line and press the
LEARN menu key. The display of the menu item will then be reversed and the message
MODIFICATION IMP. ANNULATION? will appear. Press the INPUT key to cancel the protect
function. The symbol of protection will then disappear, the reverse display of the menu item will
be cleared and the item itself will be replaced by LEARN OFF.
display.
- CUTTING COND.
Used to change over to the CUTTING CONDITION display.
8-11
8-6 USER PARAMETER Display

Function
Registering and displaying user parameters
<Data display>
D734S0228E
① Address ー Address of various user parameters
② Data ー Data of various user parameters
Note 1: For further details, see the Prameter List.

Note 2: Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.
8-12
8-7 MACHINE PARAMETER Display

Function
Registering and displaying machine parameters
<Data display>
① ② ② ② ② ②
D734S0149’E
① Address — Address of various machine parameters
② Data — Data of various machine parameters
Axis name
③ Axis name —
Note: According to parameter number, it is not displayed.
Note 1: For further details, see the Parameter List.

Note 2: Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.
8-13
8-8 WORK OFFSET Display

Function
Setting zero-point offset for six workpiece coordinates systems (G54 to G59) in EIA/ISO
programs.
Remarks
This display is an optional one.
<Data display>
① ③ ⑤ ⑦
② ④ ⑥ ⑧
D734S0229E
X,Z,Y mm (inch) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G54 workpiece
① coordinates system on each axis
C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
② coordinates system on each axis
③ coordinates system on each axis
④ coordinates system on each axis
⑤ coordinates system on each axis
8-14
⑥ coordinates system on each axis
X,Z,Y mm (inch) Shift amount of workpiece zero-point in each workpiece coordinates system.
⑦
C degrees
X,Z,Y mm (inch) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display. See the Section
⑧
C degrees POSITION Display.
The following data can be registered on the WORK OFFSET display.

- Offset value of the workpiece zero-point in the workpiece coordinates systems G54 to G59
(items ① to ⑥)
Offset value of the workpiece zero-point is the offset value from the machine zero-point to the
workpiece zero-point.
G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4
Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3
Offset 2 Workpiece zero-point 4

Workpiece Offset 3
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1
G58
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinates
system 5
Offset 5
Offset 1: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece zero-point 5

in the workpiece coordinates system 1
Offset 2: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
in the workpiece coordinates system 2 G59
Offset 3: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece
in the workpiece coordinates system 3 coordinates system 6
Offset 4: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Offset 6
in the workpiece coordinates system 4 Workpiece
Offset 5: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point zero-point 6
Offset 6: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
8-15
- Shift amount of the workpiece coordinates systems (item ⑦)

Offset value of the external workpiece zero-point for shifting all the workpiece coordinates
systems G54 to G59.
G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates Workpiece coordinates
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3 zero-point 4
Offset 3
Workpiece Offset 2
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1
G58
Workpiece coordinates
Offset 5 system 5
Workpiece
zero-point 5
Offset X
G59
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinates
Offset 6
system 6
Workpiece
zero-point 6
Offset X : Offset value of external workpiece zero-point
The procedures for setting each type of data listed above are described below.
A. Procedure for setting offset value of workpiece zero-point
If known offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

(1) Place the cursor on the axis position of the coordinates system where data setting is
required.
- Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the screen. Then, move the cursor to the
intended position.
(2) Set the offset value.
(3) Repeat the steps (1) and (2) until entire data of the intended axes have been set.
If unknown offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

If the offset to be set is unknown, the data can be set using the TEACH (tool-nose position data
store) function.
<Setting data for axes other than C-axis>

(1) Index a tool whose tool set has already been completed.
(2) Bring the tool nose to the intended workpiece zero-point.
- Move the each axis under manual operation until the tool nose has reached the workpiece
zero-point.
8-16
(3) Place the cursor on the intended axis position of the coordinates system where data setting
is required.
- Press one of the cursor keys to cal up the cursor on the screen and move the cursor to the
axis position of the coordinates system where the data is to be set.
- Pressing this menu key makes TEACH assume a reverse display status.
(5) Set the distance from the workpiece zero-point to the tool nose in the intended axis
direction.
Example: If the workpiece zero-point is present at the positions shown below and the
zero-point in the Z-axis direction is to be set:
+X
： Workpiece zero-point
+Z
Workpiece
Workpiece
5 mm (0.2 in.)

T3S014
- The offset value in the Z-axis direction is set automatically and the reverse display status
of the TEACH is released.
<Setting data for C-axis>

(1) Index a tool suitable for measuring the C-axis position.
- Select a milling drill, for example.
(2) Set the measurement reference point to the tool-nose position.
- Predetermine an easy-to-measure point as the measurement reference point, and move
each axis under manual operation so that the point is set in the tool-nose position.
Example:
Measurement
reference point
NM310-00334
8-17
(3) Place the cursor on the C-axis position of the intended coordinates system.
- Press one of the cursor keys to call up the cursor on the screen and move the cursor to the
C-axis position of the coordinates system where the data is to be set.
- Pressing this menu key makes TEACH assume a reverse display status.
(5) Set the angle formed by the workpiece zero-point and measurement reference point.
Example: If the C-axis workpiece zero-point is present at the positions shown below:
+C Workpiece zero-point
+ 60°
–60°
Workpiece
zero-point
Workpiece zero-point
(same position as the
measurement reference
point)

NM210-00335
- The offset value is automatically set and the reverse display status of the TEACH is
released.
B. Setting shift amount of the workpiece coordinates systems
The amount of shifting can be set by setting a workpiece zero-point as shift coordinates, in a
similar manner described previously in the item, “A. Procedure for setting offset value of
workpiece zero-point”.
Using the INCRMENT INPUT menu function, desired data can be set by selecting an
incremental or decremental value for the existing data. See the Section TOOL DATA Display,
for further details.
8-18
8-9 MACRO VARIABLE Displays

Function
These displays allow macro variables to be set for the user macros.
Remarks
- Two types of macro variables can be used:
a) Common variables
........... Can be used for both the main program and the macro programs that are to
be called up from the main program.
b) Local variables
........... Can only be used in macro programs.
- The macro variable displays consist of the four sub-displays listed below.
a) COMMON VARIABLE display
........... Allows the operator to set the common variables to be used to execute user
macros in the automatic operation mode.
b) COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display
........... Allows the operator to set the common variables to be used to carry out tool
path checks.
c) LOCAL VARIABLE display
........... Allows the operator to set the local variables to be used to execute user
macros in the automatic operation mode.
d) LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display
........... Allows the operator to set the local variables to be used to carry out tool path
checks.
Note: The LOCAL VARIAE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays only list settings of
variables; the data on these two displays cannot be modified.
Refer to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for further details of user macros.
User macro is an optional function.
8-19
<Data display (COMMON VARIABLE, COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK))>
① ②
③
① ② ① ② ① ②
D734S0151E
<Display data description (COMMON VARIABLE, COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK))>

① No. — Variable number
② DATA — Registered variable value
③ Page — Current page number and the total number of pages
a/b
a: Current page
b: Total page number
8-20
<Data display (LOCAL VARIABLE, LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK))>
① ② ① ② ① ②
① ②
D734S0152E
<Display data description (LOCAL VARIABLE, LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK))>
① No. — Variable number
② DATA — Registered variable number
③ Nest — Nesting number
A. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays
Only variables can be registered on the COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE
(CHECK) displays.
(1) Set the cursor on the data item DATA of the variable to be set.
- After calling up the cursor on the display by pressing the cursor key, move the cursor to
the data item DATA of the variable to be set.
(2) Set the desired data as the intended variable.
- Enter data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
B. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays
No data can be registered on the LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK)
displays.
8-21
A. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays
- Calling up the cursor on the COMMON VARIABLE or COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display
lists out the following menu:
COMMON COMMON LOCAL LOCAL INCRMENT Exp PROGRAM

VARIABLE CHECK VARIABLE CHECK INPUT
# Pressing the INCRMENT INPUT menu key allows the entered data.
See the Section, TOOL DATA Display for further details.
Select (or put a check-off mark to) the option “Incremental First” displayed under “Setup” on
the menu bar to initially make the INCRMENT INPUT menu function valid.
The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.

# Use the Exp menu item to set data in exponential form.
Example: To set the data 2×10－6, press keys in the following order:
2 Exp – 6
INPUT
This displays “2.E-6” under DATA item.

- The data on the COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have
been registered over multiple pages.
# Pressing the page key displays the next page.
# Pressing the page key displays the previous page.
B. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

- The data on the LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have been
registered on nesting levels 0 to 3 per display. The number displayed on the data item NEST of
the display denotes the nesting level of the current data.
# Pressing the page key displays the next page.
# Pressing the page key displays the previous page.
8-22
C. Display type of variables
The display type of macro variables (within a specific range of their values) can be chosen
between Exponential and Not Exponential.
Select (or put a check-off mark to) the option “Not Exponential Display” displayed under “Setup”
on the menu bar to choose non-exponential display of variables’ values within a specific range as
indicated below:
Example: Display of “0.01”
Exponential display: 1.E–2
Not Exponential display: 0.01
Range of absolute values of variables “Not Exponential Display” “Not Exponential Display”
(ABS var.) selected cancelled
ABS var. < 0.0001 Exponential form
0.0001 ≤ ABS var. < 1 Non-exponential form Exponential form
1 ≤ ABS var. ≤ 99999.9999 Non-exponential form
99999.9999 < ABS var. Exponential form
The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.
8-23
- NOTE -
8-24 E
DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 9
9 DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE
9-1 DATA I/O Display

Function
This display is used to transfer programs or other types of data between the NC unit and an
external unit.
<Data display>
D734S0153E
Work number of program for transference and identification of
MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs
① Work number —
M: MAZATROL program
E : EIA/ISO program
② Data type — Data other than programs for transference
③ Unit name — Name of unit for transference
④ I/O mode — Data transfer mode (loading, saving, etc.)
Display that indicates data is being input or output. During data input or
⑤ Display of execution —
output, display according to transfer mode being executed (④) is made.
Display that indicates an T PLUS program is being converted into a
⑥ CONVERT —
program for the NC unit.
H734S3J071E 9-1
9-1-1 Display operations
1. DATA I/O operations (CARD)
Insert the memory card into the insertion slot on the right side of the display. The card can be put
in and pulled out into and from the slot while the NC is turned on. During Data-I/O operation,
however, it must not be pulled out.
Note 1: Two types of memory cards are commercially available. One type is 5 V in driving
voltage, and the other is 3.3 V. The 5-V type must be used for the operations described
in this section.
Note 2: For the M640T NEXUS/TN, the IC card input/output function is an option.
The following four data input/output operations can be executed using a memory card.
- Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a memory card are registered into the NC
unit.
- Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto a memory
card.
- Directorying
The data types prestored on a memory card are displayed.
- Formatting
A memory card is formatted (initialized).
The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.
A. Selecting the directory
For loading, saving and directorying with a memory card, selection of the required directory must
be done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Press the DIR. SELECT menu key.
! DIR. SELECT will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will
appear.
(2) Key in the name of the directory to be newly created and press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphabetic and numeric data keys to input the name.
- To select an existing directory, select it with cursor keys and press the INPUT key.
9-2
B. Loading
(1) Press the CARD menu key.

(2) Press the NC ← CARD LOAD menu key.
! LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
<For program data transfer>
- Move the cursor to the work number item of (CARD) column and input the work number of
the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a reverse-display status
after setting the work number.
- Up to 32 programs can be selected.
<For non-program data transfer>
- Move the cursor to the intended data in data type item of (CARD) column and press the
INPUT key. The data name will change to a reverse-display status. It indicates that the
data is to be transferred.
<For erasing the data that has been set>
- Carry out the following operations to erase the entire data that has been set:
1) Press the ALL ERASE menu key.
! ALL ERASE will change into a reverse-display status.
2) Press the INPUT key.
! The reverse-display status of the entire data will be cleared and all the work
number will become blank.
(4) Press the START menu key.
! START will change into a reverse-display status and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change at the position where the data being transferred is displayed.
- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of START will be cleared.
Note 1: You can select using bit 2 of parameter P106 whether loading of a program whose
work number is the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to
be enabled or not (1 or 0). For further details of parameters, see the Parameter List.
To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by the
relevant parameter setting, to be loaded, the work number of the pre-registered
program are to be changed beforehand.
Note 2: A listing window for the work numbers of all programs registered previously in the NC
unit can be displayed by pressing the PROGRAM FILE menu key. While the window
remains on the display, the display status of the PROGRAM FILE menu reverses.
Pressing the PROGRAM FILE menu key once again clears the reverse-display status
of the menu item and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overridden.
This also applies when a transfer mode other than LOAD has been selected.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the reverse-display status is cleared by pressing the START
menu key during the data transfer process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the
position in which the transfer process has halted.
9-3
C. Saving

(2) Press the NC → CARD SAVE menu key.
! SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
- The data input procedure is the same as that of LOAD. Input the data in the (NC) column.
(See procedural step (3) of “B. Loading”.)
! START will change to a reverse-display status and data transfer will begin.
- The data that has been transferred will change to a normal display status and the same
data will be displayed in the (CARD) column.
D. Directorying
(2) Press the CARD CONTENT menu key.
! DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item.
! START will change into a reverse-display status, and what type of data is stored on the
memory card will be displayed in the (CARD) column on the display.
- If program data is stored on the external media, the corresponding work number will be
displayed on the work number item.
- If non-program data is stored on the external media, the corresponding item will be
displayed in a reverse-display status.
- After entire data display is completed, the reverse-display status of START will be cleared.
E. Formatting

(2) Press the CARD FORMAT menu key.
! FORMAT will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Key in “–9999” and press the INPUT key.
! START will change into a reverse-display status and initialization will begin.
- Upon completion of the initialization, the reverse-display status of START will be cleared.
9-4
2. DATA I/O operations (CMT)
The following four data input/output operations can be executed using a cassette tape or a
microdisk.
- Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a cassette tape (CMT) or a microdisk are
registered into the NC unit.
- Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto a
cassette tape or a microdisk.
- Comparing
The comparison is made between the data prestored on a cassette tape or a microdisk and the
data pre-registered in the NC unit.
- Directorying
The list of data prestored on a cassette tape or a microdisk are displayed.
The following description assumes that a cassette tape deck or a MAZAK microdisk unit has
already been connected to the NC unit and that cassette tape or microdisk setting is also
completed.
A. Loading
(1) Press the CMT I/O menu key.

(2) Press the LOAD NC ← CMT menu key.
- Move the cursor to the work number item of (CMT) column and input the work number of
the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a reverse-display status
- Move the cursor to the intended data in data type item of (CMT) column and press the
- Move the cursor to the data to be erased and press the data cancellation key. When the
data to be erased is a program, then the work number will become blank and the reverse-
display status will be cleared. In case of non-program data, the reverse-display status will
be cleared.
9-5

! START will change into a reverse display status and data transfer will begin.
- The data that has been transferred will change to a normal display status. The same data
will be displayed in the (NC) column.
- After data transfer, the reverse display status of START will be cleared.
Note 1: You can select using a parameter whether loading of a program whose work number is
the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to be enabled. For
further details of parameters, see the Parameter List.
To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of a pre-registered program must be changed
prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window for the work numbers of all programs registered previously in the NC
unit can be displayed by pressing the PROGRAM FILE menu key. While the window
remains on the display, the display status of the PROGRAM FILE menu reverses and
a PAGE SAVE menu item is displayed.
Pressing the PROGRAM FILE menu key once again clears the reverse display status
of both the window and the menu item. The display of the PAGE SAVE menu item is
also cleared.
Note 3: Pressing the PAGE SAVE menu key during data setting allows all work numbers
displayed in the work number listing window to be automatically set.
If the PAGE SAVE menu key is pressed during data input/output, alarm 422 MEMORY
PROTECT (I/O BUSY) will be displayed. This alarm will also be displayed if the SAVE
or COMPARE transfer mode is selected.
Note 4: It is possible to load a program that has been created using the MAZATROL T PLUS (T
PLUS program). In that case, the T PLUS program will be automatically converted into
a program used for the NC unit of the machine.
However, it may become necessary to add supplementary data after loading has been
completed.
For further details, see the description of “Program conversion” that follows.
While the NC unit is reading in a T PLUS program, the message CONVERT will be
displayed at the lower right corner of the display.
Note 5: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overridden.
Note 6: Data transfer will halt if the reverse display status is cleared by pressing the START
menu key during the data transfer process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the
position in which the transfer process has halted.
9-6
B. Saving

(2) Press the SAVE NC → CMT menu key.
(See procedural step (3) of “A. Loading”.)
! START will change to a reverse display status and data transfer will begin.
data will be displayed in the (CMT) column.
Note: When saving the entire NC data onto a microdisk, divide the storage area of the
microdisk into two segments, not into six segments. Division into six segments may
result in the lack of capacity.
C. Comparing

(2) Press the COMPARE NC = CMT menu key.
! COMPARE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be compared with data pre-registered within the NC unit.
- The data input procedure is the same as that of “1. Loading”. Input the data in the (NC)
column.
- The START will change into a reverse display status and data comparing will begin.
- The display color will change at the position where the data being compared is displayed.
- The data that has been compared will change to a normal display status and the same
data will be displayed in the (CMT) column.
- If the reverse display status of START is cleared without displaying an alarm message,
then this indicates that the entire data you have selected agrees with data pre-registered
within the NC unit.
- If disparities exist in the data being compared, an alarm message 511 DATA ARE NOT
COINCIDENT will be displayed and the comparison process will be aborted.
This state indicates that data being displayed in the changed color does not agree with
data pre-registered within the NC unit.
9-7
D. Directorying

(2) Press the CMT CONTENTS menu key.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and what type of data is stored on the
cassette tape (CMT) or the microdisk will be displayed in the (CMT) column on the
display.
displayed in a reverse display status.
- After entire data display is completed, the reverse display status of START will be cleared.
Note: Executing a Directory operation prior to Loading or Comparing operations enables
data selection time to be saved.
Example 1: Do the following to load the entire data that is stored on a cassette tape or a
microdisk:
(1) Call the stored data out on the display by carrying out a directorying
operation.
(2) Press the LOAD CMT → NC menu key.
Example 2: Do the following to load part of the data stored on a cassette tape or a
microdisk:
(1) Call the stored data out on the display by carrying out a directorying
operation.
(2) Press the LOAD CMT → NC menu key.
(3) Set the cursor on the data not to be loaded and press the data cancel
key (CANCEL). Or set 0 for program not to be loaded.
Program conversion
Loading a T PLUS program enables the program to be converted into one used for the NC unit
automatically.
After loading, however, it may become necessary to add supplementary data because different
data items must be set between T PLUS programs and the NC unit of the machine programs.
1. All milling machining units must be once erased and reprogrammed again.
2. Tool names of all turning machining units must be newly inputted.
Refer to the Programming Manual for a description of programs.
Non-program data which has been registered using another NC unit cannot be loaded.
9-8
3. DATA I/O operations (TAPE)
The following six data input/output operations can be executed using a paper tape or a
microdisk.
- Loading
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
registered in the NC unit.
- All loading
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are registered in
the NC unit.
- Punching
A program or non-program data of all those pre-registered within the NC unit is stored on a
paper tape or a microdisk.
- All punching
All programs and non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit are stored on a paper
tape or a microdisk.
- Comparing
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
compared with a program pre-registered within the NC unit.
- All comparing
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are compared
with the programs pre-registered within the NC unit.
Note: All the data other than EIA/ISO programs are I/O-operated in the three-digit G-code
format, the details of which are described in the Programming Manual (MAZATROL).
The operating procedure for the functions listed above is described below. The following
description assumes that a paper tape reader/puncher or a MAZAK microdisk unit has already
been connected to the NC unit and that paper tape or microdisk setting is also completed.
A. Loading
(1) Press the TAPE I/O menu key.

(2) Press the LOAD TAPE →NC menu key.
- LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
- Refer to procedural step (3) under “A. Loading” of “2. DATA I/O operations (CMT)”.
! START will change into a reverse-display status, and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change to the position in which the program being transferred is
displayed.
Note: The precautions described in Notes 1 to 3, 5 and 6 under “A. Loading” of “2. DATA I/O
operations (CMT)” are valid for this loading operation.
9-9
B. All loading

(2) Press the ALL LOAD TAPE → NC menu key.
! ALL-LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and data transfer will begin.
- After data transfer, the reverse display status of the START will be cleared.
C. Punching

(2) Press the PUNCH NC → TAPE menu key.
! PUNCH will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
- See the description of procedural step (3) of “A. Loading”. Set data in the (NC) column.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and the tape puncher will start
operating.
- The display color will change at the position in which the program being punched out is
displayed.
data is displayed in the (TAPE) column.
- After all the selected data have been punched on the paper tape, the reverse display
status of START will be cleared.
D. All punching

(2) Press the ALL PUNCH NC → TAPE menu key.
! ALL-PUNC will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and the tape puncher will start
operating.
- After all the pre-registered programs and non-program data have been punched on the
paper tape, the reverse display status of START will be cleared.
E. Comparing

(2) Press the COMPARE NC =TAPE menu key.
! COMPARE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Specify the data to be compared.
- See the description of procedural step (3) of “A. Loading”.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and program comparison will begin.
9-10
- The display color will change at the position of the program and non-program data being
compared.
- The program and non-program data that have been compared will change to a normal
display status and the same program will be displayed in the (NC) column.
- Clearing of the reverse display status of START without an alarm message indicates that
the contents of all the selected program and non-program data agree with those of the
pre-registered program and non-program data.
- If disparities exist in the program and non-program data being compared, an alarm
message 541 DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed and comparison will be
aborted.
This indicates that the contents of the data present in the changed display color do not
agree with the contents of the pre-registered counterpart.
F. All comparing

(2) Press the ALLCOMP NC=TAPE menu key.
! ALL-COMP will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and program comparison will begin.
- Clearing of the reverse display status of START without an alarm message indicates that
the contents of all programs and non-program data stored on the paper tape agree with
those of the programs pre-registered within the NC unit.
- If disparities exist in the program being compared, an alarm message 541 DATA ARE
NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed and comparison will be aborted.
G. Program-name tape input/output
When a program is transferred using tape I/O function, the name of the program which is to be
set on the PROGRAM FILE display can be assigned to that program before starting the transfer
operation.
Transfer conditions
1. Input or output of program names is possible only if the program-name tape I/O function has
been made valid using parameter TAP26.
See the Parameter List, for parameter details.
2. Of all the functions presented on the TAPE I/O display, only those listed below can be used
to transfer program names to or from a tape.
- Loading
- All loading
- Punching
- All punching
- Comparing
- All comparing
9-11
Tape format
The name of the program transferred to or from a tape must be designated as follows:
Set the control-out code “(” after the number with O, then set the program name and the control-
in code “)”, in that order.
Example: O1234(COMMENT1234);
↓
Program name
Notes
1. Only the codes listed in the ASCII codes list can be used as program names.
If an ASCII code other than “space”, “.”, “–“, “0 to 9”, “Characters other than A to Z” is
entered as the program name, the ASCII code will be converted into a space code (&20)
and registered in the internal memory of the NC unit.
2. The maximum number of name characters which can be stored into the NC internal memory
during the program-name loading operation is 32. If, therefore, the name to be loaded
consists of 33 characters or more, all those excess characters will be ignored.
4. DATA I/O operations (FLOPPY)
The following four data input/output operations can be executed using a floppy disk.
Note: “Floppy disk” described here does not mean a floppy for the micro disk.
Only 2HD (1.44 MB) floppy disks can be used.
- Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a floppy disk are registered into the NC
unit.
- Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto a floppy
disk.
- Directorying
The list of data type prestored on a floppy disk are displayed.
- Formatting
A floppy disk is formatted (initialized).
The following description assumes that a floppy disk unit has already been connected to the NC
unit and that floppy disk setting is also completed.
A. Loading
(1) Press the FLOPPY menu key.

(2) Press the LOAD NC ← FD menu key.
- Move the cursor to the work number item of (FLOPPY) column and input the work number
of the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a reverse-display status
9-12
- Move the cursor to the intended data in data type item of (FLOPPY) column and press the
- The highlighted-display status of the data that has been transferred will be cleared. The
same data will be displayed in the (NC) column.
Note: The precautions described in Notes 1, 2, 4 and 5 under “B. Loading” of “1 DATA I/O
operations (CARD)” are valid for this loading operation.
B. Saving
(2) Press the SAVE NC → FD menu key.
data will be displayed in the (FLOPPY) column.
9-13
C. Directorying
(2) Press the CONTENTS FD menu key.
floppy disk will be displayed in the (FLOPPY) column on the display.
D. Formatting

(2) Press the FORMAT FD menu key.
! FORMAT will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Key in “–9999” and press the INPUT key.
! START will change into a reverse-display status and initialization will begin.
- After initialization, the reverse-display status of START will be cleared.
Note 1: Only double-sided high-density (2HD) floppy disks can be used.
Note 2: Formatting is executed at 1.44 MB.
5. DATA I/O operations (DNC)
The following two data input/output operations can be executed using a host CPU or other NC.
- Loading
Non-program data or programs pre-registered within a host CPU or the NC unit of other
machines are transferred to the NC unit of this machine.
- Saving
Non-program data or programs pre-registered within the NC unit of this machine are
transferred to a host CPU or the NC unit of other machines.
The operating procedure for the operations listed above is described below. The following
description assumes that the NC unit of this machine has already been connected to the NC unit
of other machines or a host CPU.
9-14
A. Loading
(1) Press the DNC I/O menu key.

(2) Press the LOAD HOST → NC menu key.
②
②
D734S0247E
- Move the cursor to the work number of the (DNC) column and input the work number of
the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a reverse display status
- Move the cursor to the intended data in data type item of the (DNC) column and set the file
number to be transferred. The data will change to a reverse displays status after setting
data.
<For erasing the set data>
- For erasing procedure, see the step (3) under “A. Loading” of “2. DATA I/O Operations
(CMT)”.
! START will change into a reverse-display status, and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change at the position in which the data being transferred is
displayed.
9-15
data will be displayed in the (NC) column.
Note: All the precautions in Notes under “A. Loading” of Subsection “2. DATA I/O operations
(CMT)” are valid for this loading operation.
B. Saving
(1) Press the DNC I/O menu key.

(2) Press the SAVE NC → HOST menu key.
! SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item, and the display will change as follows:
②
②
D734S0248E
- The data selection procedure is the same as that of the loading operation. Set data in the
(NC) column.
For further details, see the step (3) in “A. Loading”.
! START will change into a reverse display status, and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change at the position in which the data being transferred is
displayed.
- The data that has been transferred will change to a normal display status.
The same data will be displayed in the (DNC) column.
9-16
6. DATA I/O operations (HARD DISK)
The following three data input/output operations can be executed using the hard disk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on the hard disk are registered into the
NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto the
hard disk.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on the hard disk are displayed.
Note: Data communication with the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area cannot be achieved
by the HARD DISK function of the DATA I/O display.
A. Selecting the directory
For loading, saving and directorying with the hard disk, selection of the required directory must
be done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Press the DIR. SELECT menu key.
! DIR. SELECT will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will
appear.
(2) Key in the name of the required directory and press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphabetic and numeric keys to input the name.
9-17
B. Deleting the directory
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the hard disk, proceed as follows:
(1) Press the DIR. DELETE menu key.
! DIR. DELETE will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will
appear.
(2) Key in the name of the directory to be deleted and press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphabetic and numeric keys to input the name.
Note: All the files stored under the specified directory will be deleted by the above operation.
C. Loading
(1) Press the HARD DISK menu key.

(2) Press the NC ← HD LOAD menu key.
- Move the cursor to the work number item of (HARD DISK) column and input the work
number of the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a reverse-
display status after setting the work number.

- Move the cursor to the intended data in data type item of (HARD DISK) column and press
the INPUT key. The data name will change to a reverse-display status. It indicates that the

9-18
- The highlighted-display status of the data that has been transferred will be cleared. The
same data will be displayed in the (NC) column.
Note: The precautions described in Notes 1 to 4 under “B. Loading” of “1. DATA I/O
operations (CARD)” are valid for this loading operation.
D. Saving
(2) Press the NC → HD SAVE menu key.
(See procedural step (3) of “C. Loading”.)
data will be displayed in the (HARD DISK) column.
E. Directorying
(2) Press the HD CONTENT menu key.
hard disk will be displayed in the (HARD DISK) column on the display.
9-19
F. Changing the folder
The folder used for the HARD DISK data input/output operations can be changed by the
following procedure:
(1) Select “HD I/O Folder” from the “Setup” menu on the menu bar.
(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).
- Use the buttons above the text box to enter the corresponding symbols (backslash and
colon).
- Click “BROWSE” to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item if it is to be
set as a folder name.
(3) Complete the setting by clicking the “OK” button.
9-20
- The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAMESET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT”
Example: If the settings made as indicated in items F and A are respectively
“C:\T_Backup\Other” and “ABC”, the name of the folder concerned runs as
follows:
C:\T_Backup\Other\ABC
- The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
- Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.
- The default setting is “C:\T_Backup\Other”.
- The folder name can consist of 64 characters.
9-1-2 Data input/output in text file format

The text file format can be applied for three types of I/O operations: CARD, FLOPPY and HARD
DISK. Select (and reverse the display of) the TEXT FORMAT menu function to save (or output)
the NC data in text file format.
This function, however, is only available when bit 6 of parameter P105 is set to 1.
P105 bit 6 = 0/1: Data in- and output in text file format invalid/valid
The file names used in output operations are as follows:
Data type with TEXT FORMAT selected with TEXT FORMAT cancelled
EIA/ISO programs 1～99999999.eia 1～99999999.eia
MAZATROL programs 1～99999999.t6p 1～99999999.t6m
TOOL DATA toldat01.t6v toldat01.t64
TOOL OFFSET tolofs01.t6v tolofs01.t64
TOOL LIFE tollif01.t6v tollif01.t64
CUTTING CONDITION cutcnd01.t6v cutcnd01.t64
USER PARAMETER usrpar01.t6v usrpar01.t64
MACHINE PARAMETER mhnpar01.t6v mhnpar01.t64
WORK OFFSET wrkofs01.t6v wrkofs01.t64
MACRO VARIABLE mcrvar01.t6v mcrvar01.t64
CHUCK JAW DATA jawdat01.t6v jawdat01.t64
MAINTENANCE CHECK mainte01.t6v mainte01.t64
- EIA/ISO programs are always outputted in text file format (even with the TEXT FORMAT
function cancelled).
- The text file format is described in detail for each data type in Chapter 8, THREE-DIGIT G-
FORMAT, of the PROGRAMMING MANUAL [MAZATROL].
Loading and directorying operations are automatically performed appropriately to the format of
the file concerned, irrespective of the TEXT FORMAT menu function.
9-21
- NOTE -
9-22 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 10
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS
The NC unit provides the following diagnostic displays and windows:
1. DIAGNOSIS (USER) display [ALARM, ALARM HISTORY, PLC SIGNAL]

2. MAINTENANCE CHECK display
3. RUNNING CONTROL display
4. DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) display [VERSION, DIAGNOSIS MONITOR, OPTION, SERVO
MONITOR*, SPINDLE MONITOR*, HARDWARE MONITOR*, LADDER MONITOR*]
5. DATA ERASE window
6. ACCUMULATED TIME window
Description of displays marked with an asterisk (*) is omitted because these displays are
reserved for YAMAZAKI MAZAK servicemen.
H734S3K071E 10-1
10-1 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM) Display

Function
- Displaying the number, details, etc. of alarms currently occuring
Remarks
- Even if more than one alarm occurred, only one of the alarm messages will appear on other
displays. Selection of this display, however, gives you further detailed information about all
alarms whose causes have not been removed.
- Refer to the Alarm List for further details of alarms and their resetting methods.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤
D734S0156E
① No. — Alarm number
② ALARM MESSAGE — Alarm contents
Section where the alarm occurred
( a, b, c )
③ — a: Work number
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: The data may not be displayed for certain types of alarms.
④ DATE TIME M.D H:M Date and time when the alarm occurred
⑤ TYPE — Source of the occurrence of the alarm
10-2
10-2 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM HISTORY) Display

Function
Displaying the details, the places of occurrence, etc. of all alarms that have occurred up to now,
in order of the latest alarm first.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤
D734S0157E
① No. — Alarm number
② ALARM MESSAGE — Contents of alarm
Section where the alarm occured
(a, b, c)
a: Work number
③ —
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: May not be displayed for the particular alarm.
④ DATE TIME M.D H:M Date and time when the alarm occurred
⑤ TYPE — Source of occurrence of the alarm
Current page and the total number of pages
a/b
⑥ Page —
a: Current page
b: Total number of pages
10-3
10-3 DIAGNOSIS (PLC SIGNAL) Display

Function
Displaying ON/OFF status of machine signals
<Data display>
D734S0158E
① Signal name — Singal name
ON/OFF status of signals
② 0/1 —
0: OFF 1: ON
10-4
10-4 MAINTENANCE CHECK Display

Function
- Periodic check items, the last date of checking, and the time that has elapsed since the last
date of checking are displayed.
- Periodic check items can be registered.
Remarks
The machine will not stop even if the display of the time which has elapsed since the last date of
checking exceeds the target time.
10-4-1 Data display for normal check items

<Data display>
D734S0159’E
① No. — Check number
MAINTENANCE
② — Name of a periodic check item
CHECK DATA
③ TIME % Graphical representation of the rate of the current time to the target time
④ Target time Hour Target time for the periodic check item
⑤ Current time Hour Current time for the periodic check item
⑥ PREVIOUS CHECK ’Y. M. D The last date of periodic check item
’Y. M. D
⑦ Date/Time The current date and time
H:M’ S”
⑧ Page — Page number
10-5
1. Registering the data for regular check items
A. Presetting the target time or the current time
(1) Move the cursor to the data item where data is to be preset.
(2) Enter time.
Example: Specify “96” and press the INPUT key to input 96.
Note: Entry of the current time updates the data of data item ⑥ (PREVIOUS CHECK).
10-4-2 Data display for long-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
<Data display>
① ② ① ②
D734S0160E
① No. — Check number
② Check items — Long-term check item
③ Page — Page number
Supplementary description
The display status of data item will reverse when the current time reaches the target time. After
completion of checking, move the cursor to “No.” using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display of data item will then return from the reverse status to the normal status.
10-6
10-5 RUNNING CONTROL Display

Function
Displaying the machine operational status.
Remarks
- The machine operational status for the last seven days (one week) is displayed.
- The operational status during power-on time is displayed in distinction between the following
four divisions:
1. Running in automatic operation
2. Stopping in automatic operation
3. Setting-up in automatic operation
4. Stopping due to an alarm
- Program numbers and machining results (numbers of finished workpieces) on the selected
date can be displayed.
- Change in speed and load (%) of the spindle on the selected date can be displayed.
- Change in speed and load (%) of the milling-spindle on the selected date can be displayed.
<Data display>
- Displayed data with normal display of RUNNING COND., SPINDLE LOAD and MILL LOAD
menu items
① ②
D734S0164E
10-7
- Displayed data with reverse display of RUNNING COND. menu item
① ②
③ ④
D734S0165E
- Displayed data with reverse display of SPINDLE LOAD or MILL LOAD menu item
① ②
SPDL
D734S0166E
10-8
- Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
① DATE/TIME —
a : Date
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time
- The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:

Division Color Description
The time for which the CYCLE START
AUTO blue
lamp was on.
Graphic display of The time for which the machine remained
FEED HOLD green
② — in feed-hold or single-block stop.
operational status The time for which the automatic operation
ALARM red
was disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under
SET UP purple
other states.
- Blank areas (no strip display) refer to power-off time.

- Work number of the machining program and machining result.
a (b)
c
③ WORK No. —
a : Work number
c : Number of finished workpieces
- Strip graphs of the operational status are displayed for each work
④ RUNNING COND —
number. Refer to ② above for the division method.
- Graphic display of change in spindle/milling-spindle speed.
⑤ RPM min–1 - The change in spindle/milling-spindle speed during power-on is
displayed in a red line.
- Graphic display of change in spindle/milling-spindle load.
⑥ LOAD % - The change in spindle/milling-spindle load during power on is

displayed in a light-blue line for rapid feed and in a green line for
cutting feed.
Note: The load of the milling-spindle cannot be displayed on some machine models
(equipped with a universal inverter, for example).
1. Display modes
This display has the following three display modes:

1. Total display
The display is always made in this mode when the RUNNING CONTROL display is
selected.
The operational status is displayed totally for the last seven days (one week) from the
current date.
After selecting a date displayed in this mode, a further detailed information upon the
operational status can be obtained for that date in another display mode.
2. Display for each work number
In this mode, the operational status on the date which was selected in the total display mode
can be displayed for each machining program.
Since this mode provides the display of the number of finished workpieces, it can be readily
checked what quantity was machined with what program on the particular date.
Note: The machining quantity displayed here only refers to the value of “parts count”
automatically taken on the corresponding command in the particular program. Refer to
the Programming Manual for the parts counting.
10-9
3. Spindle load display

In this mode, the changes in spindle speed and load on the date which was selected in the
total display mode can be displayed on a graph.
4. Milling-spindle load display
In this mode, the changes in milling-spindle speed and load on the date which was selected
in the total display mode can be displayed on a graph.
A. Changing from the total to the display mode for each work number
(1) Call up the cursor in the column of DATE/TIME by pressing a cursor key.
- The cursor here refers to a rectangular section displayed in reverse, as shown below, in
the DATE/TIME column.
1998.03.09(MON)
00:44’
Cursor
1998.03.08(SUN)
00:00’
1998.03.07(SAT)
07:49’
1998.03,06(FRI)
05:32’
1998.03.05(THU)
10:32’
1998.03.04(WED)
00:00’
1998.03.03(TUE)
00:00’
(2) Position the cursor on the desired date by using the cursor keys.
(3) Press the RUNNING COND. menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display mode will change to the
display for each work number.
1998.03.09(MON)
00:44’
WORK No. RUNNING COND.

10 E
COUNT 10
68 M
COUNT 5
10-10
- Up to five machining programs can be displayed at the same time. Scrolling for the sixth
program onward can be done by pressing the page key.
- Pressing the RUNNING COND. menu key anew will clear the reverse display of the menu
item to retrieve the total display mode.
B. Changing from the total to the display mode for spindle load
- The cursor must be called up first, as is the case with the change to the display mode for
each work number.
(3) Press the SPINDLE LOAD menu key.
display of spindle load.
1998.03.09(MON)
00:44’
- Pressing the SPINDLE LOAD menu key anew will clear the reverse display of the menu
item to retrieve the total display mode.
C. Changing from the total to the display mode for milling-spindle load
- The cursor must be called up first, as is the case with the change to the display mode for
each work number.
10-11
(3) Press the MILL LOAD menu key.

display of milling-spindle load.
1998.03.09(MON)
00:44’
Pressing the MILL LOAD menu key anew will clear the reverse display of the menu item to
retrieve the total display mode.
10-12
10-6 DIAGNOSIS (VERSION) Display

Function
Displaying versions of NC unit and servo axes
<Data display>
③ ④
① ②
① ② ⑤ ⑥
D734S0161E
① ITEM — Name of NC unit and servo axes
② VERSION — Version
③ SERIAL — Serial number of NC unit
④ MODEL — Model name of NC unit
⑤ MOTOR — Model name of detector
⑥ MACHINE — Model name of detector
Note: Version of NC unit refers to MAIN-A.
10-13
10-7 DIAGNOSIS (MONITOR) Display

Function
- Display of memory status in the NC unit
- You can write data into the memory.
Remarks
Please follow the instructions of YAMAZAKI MAZAK servicemen when writing data into the
memory.
<Data display>
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ④ ⑤ ⑥
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ④ ⑤ ⑥
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ④ ⑤ ⑥
⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬
D734S0162E
① ADDRESS — Display of memory address
② Data — Data display in binary for the address in item ①
③ Data — Data display in hexadecimal for the address in item ①
④ ADRSS — Display of I/O address
⑤ Data — Data display in binary for the address in item ④
⑥ Data — Data display in hexadecimal for the address in item ④
⑦ ADDRESS — Address when writing data into memory
⑧ Data — Data display in binary for the address in item ⑦
⑨ Data — Data display in hexadecimal for the address in item ⑦
⑩ ADRSS — Address when writing data into I/O address
⑪ Data — Data display in binary for the address in item ⑩
⑫ Data — Data display in hexadecimal for the address in item ⑩
⑬ Data — Data display in decimal for the address in item ⑩
10-14
A. Monitoring memory status
(1) Place the cursor on the ADDRESS column of MEMORY MONITOR DISP.
Example: MEMORY MONITOR DISP
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX
MH00000000 00000000 00
MH00000001 00110000 30
MH00000002 00011110 1E
MH00000003 00011010 1A
(2) Set the address to be monitored.

Example: Set 89ABC.
MEMORY MONITOR DISP
MH00089ABC 11111111 FF
MH00089ABD 00101000 28
MH00089ABE 00100001 21
MH00089ABF 01101110 6E
B. Monitoring I/O memory status
(1) Place the cursor on the ADRSS column item of I/O MONITOR DISP.
I/O MONITOR DISP
ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX
X0000 0000000000000000 0000
X0010 0000000000000000 0000
X0020 0000000000000000 0000
X0030 0000000000000000 0000
(2) Set the address to be monitored.

Example: Set Y120.
I/O MONITOR DISP
Y0120 0000000000000000 0000
Y0130 0000000000000000 0000
Y0140 0000000000010000 0010
Y0150 0000100000000000 0800
10-15
C. Writing data into the memory
(1) Place the cursor on the ADDRESS item of MEMORY MONITOR WRITE.
MEMORY MONITOR WRITE
MW00000000 00000000 00
(2) Set the address for which the data should be written.
Example: Set 123456.
MW00123456 11111111 FF
(3) Move the cursor onto the HEX item of MEMORY MONITOR WRITE.
Example: MEMORY MONITOR WRITE

NW00123456 11111111 FF
(4) Set the data to be written.

Example: Set 1A.
NW00123456 00011010 1A
Note: Please follow the instructions of YAMAZAKI MAZAK servicemen when writing data into
the memory.
D. Writing data in hexadecimal into the I/O memory
(1) Place the cursor on the ADRSS item of I/O MONITOR WRITE.
Example: I/O MONITOR WRITE

ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX DECIMAL
X0000 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0010 0000000000000000 0000 0
(2) Set the address for which the data should be written.
Example: Set X120.
I/O MONITOR WRITE
X0120 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0130 0000000000000000 0000 0
(3) Move the cursor onto the HEX item of I/O MONITOR WRITE.

X0120 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0130 0000000000000000 0000 0
10-16
(4) Set the data to be written.
Example: Set F1.
I/O MONITOR WRITE
X0120 0000000011110001 00F1
Note: Write data in accordance with the directions of a YAMAZAKI MAZAK serviceman.
E. Writing data in decimal form into the I/O memory
(1) Carry out the same operations as those of steps (1) and (2) which are to be taken when
writing data in hexadecimal form into the I/O memory.
Example: Set X120.
I/O MONITOR WRITE
X0120 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0130 0000000000000000 0000 0
(2) Move the cursor onto the DECIMAL item of I/O MONITOR WRITE.

X0120 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0130 0000000000000000 0000 0
(3) Press the LONG menu key only if the data to be written falls outside the range from −32768
to 32767.
! The display status of the LONG menu item will then reverse and the numeral on the
second line will be cleared.
X0120 0000000000000000 0000 0
X0130 0000000000000000 0000
(4) Input the data to be written.

Example: Set 32768.
I/O MONITOR WRITE
X0120 1000000000000000 8000 32768
X0130 0000000000000000 0000
Note: Write data in accordance with the directions of a YAMAZAKI MAZAK serviceman.
10-17
10-8 DIAGNOSIS (OPTION) Display

Function
Displaying all optional functions for the NC unit
Remarks
All terms are displayed in English on this display.
<Data display>
① ①
D734S1163E
Display of whether each of optional functions for the NC unit is available
① Function name —
or not.
10-18
10-9 DATA ERASE Window

This window is used to erase the entire data of, or to initialize, the particular display.
(1) Press the DATA ERASE menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the data of each display will appear
as a window.
(2) Select the data to be initialized.
- Select the data to be initialized with the cursor key and press the INPUT key. Then, “√” will
be added to the selected item. Click the APPLY to terminate the selection.
(3) Enter “–9999”.

! The selected data will be initialized.
- After completion of initialization, the window will be closed.
Note: Do not change the display during data initialization.
10-10 ACCUMULATED TIME Window

The four types of cumulative time data listed below can be set on the DIAGNOSIS display.
1. POWER ON
2. AUTO OPE.
3. AUTO CUT.
4. TOTAL CUT.
(1) Select the “Accumulated Time” option through “Window” on the menu bar.
! The ACCUMULATED TIME window will appear with the cursor placed on the POWER
ON item.
(2) Using the cursor key, move the cursor to the line of the desired item.
Example: If the cumulative time of automatic cutting is to be set
10-19
(3) Specify the time, and press the INPUT key.

Example: To set 11: 05’ 38’’, press keys in the following order:
1 1 • 5 • 3 8
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) above for all other items for which cumulative time data is to be
set.
(5) Select the “Accumulated Time” option anew through “Window” on the menu bar.
! The ACCUMULATED TIME window will then disappear.
10-20 E
PART 4
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
– 3-axis Specification (with/without No. 2 Spindle and Y-axis) –

– 2-axis Specification –
H734S40080E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
Rule
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are
“inexecutable” functions.
follows:

DANGER

life or body.
WARNING

machine damage.
CAUTION
HGENPA0029E S-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and
other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check,
solid check, and other functions, if provided.
! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed
rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those
of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from
the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational
speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine.
! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
function is executed without its thorough understanding.
! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
without a thorough understanding.
Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC
! Before using the following cutting conditions:

Function
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken –
! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
S-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in
unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event
WARNING
of contact with the tool.
! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
from the way it did before.
! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the
machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be
interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
units provided with EIA functions.)
! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the
tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function
will not work correctly. (This precaution applies only to the M640MT/MT 5X/T/T NEXUS/TN
and M640M Pro/MT Pro.)
! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs between the machines equipped with
M640M Pro (e-Series such as the INTGEREX e-410, e-650 and e-1060) and the machines
equipped with M640MT/MT 5X/T/T NEXUS/TN/MT Pro (such as the INTGEREX non e-
Series, the SQT Series, the MPX Series and the QTN Series).
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine
operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before
using this system.
Machine with M640MT/MT 5X/T/

Sample program Machine with M640M Pro
T NEXUS/TN/MT Pro
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! For the machines equipped with M640M Pro (e-Series such as the INTGEREX e-410, e-
650 and e-1060), programmed coordinates can be rotated using an index unit of the
MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA
program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180 degrees around
the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus side of the X-axis
in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the program is created
ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected positions may incite
collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command
(G50.1, G51.1).
! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
check function, the solid check function, and other functions, and confirm that the program
operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining
program to change in operational status.
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present
inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit
of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that
position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on
this path.
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the
tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.
S-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
CAUTION
! If the machine employs sliding surface structure, lubrication may prove to be insufficient
during continuous microfeed machining (see Note 1 below), and in the worst case, seizure
of the sliding surface could result. For these reasons, the sliding surface needs to be
maintained in a well-lubricated condition during such machining by, for example, inserting
an oil-film forming program (see Note 2 below).
List of applicable models and intended axes (Models that employ sliding surface structure)
Classification Machine model Axes with sliding surface structure
Lathes INTEGREX 50Y X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
INTEGREX 70Y X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
Vertical machining FJV-35/50/60 Z-axis
centers MTV-515/655/815 Z-axis
V-40/60 Z-axis
For further details and more specific examples, refer to the relevant Machine Operating
Manual, Part 4, Section 1-2, “Precautions for Microfeed Machining (Models that Employ
Sliding Surface Structure)”.
Note 1: Continuous microfeed machining refers to the operation in which the movement of the
intended feed axis through strokes shorter than those required for lubrication is
continuously repeated.
Note 2: The oil-film forming program refers to a program that creates an oil film on the sliding
S-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables
#3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the
corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough
WARNING
notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system
variables before starting the above operations.
! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being
taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the
active program.
! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
CAUTION turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
As a result, serious machine damage will result.
! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
operations. If the multiplier is set to 100 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial
movement will become faster than that expected.
S-6

The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
equipment
Operating Environment
1. Ambient temperature
During machine operation: 5° to 40°C (41° to 104°F)

Note: When power is turned on, if the thermal sensor detects an ambient temperature under
5°C, the hard disk warm-up status indicator lamp will light up and the NC unit will not
start operating at once. After automatic heating of the hard disk by its internal heater,
the lamp will go out and the NC unit will start. It takes about 20 minutes for temperature
to increase from 0 to 5°C in order to avoid condensation due to sudden changes in
temperature.
2. Relative humidity
During machine operation: 30 to 75 % (without bedewing)

Note: As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to
deteriorate quickly.
S-7
- NOTE -
S-8 E
CONTENTS
Page
1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION EXECUTION............................................ 1-1
1-1 Automatic Operation Execution Procedure.........................................................1-1
1-2 Precautions for Microfeed Machining (Models that Employ Sliding Surface
Structure)............................................................................................................1-3
1-2-1 Applicable models and intended axes ................................................................... 1-3
1-2-2 Continuous microfeed machining .......................................................................... 1-3
1-2-3 Measures for continuous microfeed machining ..................................................... 1-4
1-2-4 Operating directions for inserting an oil film forming program ................................ 1-4
1-2-5 Axis load confirmation using the MACHINING - MONITORING display................. 1-6
1-3 Types of Automatic Operation Mode ..................................................................1-8
1-3-1 Auto mode operation............................................................................................. 1-9
1-3-2 Restart mode operation....................................................................................... 1-20
1-3-3 MDI operation ..................................................................................................... 1-26
1-3-4 Single-process mode operation........................................................................... 1-28
2 SELECTING EXECUTION CONDITIONS ........................................... 2-1
2-1 Optional Stop......................................................................................................2-1
2-2 Dry Run ..............................................................................................................2-3
2-3 Machine Lock .....................................................................................................2-4
2-4 Work Light ..........................................................................................................2-5
2-5 Barrier Cancel ....................................................................................................2-5
2-6 Block Skip...........................................................................................................2-6
C-1
2-7 Single Block........................................................................................................2-6
2-8 Comparison Stop................................................................................................2-7
2-9 Threading Position Storage Option ....................................................................2-8
3 CHANGING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS ......................................... 3-1
3-1 Rapid Feed Override ..........................................................................................3-1
3-2 Cutting Feed Override ........................................................................................3-2
3-3 Spindle/Milling-Spindle Override ........................................................................3-3
3-4 VFC Function .....................................................................................................3-4
4 STOPPING AUTOMATIC OPERATION .............................................. 4-1
4-1 Emergency Stop .................................................................................................4-1
4-2 Reset ..................................................................................................................4-2
4-3 Feed Hold...........................................................................................................4-3
4-4 Stopping by Changeover to a Manual Operation Mode......................................4-4
4-5 Single-block Stop ...............................................................................................4-5
4-6 Program Stop .....................................................................................................4-5
4-7 Stopping by Turning the Power Off ....................................................................4-6
5 MANUAL INTERRUPTION.................................................................. 5-1
5-1 Handle Interruption .............................................................................................5-1
5-2 TPS Function......................................................................................................5-3
6 OPERATIONS POSSIBLE DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION........ 6-1
6-1 Data Rewriting ....................................................................................................6-1
C-2
7 COMPLETION OF OPERATION ......................................................... 7-1
7-1 Procedure for Switching the Power OFF ............................................................7-1
7-2 Cleaning and Inspections on Completion of Operation ......................................7-1
C-3
- NOTE -
C-4 E
AUTOMATIC OPERATION EXECUTION 1
1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION EXECUTION
Automatic operation of the machine according to previously created programs and data is
referred to as automatic operation.
Automatic operation becomes possible just by selecting the program to be executed and then
starting it, provided that errors are not present in the program or data. No other operations are
required.
During automatic operation, however, since it is possible to stop the machine action, to change
the cutting conditions, or to generate hand interrupts, these operations may become necessary.
This chapter describes automatic operation execution procedures.
1-1 Automatic Operation Execution Procedure

The description given below assumes that tooling, jaw cutting, machine adjustment,
programming, and automatic operation data setting have already been completed. Here, general
working procedures to be used after completion of those operational setup jobs are described.
H734S4A080E 1-1
Calling up the program to be executed in the automatic operation mode
Selecting automatic operation execution conditions
- Single-block and optional-stop operation

- Dry run and machine locking
- Coolant injection
- Use of barrier release
Adjusting the cutting conditions
- Rapid feedrate overriding

- Cutting feedrate overriding
- Spindle/milling-spindle speed overriding
Mounting a workpiece
Moving the tool away by tool offsetting
- Setting on the TOOL OFFSET display
Automatic operation (Test cutting)
Measuring the machined workpiece and editing the program
- Editing the cutting conditions in the program

- Modifying the tool offset data
Automatic operation (Mass production)
Terminating operation
Turning power off
Checking and cleaning
1-2
1-2 Precautions for Microfeed Machining (Models that Employ Sliding Surface
Structure)
1-2-1 Applicable models and intended axes
Machine model Axes with sliding surface structure

1-2-2 Continuous microfeed machining

If the machine employs sliding surface structure, lubrication may prove to be insufficient during
continuous microfeed machining (see the examples-of-machining below), and in the worst case,
seizure of the sliding surface could result.
1. Examples of continuous microfeed machining
A. O.D. special thread turning
Since the Z-axis repeats microstroke reciprocal movement, lubrication may prove to be
insufficient.
Microstroke reciprocation of the Z-axis
Repeated
D734S1100
Fig. 1-1 Example of continuous microfeed machining (1/2)
1-3
B. “Repeated circular multi-hole flaring” with the X-axis and the Y-axis synchronized at the
workpiece edge
Since the X-axis and the Y-axis repeat microstroke reciprocal movement, lubrication may prove
to be insufficient.
X Microstroke reciprocation
Work-
of the X- and Y-axis
piece
A Y
B C
D734S1101
Fig. 1-2 Example of continuous microfeed machining (2/2)
1-2-3 Measures for continuous microfeed machining

To use continuous microfeed machining, it is necessary to maintain the sliding surface in a well-
lubricated condition by, for example, inserting an oil film forming program (see the Note below)
into the machining program in accordance with Subsection 1-2-4, “Operating directions for
inserting an oil film forming program”.
Note: The oil-film forming program refers to a program that creates an oil film on the sliding
1-2-4 Operating directions for inserting an oil film forming program

1. As directed in Item 1 below, confirm whether the insertion of an oil film forming program is
required.
2. If the insertion of an oil film forming program is required, insert this program into the
machining program, subject to Item 2 below.
1-4
1. Flow of programming for continuous microfeed machining
Creation of the
machining program
[1]
[2]
Is the program likely to YES
[4]
correspond to continuous Idle operation confirmation on the
microfeed machining? MACHINING - MONITORING display
NO [3]
NO
Has the load of the intended
axis increased above 10% of its
initial value?
YES
Stop of no-load operation
Create and insert an oil

Machining film forming program.
Fig. 1-3 Flowchart
<Description>
[1] Before creating the machining program, confirm whether the machining processes include
such continuous microfeed machining processes as shown in Subsection 1-2-2, Item 1,
“Examples of continuous microfeed machining”.
[2] If the program is likely to correspond to continuous microfeed machining, start the machine
under an idle status and confirm the load of the intended axis on the MACHINING -
MONITORING display. See Subsection 1-2-5, “Axis load confirmation using the
MACHINING - MONITORING display”.
[3] If the load on the axis has increased above 10% of its initial machining load, stop the no-
load operation of the machine and then insert an oil film forming program into the machining
program.
[4] Once again, perform checks on the MACHINING - MONITORING display during idle
operation to ensure that the load on the intended axis does not increase above 10% of its
initial machining load.
1-5
2. Inserting an oil film forming program
In the following cases, insert a program that moves all corresponding axes through at least about
2/3 of the respective entire strokes in rapid feed mode:
- When it is necessary that after one microfeed machining cycle has ended, the control of
processing should be moved to the next microfeed machining cycle
- When one microfeed machining cycle of time is long and the axis load increases above 10% of
its initial value (in this case, split the machining program into two segments and then insert the
oil film forming program between the segments.)
A. Example of inserting the oil film forming program
Work- X
piece
Y
A
”Repeated circular multi-hole flaring”

Z
with the X-axis and the Y-axis
B C synchronized at the workpiece edge
Start of the
program
Oil film forming program
Microfeed machining of hole A

Moving each axis for coating
the sliding surface with the
required lubricating oil
Microfeed machining of hole B

Microfeed machining of hole C

End of the
program
D734S1102
Fig. 1-4
1-2-5 Axis load confirmation using the MACHINING - MONITORING display

Confirm the axis load on the MACHINING - MONITORING display during microfeed machining.
See Part 3, OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION, for a
further detailed description of the MACHINING - MONITORING display.
The sliding surface is likely to gall if the axis load increases above 10% of its initial microfeed-
machining load value. In that case, modify the machining conditions within the program or split
one machining cycle into two segments and then insert axis move commands between the
segments so as to allow coating with the required lubricating oil.
1-6
1. Example in which the machining loads on the X-axis and on the 4th axis (Yt-axis) are
indicated on the MACHINING - MONITORING display
Review the program if the axis loads

increase above 10% of the respective
initial machining loads.
D734S1103E
2. Procedure for calling up the MACHINING - MONITORING display
(1) Call up the POSITION display and then press the menu select key at the right end
twice in succession.
! The following menu will be displayed.
WORK No. PART COMMAND POSITION CNC PROGRAM MACHIN. MEASURE TRACE
SHAPE PRESET SIGNAL MONITOR MONITOR.
(2) Press the MACHIN. MONITOR. menu key.

! The MACHINING - MONITORING display shown above will appear.
(3) Press the 2 GRAPH or 4 GRAPH menu key.

! The dialog box for selecting graphical display will be displayed.
(4) Select either “X-AX LOAD”, “Z-AX LOAD”, or “4-AX LOAD”, as the graph to be displayed.
! The dialog box for selecting time display will be displayed.
(6) Press the appropriate cursor control key and set the display range to “Long” (move the knob
within the dialog box to the right end).
1-7
1-3 Types of Automatic Operation Mode

Automatic operation can be executed using the programs registered within the NC unit or
EIA/ISO programs stored on paper tapes, microdisks, or other such external media. The
machine can also be made to automatically execute non-program data that the operator may
have set as required.
1. MEMORY operation
When executing the programs registered within the NC unit, the operator can select either one of
the first three types of automatic operation modes listed below.
1. Continuous operation
This mode is selected by pressing the MEMORY key shown in the figure below. Use this
mode when executing a program through to completion.
MEMORY
Automatic operation key
2. Restart operation
This mode is selected by pressing the RESTART menu key.
Use this mode when restarting a program from the specific position.
3. Single process operation
This mode is selected by pressing the SINGLE PROCESS menu key.
Use this mode when executing only a specific process within a program.
Beware, however, that this mode is not selectable for EIA/ISO programs.
2. TAPE operation
Select the tape operation mode if a registered EIA/ISO program within an external unit is to be
both executed and loaded at the same time.
The tape operation mode will be automatically selected when the lamp of the TAPE key shown in
the figure below is turned on by pressing this key.
Restart operation in this mode is possible. The tape operation mode will be canceled when the
lamp of the TAPE key is turned off by pressing once again this key.
Note: The operation in the tape operation mode varies according to the machine models.
TAPE
Tape run key
1-8
3. MDI operation
Select the MDI mode to let the machine execute non-program data.
This mode is selected by pressing the MDI key shown in the figure below.
MDI
MDI key
The operating procedures for executing automatic operation in following each mode are
described below.
1-3-1 Auto mode operation

Select the auto mode to execute usual machining.
This subsection describes how to use the auto mode when executing the programs registered
within the NC unit or EIA/ISO programs stored on external media such as paper tapes,
microdisks, etc.
1. To execute the programs registered within the NC unit
(1) Select the auto mode.

- To execute a stored program, press the MEMORY key.
MEMORY
(2) Select a program to be executed.

- Carry out the following procedure.
1) Call either one of the following displays:
POSITION display
TRACE display
MEASURE display
SETUP INFORMATION display
2) Press the WORK No. menu key. WORK No. will change into a reverse display status
and the work number window will be displayed.
1-9
3) Set the work number of the program to be executed.

Example: To execute the program of work number 100:
" Key in 1 0 0 in that order, or

INPUT
" Press any cursor key to display the cursor in the window and set the cursor to work
number 100. Then, press the INPUT key .
INPUT
- Selecting in this way a program from those registered within the NC unit is referred to as
“work number search”.
- To execute a program, search for the intended work number.
(3) Select automatic operation execution conditions.
- The menu that contains the menu items shown below is referred to as “execution
conditions selection menu for automatic operation”. And the keys shown below are
referred to as “execution conditions selection keys for automatic operation”.
Selecting these items and keys enables you to determine under what conditions the
machine is to be operated in auto mode.
OPTIONAL STOP: If this item is selected, automatic operation can be stopped at M01
position within the program.
DRY RUN: If this item is selected together with the auxiliary (MF1) key,
automatic operation can be started at a manually adjusted feedrate
instead of the feedrate specified in the program.
MACHINE LOCK: If this item is selected together with the auxiliary (MF1) key,
automatic operation can be started without ever having to actually
move any axes.
WORK LIGHT: If this item is selected, the illumination lamps mounted on the
machine can be turned on.
BARRIER CANCEL: If this item is selected, all barriers (such as the tool barriers, chuck
barriers, etc.) can be released.
BLOCK SKIP: If this item is selected, any block of the program can be skipped
during program execution. This item can be used only if the
program is an EIA/ISO program.
: If this key is pressed, the program can be executed in steps of one block.
- During the automatic operation execution, it is possible to select or cancel the execution
conditions.
- See the Chapter SELECTING EXECUTION CONDITIONS for a detailed description of the
usage of the above menu items and keys.
1-10
(4) Adjust the cutting conditions.
- Perform the following procedure only when adjustments are to be made to the
programmed cutting conditions (feedrate and the peripheral speeds of the spindle/
milling-spindle).
- Adjust the rapid feedrate using the rapid feed override keys. Each time the key is pressed
rapid feedrate changes as follows: 100%⇔50%⇔R2⇔R1⇔R0. The current override
value is displayed in percentage terms on the display.
Note 1: Setting of 100% and 50% cannot be changed.
Note 2: The values of R2, R1 and R0 are set by the following parameters.
R0: parameter B149
R1: parameter B150
R2: parameter B151
Rapid feed
override display
Rapid feed
override keys
D734S0001
- Adjust the cutting feedrate using the cutting feed override keys.
The current override value is displayed in percentage terms on the display.
Cutting feed
override display
Cutting feed
override keys
D734S0002
1-11
- Adjust the peripheral speeds (number of revolutions) of the spindle/milling-spindle using

the spindle/milling-spindle override keys. The current override value is displayed in
percentage terms on the display.
If the symbol is S , the override value is displayed for the spindle, or if the symbol is
M , for the milling-spindle.
Spindle/milling-
spindle override
display
Spindle/milling-
spindle override keys
D734S0003
- During automatic operation, the cutting conditions can be adjusted using the override
keys.
- See the Chapter, CHANGING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS, for a detailed description of
the usage of the override keys.
Note 1: The cutting conditions specified in the program will remain unchanged even after
they have been adjusted using the override keys. Use the VFC function if their
overriding is required. See the Section, VFC Function for details.
Note 2: The cutting feed override becomes 100% during threading or tapping. After these
processes have been completed, the original, preadjusted value is restored
automatically.
Note 3: Separate data is stored for automatic operation and manual operation.
Note 4: Milling-spindle function is an option.
(5) Call the starting part of the program.
- The starting part of the program can be called using the RESET key.
- Press the RESET key to execute a program from the head.
RESET
Reset key
1-12
- Open the status indication window (CNC signal) on the monitor to check that the starting
part of the program is called. When the starting part of the program is called, the P. HEAD
(program head) indicator in the window will come on in red.
Status indication window
D734S0004
(6) Start automatic operation.

- Pressing the CYCLE START button initiates automatic operation.
- Press the CYCLE START button to execute a program.
- The CYCLE START button lamp stays on while automatic operation is in progress, and
turns off when automatic operation terminates.
CYCLE START
Start button
Note 1: Before pressing the CYCLE START button, make sure that the READY indicator lamp
on the operation panel is on.
READY indicator lamp
Note 2: Tool set measurement using the TOOL EYE must not be executed during “manual
interruption”. Otherwise, the restarted automatic operation would probably be executed
according to an unexpected coordinate system.
2. To execute EIA/ISO programs stored on external media (Tape operation)
(1) Connect the external unit to the NC unit.

- For connection between the NC unit and the paper tape unit or microdisk unit you are
going to use, refer to the relevant Operating Manual for the external unit.
(2) Select the auto mode.
- To execute a stored program, press the MEMORY key.
1-13
MEMORY
(3) Select the tape operation mode.

- To execute a program stored on an external device, press the TAPE key. This is valid
when auto mode is selected.
TAPE
Tape run key
(4) Call the POSITION display.

- This display call is required for you to check the intended program and the operational
status of the machine.
(5) Select automatic operation execution conditions.
- The selection method is the same as that used when executing the programs registered
within the NC unit. (See step (3) of the foregoing procedure “To execute the programs
registered within the NC unit”.)
(6) Adjust the cutting conditions.
- The adjustment method is the same as that used when executing the programs registered
- The calling method is the same as that used when executing the programs registered
(8) Start automatic operation.
- The starting method is the same as that used when executing the programs registered
Note: Upon selection of the tape operation mode, ********E is temporarily displayed under
WNo. item on the POSITION display, etc., and will be replaced by the actual work
number upon reading of the related data on the external storage device.
1-14
3. To execute EIA/ISO programs stored on hard disk (HD operation)
A. Outline
With the hard disk (HD) operating function, any large-size EIA/ISO program presaved within a
special folder of the HD contained in the NC unit can be executed for automatic operation while
transferring that program to the NC memory.
B. Preparation for HD operation
To execute HD operation, it is required first to create a machining program and save it into a
special folder of the built-in HD. Create and then save (copy) the desired program into the folder
shown below by either the Explorer accompanying the Windows95 system, or another
commercially available software.
Folder for HD operation programs: C:\T_Direct Mode Programs\
C. Selection of operation mode
1. Selection between HD and conventional TAPE operation modes

The HD operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
function. Use the following parameter to select between the provided operating functions as
required for actual operational conditions:
Name Program type

Address Setting Description
Unit Conditions
range
TAPE mode selection ― The operating function to be selected for the TAPE
operation mode.
P65
0, 1 Immediate 0: Conventional TAPE operating function
1: HD operating function
When the HD operating function is selected, the date and time display area will be used for the
indication of the special operation mode, as shown below, on the POSITION and TRACE
displays. The indication is given, indeed, during actual HD operation, but not during selection of
the MDI or a manual operation mode nor during execution of a program stored in the NC
memory.
Operation
mode
indication
2. HD operation modes
The HD operating function can be used in the following two modes:
1) Direct operation mode
A program stored on the HD is operated in tape mode as the main program.
2) Subprogram operation mode
A program stored on the HD is operated in tape mode as the subprogram from a main
program registered in the NC memory.
1-15
Press the TAPE key to select the direct operation mode, and the MEMORY key to use the
subprogram operation mode of the HD operating function.
TAPE MEMORY
TAPE operation key MEMORY operation key
3. Restrictions concerning theＨＤoperating function

General restrictions on the HD operation are as follows:
- Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.
- Call up the POSITION display to operate the machine in HD mode. Otherwise, the machining
program may create cutter marks on the surface to be machined.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape on the
TOOL PATH display.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be edited on the PROGRAM (EIA) display. Use a
commercially available editor capable of editing text files.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be presented on the EIA MONITOR display.
- The RESTART 2 NONMODAL menu function cannot be applied to a program stored on the
HD.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be subjected to the external work number search.
- The connection of programs cannot be applied to the programs stored on the HD.
(neither between main program and HD program, nor between HD program and HD program).
Further particular restrictions for each HD operation mode are as follows:
For direct operation mode

- The HD main program cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a subprogram-
call command from the HD main program can only the NC memory be searched for, and an
alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- An NC subprogram called up from the HD main program cannot call another HD program as
the further subroutine.
- An alarm will be caused if an “M99” command (used for return from subprogram) is given in the
HD main program.
For subprogram operation mode

- The HD subprogram cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a further sub-
program-call command from the HD subprogram can only the NC memory be searched for,
and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H∗∗” is not effective in calling up
an HD program. The HD subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
- Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up an HD program. The
HD subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.
1-16
- The subprogram call from the NC main program preferably selects a program in the NC
memory to that on the HD in case the specified work number should have been assigned to the
both programs.
- With MAZATROL programs in the NC memory, use a subprogram unit (SUB) to call a
subprogram stored on the HD.
D. Program selection for HD operation
This subsection describes the operating procedure for selecting the program in each mode for
HD operating function.
1. Direct operation mode

(1) Select the machine operating mode for the direct HD operation mode.
- Press the TAPE operation key .
(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.

- This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status of
the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored on the HD.
- Proceed as follows to specify the program:
1) Press the WORK No. menu key.
The display of the menu item is reversed and the work-number listing window appears.
2) Select the desired program from among those stored on the HD.
To specify the program of work No. 100, for example:
Example 1: Press the keys 1 0 0 in this order.

Example 2: Press a cursor key to call up the cursor, move the cursor onto the
displayed work number “100” in the window, and then press the INPUT
key .
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “HD work number search”, to start the direct
HD operation.
2. Subprogram operation mode

(1) Select the machine operating mode for the subprogram operation mode.
- Press the MEMORY operation key .
(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.

- This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status of
the machine.
(3) Specify the desired main program stored in the NC memory.
- Select, or perform work number search for, an NC program (stored in the NC memory)
including the subprogram-call command for the desired HD program.
- The operational procedure required here is just the same as that for normal MEMORY
operation. No HD subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct command for
calling the HD program is not given in the specified NC program.
1-17
E. Restart in the HD operation mode
The restart function is restricted for the HD operation as follows:

- The RESTART 2 NONMODAL menu function cannot be applied to an HD program.
- The subprogram work number can be searched for and restart function can be executed in the
subprogram operation mode only when the selected NC main program is of the EIA/ISO
format.
The restarting procedure for the HD operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
operation. Refer to 1-3-2 “Restart mode operation”.
F. Format for HD operation programs
The programs on the HD to be used for the HD operation must be of the text file format. Use a
commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired programs.
Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.
1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored on the HD for HD operation as directed below. The
file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine operation.
99999999.EIA
Extension
File name
File name Assign a work number.

- The work number must consist of only numerals (0 to 9).
- The work number may be up to eight digits long.
- The work number must begin with a non-zero numeral.
The leading zero of the file name is always ignored, and thus the NC unit cannot
distinguish the following two names, for example, from one another:
1234567.EIA
Both denote work number “1234567”.
01234567.EIA
Extension Identification of an EIA/ISO program

- All programs for the HD operation must have this extension assigned.
1-18
2. Programming format
Create HD operation programs in the following text file format:
- One program must be created for one text file.
- The program must not begin with an EOR code (%) since it is executed from the very first
block.
- Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon ‘;’
must not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.
- The branch instruction (IF – GOTO, WHILE – DO – END) in the macro-program cannot be
used.
- Only characters listed in the table below may be used. Two-byte codes (such as normal-size
characters or uni-codes) are not admissible.
Type Usable characters Remarks

Alphabet - ‘A’–‘Z’ (Capitals only) - Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral - ‘0’–‘9’ - End of block is to be specified by CR + LF or LF.
- ‘．’ (Decimal point) CR: Carriage Return
LF: Line Feed
Symbol - ‘%’ (EOR)
- ‘(’、‘)’ (Parentheses)
- Space code
Others
- Line feed code (EOB)
3. Example of programming
Programs for direct operation mode
O200 • The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Z0
M30 • The program end code must be M30 or M02.

(M99 will cause an alarm.)
%
• Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.
Programs for subprogram operation mode
O200 • The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Z0
M99 • The end of program code must be M99.

% • Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.
1-19
1-3-2 Restart mode operation

Select the restart mode if machining that has been aborted for some reason is to be restarted
from the corresponding portion of the program.
The procedure up to activation of the restart mode is described below.
The following description assumes that operations, such as a search for the work number of the
program you may wish to restart, selection of execution conditions, etc. have already been
completed. See the Subsection Auto mode operation for more details of these operations.
RESET
Reset key
- When the starting part of the program is called, the P. HEAD (program head) indicator in
the status indication window will come on in red.
- Make sure at this time that the READY indicator lamp (ready for operation) on the
operation panel is on.
Status indication
READY indicator lamp
window
1-20
To restart a MAZATROL program:
(2) Select the restart operation mode.
The select process window will be displayed.
Select process window D734S0036E
(3) Select the unit to be restarted.
- Select the desired unit in the select process window.

Using the cursor keys move the reverse display cursor to the name of the unit to be
restarted, and press the key.

INPUT
If the unit to be restarted is not displayed in the window, press and hold down the page key
until that unit is displayed.
Move the reverse

display using the
cursor keys.
Press key to
INPUT
select the unit.
D734S0037E
Note: If the selected unit name has an assigned ＋ or － symbol, a “LAYOUT NOT
COMPLETE” alarm will result.
- When the unit is selected, the select process window will close and the restart
(MAZATROL) window will open.
D734S0038E
Restart (MAZATROL) window
1-21
(4) If necessary, specify the desired number of times of program loopback.

- Specify how many times the program is to be repeated continuously.
Example: If the program is to be repeated three times in succession, press the 3 key
first and then the key.

INPUT
The value “3” will be displayed in the “REPEAT TIMES” field of the window.
D734S0039E
Machining will be performed three times from the restart position even if a continuous
machining is not specified in the END unit of the program.
That is, the order of machining becomes: “from 3 GRV OUT F to the END unit” → “from the
program head to the END unit” → “from the program head to the END unit”.
If, however, the setting of COUNTER in the END unit is “1” and the number of workpieces to
be machined according to the data of COUNTER on the POSITION display is less than the
number of times of restart operation, then the machine will stop operating on completion of
machining of the total number of workpieces that the parts counter on the POSITION
display indicates.
Note 1: If you wish to execute restart operation only once, data need not be input in this
item.
Note 2: To change the specified value, move the reverse display cursor to the data entry
position in the “REPEAT TIMES” field by pressing the key and then enter a
new value.
(5) If necessary, enter the M-code to be executed first.
If M-codes are to be executed prior to restart operation, enter those M-codes.
Example: To enter M19 (Spindle Orient), move the cursor to the M-code entry position by
pressing the key and then press the 1 , 9 and keys, in that
INPUT
order.
D734S0040E
Note 1: A maximum of six M-codes can be entered. Entered M-codes will be executed in the
order that they are displayed.
Note 2: To cancel the entered M-code, press the data cancel key . The M-code set last will
CANCEL
then be cancelled.
1-22
(6) Start restart operation.
- Press the CYCLE START button.
CYCLE START
Start button
- CYCLE START button lamp will light and the M codes that were input during step (5)
above will be executed. After execution of all the input M codes, the program will restart
from the specified restart position.
- The CYCLE START button lamp will go out when program execution ends.
Note 1: Machining cannot be restarted from the middle of the EIA/ISO subprogram called by a
SUB unit.
Example:
UNo. UNIT.....
～
EIA/ISO program
5 BAR OUT R
G28U0W0;
…
5 BAR OUT F Operation cannot be restarted from

6 SUB G1X10.; this section.
…
7 BAR IN R
～
Note 2: Pressing the CYCLE START button closes the restart window.
To restart an EIA/ISO program:

(2) Select the restart operation mode.
The restart (EIA/ISO) window will open.
Restart (EIA/ISO) window D734S0010E
1-23
(3) Input restart command data.

- Input restart position selection data in the following order.
[1]
[2]
[3]
D734S0011E
[1] Input the sequence number of the restart position.

[2] Input the block number of the restart position.
[3] If the sequence number that was input item [1] above is used repeatedly in more
than one position of that program, proceed as follows to specify which of those
positions you wish to restart from.
Example: If the program is constructed as follows:
Main program Subprogram O9001
1st
A N5 G0l... N5 M....
2nd (B),
M98 P9001 3rd (C)
M98 P9001
In this example, sequence number 5 is used in three different positions.

Therefore:
Input “1” to restart from position A.
Input “2” to restart from position B.
Input “3” to restart from position C.
1-24
(4) Make sure that all the data items [1] to [3] above have been filled in and press the INPUT
key.
- A search will be made for the restart position.
- After the search is completed, the status of S-, F-, T- and M-codes of the restart position
will be indicated in the window.
EIA/ISO search window D734S0012E
- If the restart position was not found, then the alarm message will be displayed. In that case,
the restart command data must be checked for errors.
(5) Input restart command data (M-code) in the EIA/ISO search window.
- If an M-code(s) is to be executed prior to restart mode operation, input the M-code(s) in
the EIA/ISO search window.
Example: If you wish to execute M19 (spindle orientation) before restarting the
program:
Press the keys 1 , 9 and in this order.
INPUT
“M19” is registered in the EIA/ISO search window.
Press 1 9 . Press .
INPUT
Displayed here. D734S0013E
Note 1: Up to six M-codes can be input. The input M-code will be executed in the order
that they were input.
Note 2: To cancel an input M-code, press the data cancel key . The M-code set last
CANCEL
will then be cancelled.

(6) Start restart operation.
- How to start restart operation is the same as for MAZATROL programs. See step (6) of the
foregoing procedure “To restart a MAZATROL program”.
1-25
Note 1: Machining cannot be restarted from the middle of a MAZATROL subprogram.

Example:
MAZATROL
(WNo. 100)
G28U0W0
… UNo. 1
… UNo. 2
…
M98 P100
UNo. 5 Operation cannot be restarted from this section.
… …
… UNo. 10
M30
Note 2: The restart search completion status is released only by pressing the RESET key or
selecting other work No. Therefore, once the EIA/ISO search is completed, the setting
of restart block cannot be more cancelled simply by change-over to normal AUTO
mode. Press the RESET key and then the CYCLE START button to execute the
program from the head.
1-3-3 MDI operation

MDI operation refers to the operation in which data that corresponds to an EIA/ISO program is
set by operator as required and executed. MDI operation is used to check particular machine
operation, to carry out operational setup, etc.
The procedure up to activation of the MDI mode is described below.
(1) Select the MDI mode.
- Press the MDI key.
MDI
MDI operation key
- The MDI window will open on the monitor.
D734S0014
(2) Input MDI data.

- Input data using the appropriate address and numeric data keys.
Note 1: Input data in the same format as an EIA/ISO program. Up to 247 characters can
be set.
1-26
Note 2: To erase input data following two methods are used:
CLEAR
- Pressing the clear key causes the character keyed-in last to be cleared.
- To cancel the entire data that has been set, press the data cancel key .
CANCEL
Note 3: Setting for the machine with sub-spindle 0.001° indexing function
In MDI mode, data entering operates only on the main spindle side, so give the
commands G112, G110C2 and G111 for the sub-spindle side regardless of the
head select switch position.
G112: Single shot movement on sub-spindle side by the M and S commands
(Example: G112M3S100;)
G110C2: C-axis command code or 0.001° indexing command on sub-spindle side
(Example: G110C2;G0C45.123; G111;)
G111: Axis command code on sub-spindle side cancel
(Example: G111;)
Menu for sub-spindle command in MDI mode
C M,S
SUB SUB
“G112” is set in the MDI window.

G112 I
“G110C2;_;G111;” is set in the MDI window.

∗ Enter a data at the _ part (insertion mode).
G110C2
I
G111
∗ G-code can be set directly by using the alphanumeric keys without using the
menu key.
(3) Start MDI operation.
CYCLE START
Start button
- The lamp of the CYCLE START button will be turned on and the data that was set in
procedural step (2) will be executed.
- After the entire data has been processed, the CYCLE START button lamp will turn off and
the set data will be cleared.
1-27
1-3-4 Single-process mode operation

Select the single-process operation when a specific unit within the program is to be re-executed
for an improved finish of workpieces.
This mode is also available for executing only the final machining phase (re-finishing) of a
threading unit.
The operating procedure for executing single-process mode operation is described below. This
description assumes that operations, such as work number search for the program to be used for
single-process mode operation, selection of execution conditions, etc. have already been
completed.
For further details, see the description in the Subsection “1-3-1 Auto mode operation”.
Single-process mode operation can be executed only for MAZATROL programs.
(1) Select the single-process mode.

- Press the SINGLE PROCESS menu key. Select process window will open.
Select process window D734S0036E

(2) Select the unit to be executed.
- Select the unit using same procedure as for restart operation for MAZATROL program.
(Refer to step (3) of “To restart a MAZATROL program”).
After selecting the unit, the select process window will close and the single-process
window will open.
D734S0041E
(3) For the THR unit, select whether the workpiece is to be refinished.
- When the unit to be performed is THR (threading), select whether all threading or only re-
finishing (only the last cutting operation) is to be executed.
To select only re-finishing, press the key. The check mark will be displayed at
INPUT
“REFORM” in the window.
D734S0042E
If re-finishing is to be canceled, press the data cancel key .

CANCEL
The check mark will be cleared from “REFORM” in the window.
1-28
RESET
Reset key
- When the starting part of the program is called, the P. HEAD indicator will come on in red.
Make sure at this time that the READY indicator lamp on the operation panel is on.
Status indication READY indicator lamp

window
(5) Start single-process mode operation.

CYCLE START
Start button
- The button lamp will turn on to indicate that the execution of the unit you selected in
procedural step (2) above has begun.
- The CYCLE START button lamp will turn off when the execution of the selected unit ends.
Note: If remachining of workpieces is performed using the single-process mode, the
cumulative tool operation time (USED TIME of the TOOL DATA display) will be
counted but the cumulative number of machined workpieces (USED NUM. of the
TOOL DATA display) will not.
1-29
- NOTE -
1-30 E
SELECTING EXECUTION CONDITIONS 2
2 SELECTING EXECUTION CONDITIONS
The following functions are available with the execution conditions selection menu or key for
automatic operation:
1. Optional Stop
2. Dry Run
3. Machine Lock
4. Work Light
5. Barrier Cancel
6. Block Skip (for EIA/ISO programs only)
7. Single Block
8. Comparison Stop (for EIA/ISO programs only)
9. Threading position storage (only if the re-threading option is valid)
These functions can be selected for all automatic operation modes (auto mode, tape operation
mode, and MDI mode).
During automatic operation, these functions can also be selected or canceled.
Functions 3, 4, 5 and 9 listed above can also be selected during the manual operation mode.
The execution conditions selection menu for automatic operation can be displayed while any one
of the following displays stays on the monitor:
- POSITION display
- TRACE display
- MEASURE display
- SETUP INFORMATION display (SET UP page)
Note: If the execution conditions selection menu is not displayed when one of these displays
has been selected, then press the menu changeover key.
A description of each function and its usage follows.
2-1 Optional Stop

Optional Stop refers to the function that stops automatic operation when processing has
advanced to M01 (M code that specifies Optional Stop) within the program.
Select this function when deciding whether to continue or to discontinue the automatic operation
in progress.
1. Procedure
(1) Set M01 (optional stop) in the position where automatic operation is to be halted.
- For MAZATROL programs, the M code can be set in the following positions:
M code unit: Data item “#1” through “#12”
Manual program mode unit (MNP, MMP): Sequence data item “M”
Machining unit: TPC display data item “M”
- For EIA/ISO programs, the M code can be set in any block.
H734S4B080E 2-1
(2) Press the OPTIONAL STOP menu key.
Reverse display
OPTIONAL
STOP
- OPTIONAL STOP will change into a reverse display status to indicate that the Optional
Stop function has become active.
2. Remarks
- If the above procedure is followed by automatic operation, it will stop when the execution of the
block containing M01 is completed.
- Pressing the CYCLE START button causes automatic operation to be restarted from the next
block.
- Procedural step (2) above can also be carried out during automatic operation.
- Even when procedural step (1) above is carried out, automatic operation will not stop unless
procedural step (2) is carried out.
Function inactive Function active
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
STOP STOP
Program
Automatic operation
UNIT #1 #2 ･････ Stop

M code M 1
unit Restart
MNP UNIT ･････････M OFS Stop

unit MNP 1
Restart
TPC
ROUGH
Machining UNIT… CUTTING M M Stop
unit BAR 1
FINISH Restart
CUTTING M M
Continuous
- The Optional Stop function will become inactive if the reverse display status of OPTIONAL
STOP is cleared by pressing once again the menu key.
2-2
2-2 Dry Run
Dry Run refers to the function that allows you to execute a program using user-adjusted feedrate
data, instead of using the feedrate data specified in the program.
Select this function when checking the machining status.
1. Procedure
(1) Press the DRY RUN menu key while pressing the auxiliary key on the operation panel.
- DRY RUN will change into a reverse display status to indicate that the Dry Run function
has become active.
Reverse display
DRY RUN
Note: For safety reasons, always use the auxiliary key (MF1) together with the DRY
RUN menu key when selecting the Dry Run function.
Pressing only the DRY RUN menu key does not activate Dry Run function.
- At the same time, the cutting feed override display on the monitor will change over to the
display existing during the manual operation mode.
DRY RUN DRY RUN
A relative value with respect to the Code display during the manual
programmed feedrate is displayed in operation mode (see “Cutting feed”.)
percentage terms. D745S0017
(2) Adjust the feedrate using the cutting feed override keys.
2. Remarks
- When the above procedure is followed by automatic operation, the program will be executed
using the adjusted feedrate data.
- Carrying out procedural step (1) above during automatic operation nullifies the programmed
feedrate and the manual cutting feedrate will be selected. The subsequent portion of the
program will be executed using the adjusted feedrate data.
- The Dry Run function will become inactive if the reverse display status of DRY RUN is cleared
by pressing the menu key once again while pressing the auxiliary (MF1) key on the operation
panel.
At the same time, the cutting feed override display on the monitor will change back to the
percentage display existing during the automatic operation mode.
2-3
2-3 Machine Lock

Machine Lock refers to the function that locks the axis movement mechanically.
Selecting this function makes the current position on a display that shows the movements of the
axes exactly as programmed, even though they do not actually move.
Use this function when the program execution status is to be checked.
1. Procedure
(1) Press the MACHINE LOCK menu key while pressing and holding down the auxiliary key
on the operation panel.
- MACHINE LOCK will then change into a reverse display status to indicate that the
Machine Lock function has become active.
Reverse display
MACHINE
LOCK
Note: For safety reasons, always use the auxiliary key (MF1) together with the MACHINE
LOCK menu key when selecting the Machine Lock function.
Pressing only the MACHINE LOCK menu key does not activate the Machine Lock
function.
2. Remarks
- When the above procedure is followed by automatic operation, the program will be executed
without actual movements of all axes except the spindle/milling-spindle.
- To cancel the Machine Lock function, press once again the MACHINE LOCK menu key while
pressing and holding down the auxiliary (MF1) key on the operation panel.
Reverse display status of MACHINE LOCK will be cleared.
- Selecting the Machine Lock function during automatic operation brings automatic operation to
single-block stop at the end of the block being executed. If automatic operation is subsequently
restarted, then the succeeding portion of that program will be executed with the machine
remaining locked.
! Do not cancel the Machine Lock function while the machine is in automatic operation.
If the Machine Lock function is canceled during automatic operation with the machine
remaining locked, actual movements of the axes will begin at the end of the block being
DANGER
executed.
However, under a machine locked status, the machine position that the NC unit stores in its
memory will more or less differ from the actual machine position. After the Machine Lock
function has been canceled, therefore, potentially hazardous situations can arise since the
axes will move in such a disturbed coordinates system.
2-4
2-4 Work Light

Work Light refers to the function that turns on or off the illumination lamps mounted on the
machine.
1. Procedure
- Press the WORK LIGHT menu key. This will change WORK LIGHT into a reverse display
status, turning the lamps on.
- Press the WORK LIGHT menu key once again.
This will clear the reverse display status of WORK LIGHT, turning the lamps off.
Reverse display
WORK
Lamps ON
LIGHT
WORK Lamps OFF

LIGHT
2-5 Barrier Cancel

Barrier Cancel refers to the function that releases the tool barriers, chuck barriers, etc. that have
been arranged on the PARAMETER, TOOL DATA or SETUP INFORMATION displays.
1. Procedure
- Press the BARRIER CANCEL menu key. This will change BARRIER CANCEL into a reverse
display status, releasing all arranged barriers.
- Press the BARRIER CANCEL menu key once again. This will clear the reverse display status
of BARRIER CANCEL, deactivating the Barrier Cancel function.
Reverse display
BARRIER
Barriers released
CANCEL
BARRIER Barriers active

CANCEL
2-5
2-6 Block Skip

Block Skip refers to the function that makes a program skip through specific blocks during
execution. Use this function only in case of EIA/ISO programs.
1. Procedure
(1) Include the slash in the starting part of the block(s) through which you want the program to
skip.
(2) Press the BLOCK SKIP menu key.
- BLOCK SKIP will then change into a reverse display status to indicate that the Block Skip
function has become active.
2. Remarks
- When the above procedure is followed by automatic operation, the program will run skipping
through the designated block(s).
- The Block Skip function will become inactive if the reverse display status of the term that you
selected in procedural step (2) above is cleared by pressing once again the corresponding
menu key.
- Slash can be set only at the head of the block or after the sequence number.
For further details see the EIA/ISO Programming Manual.
2-7 Single Block

Single Block refers to the function that allows you to execute a program on a block-by-block
basis. Select this function to check the machine actions and the machining status.
1. Procedure
(1) Press the key.
- The key lamp will turn on to indicate that the Single Block function has become active.
2. Remarks
- When the above procedure is followed by automatic operation, the CYCLE START button lamp
will go out when the first block within the program is executed. At the same time, automatic
operation will stop.
When automatic operation is restarted by pressing the CYCLE START button once again, the
next block will be executed and automatic operation will stop once again.
- In this manner, once Single Block has been selected, automatic operation restarts each time
the CYCLE START button is pressed, and stops each time one block is executed.
- When the above procedure is performed during automatic operation, it will stop at the end of
the block being executed. The Single Block function will become active when automatic
operation is restarted by pressing the CYCLE START button.
The stop of automatic operation at the end of the block being executed is referred to as single-
block stop.
- The Single Block function will become inactive if the lamp of the key turns off by pressing
once again the key.
2-6
2-8 Comparison Stop
Comparison Stop refers to the function that brings the automatic operation into the single-block
stop at any position externally specified as occasion requires.
This function, however, is only available for EIA/ISO programs.
1. Procedure
(1) Press the COMPARSN STOP menu key.

- This reverses the display status of COMPARSN STOP.
- The comparison stop window will open in the lower left corner.
D734S0018E
(2) Specify the stop position with a work number.

(3) Then specify the stop position with a sequence number.
(4) Finally specify the stop position with a block number.
(5) Then press the key. Then “CHECKING” will be displayed at the left bottom of the
INPUT
comparison stop window.
D734S0019E
(6) Operate the machine in the automatic operation mode.

- The machine will come to a single-block stop when execution of the block designated in
steps (2) to (4) is completed.
D734S0020E
2. Cancellation
If the Comparison Stop is to be canceled, press the COMPARSN STOP menu key again.
- Reversed status of COMPARSN STOP is released and the comarison stop window will close.
2-7
2-9 Threading Position Storage Option

The “Threading Position Storage Option” is a menu function that stores a new threading position
into the memory of the NC unit after the workpiece has been removed from the chuck and
remounted for re-threading.
It is possible to store the re-threading position by selecting this menu function and then engaging
the tool nose of the threading tool with the groove of the thread, and thus to pass the threading
tool through the stored position.
Up to now, when a workpiece that has been removed from the chuck is remounted, the starting
position of re-threading is updated automatically and this requires machining tests. The use of
this option, however, makes machining tests unnecessary, allowing easy re-threading.
1. Procedure
(1) Rotate the re-threading spindle at least one full turn.
(2) Mount in the chuck the workpiece that is to be re-threaded.
(3) Fit the tool nose of the threading tool into the groove of the thread (workpiece) by manual
operations.
- Match the positions of the tool nose and the groove in the Z-axial direction. Matching in the
X-axial direction is not required. During re-threading, the workpiece will be machined at
the X-axis position specified in the program.
Tool
Spindle position
Z-axis
machine position
(4) Press the THR. POS. TEACH menu key.

- The THR. POS. TEACH menu changes to a reverse display status and the THREAD
POSITION TEACH window is displayed.
If storage operations have already been performed, the coordinates stored during the
previous operations will be displayed.
2-8
- The menu changes to reverse display.
- A press of the INPUT

key makes a window display of the Z-axis machine position and
spindle position at the selected spindle side and stores both positions into the memory.
(6) Move the threading tool away from the workpiece.

(7) Initiate automatic operation.
- The threading tool passes through the automatically stored threading position.
2. Correcting the stored threading position
The stored threading position can be corrected as follows:

(1) Display the INCREMENT INPUT menu item by selecting the desired data item using the
cursor keys.
- To cancel incremental input, press the INCREMENT INPUT menu key once again.
(2) Enter a correction value using the numeric keys.
(3) Press the INPUT

key.
- The position obtained by adding the correction value to the previously stored position is
stored into the memory.
3. Erasing the stored threading position

- The ERASE menu changes to a reverse display status
(2) Press the INPUT

key.
- The stored position is erased and the reverse display mode of the ERASE menu is
cleared.
2-9
4. Remarks
- The re-threading function is an option.

To use the re-threading function, the spindle orientation function (for some specific models, an
option) is also required.
- The re-threading program can be of either the MAZATROL or EIA format.
- The threading position, once stored, will be saved even when power is turned off and then back
on.
- Be sure to rotate the spindle at least one full turn before storing the threading position. Alarm
416 AUTO THREAD PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will occur if storage operations are performed
without the spindle being rotated at least one full turn.
- To re-thread the workpiece using the second spindle, select the second spindle in the
headstock selection step and then store the re-threading position.
- During automatic operation, the threading position cannot be stored, edited, or erased. Alarm
428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) will occur if performing those operations is
attempted during automatic operation.
- The re-threading function is valid only for equal-pitched threads.
- The re-threading function is valid only for Z-axial cutting of the threads that include tapered pipe
threads.
- The re-threading function cannot be used for simultaneous threading with both the upper and
lower turrets of this machine.
- Re-threading is impossible during threading in synchronized mode between the first spindle
and the second spindle.
- If address Q (shift angle) is specified in the EIA program for re-threading, the machining tool
path will shift through the address-Q-specified angle with respect to the stored position of the
thread.
2-10 E
CHANGING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS 3
3 CHANGING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS
During automatic operation, especially during test cutting, the cutting parameters specified in the
program may require changing according to the shape of cutting chips, the status of its flyabout,
the load status display of the spindle, axes, and milling-spindle driving motors on the POSITION
display, the degree of as-finished surface roughness of the workpieces, and other factors.
This chapter describes how to modify cutting parameters using the override keys and how to
update cutting parameters using the VFC function.
3-1 Rapid Feed Override

Using the rapid feed override keys, the rapid feedrate during automatic operation can be
adjusted to within the range from 0 to 100 percent of the maximum rapid feedrate specified by
parameter A1. The values of R0, R1 and R2 are set by parameter. If R0, R1 or R2 is selected,
the current override value is displayed in percentage terms on the display.
1. Procedure
- The rapid feedrate increases in the order of R0 →R1 → R2 → 50% → 100% each time the
key is pressed, and continuously increases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The rapid feedrate decreases in the order of 100%→ 50% → R2 → R1 → R0 each time the
key is pressed, and continuously decreases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The 100% is displayed on the monitor while the override keys are not actuated.
Rapid feed
override display
Rapid feed
override keys
D734S0001
Example:
If the maximum rapid feedrate for each axis is preset as follows:
12000 mm/min for the X-axis
24000 mm/min for the Z-axis
36000 deg/min for the C-axis
Overriding 50% as shown in the figure below makes actual rapid feeds into:
X-axis: 12000 × 50/100 = 6000 mm/min

Z-axis: 24000 × 50/100 = 12000 mm/min
C-axis: 36000 × 50/100 = 18000 deg/min
D734S0022
Note: C-axis function is not available for particular machine models.
H734S4C034E 3-1
3-2 Cutting Feed Override

Using the cutting feed override keys, the cutting feedrate specified in the program can be
changed within the range from 0 to 200 percent.
Cutting feed
override display
Cutting feed
override keys
D734S0002
1. Procedure
- The cutting feedrate increases in 10% steps each time the key is pressed, and
continuously increases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The cutting feedrate decreases in 10% steps each time the key is pressed, and
continuously decreases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The current cutting feedrate relative to the original value is displayed in percentage terms on
the display.
Example: If the programmed feedrate is 1000 mm/min:
Overriding this value using the percentage value shown in the figure below will
make the actual feedrate into:
90
1000 × = 900 mm/min
100
D734S0024
2. Remarks
- Axis feeding will not occur if 0 is displayed on the monitor.

- The cutting feedrate will not change even if the cutting feed override keys are pressed while a
threading unit (THR), a tapping unit (TAP), or a milling-tapping unit (MTP) is in progress.
3-2
3-3 Spindle/Milling-Spindle Override

Using the spindle/milling-spindle override keys, the programmed rpm (revolutions per minute)
value of the spindle during the turning mode and/or the rpm value of the milling-spindle during
the milling mode can be changed within the range from 0 to 150 percent of the original values.
1. Procedure
- The spindle/milling-spindle rpm increases in 10% steps each time the key is pressed,
and continuously increases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The spindle/milling-spindle rpm decreases in 10% steps each time the key is pressed,
and continuously decreases when this key is pressed and held down.
- The current spindle/milling-spindle rpm relative to the programmed value is displayed in
percentage terms on the display.
Spindle/milling
spindle override
display
Spindle/milling-
spindle override keys
D734S0003
Example: If the programmed spindle speed is 2000 min-1 (rpm):

Overriding 150% shown in the figure will make the actual spindle speed into:
150 –1
2000 × = 3000 min (rpm)
100
D734S0026
2. Remarks
- The spindle/milling-spindle will not rotate if 0 is displayed on the monitor. When synchronous
feeding, axis feeding does not occur.
- The spindle/milling-spindle rpm will not change even if the spindle/milling-spindle override keys
are pressed while a threading unit (THR), a tapping unit (TAP), or a milling-tapping unit (MTP)
is in progress.
- Even if the spindle/miling-spindle speed that has been overriden using the spindle/milling-
spindle speed override keys is in excess of the maximum allowable value, the actual
spindle/milling-spindle speed will not become higher than the maximum allowable value.
3-3
- Milling-spindle function is not available for particular machine models.

- For the optional threading start position automatic correction function, percentage (%) display
can be changed by pressing the spindle/milling spindle override key during the threading
process. The spindle speed, however, does not change. The specified percentage value is
incorporated into the actual spindle speed, only after threading block.
For threading start position automatic correction option, refer to Section 6-8 Threading of the
MAZATROL FUSION 640 (EIA/ISO) Programming Manual or Section 3-7 Threading Unit
(THR) of the MAZATROL FUSION 640 (MAZATROL) Programming Manual.
3-4 VFC Function

VFC refers to the function that automatically rewrites the programmed cutting parameters, such
as feedrates, peripheral speeds (number of revolutions), etc., with the new parameter data that
has been set using the override keys.
The VFC function can be used only in MAZATROL programs.
The cutting parameters that can be overriden using the VFC function are limited to the cutting
feedrates and spindle/milling-spindle peripheral speeds (number of revolutions).
See “2. Remarks” for a detailed description of this function.
1. Procedure
(1) Change the programmed cutting parameters using the override keys.
(2) Press the VFC key.
- The key lamp will then turn on. When the process being executed terminates, the key
lamp will turn off and the original cutting parameters will be overriden with the new
parameters that were changed in procedural step (1) above.
At this time, the override display will return to 100%.
Example: If the following cutting parameters are preset in a process of the program:
Spindle peripheral speed: 100 m/min
Cutting feedrate: 1 mm/rev
suppose that, firstly, these values are changed, as shown below, using the override
keys during process execution and then the VFC key is pressed.
Lamp turns on.
Step (2)
Step (1)
D735S0027
3-4
During process execution
Though cutting parameters were changed as follows:
Spindle peripheral speed:

120
100 × = 120 m/min
100
Cutting feedrate:
60
1× = 0.6 mm/rev
100
programmed cutting parameters are not yet rewritten.

When the rough-machining process execution is completed, the VFC key lamp will turn off and
the programmed cutting parameters will be replaced with the newly set parameter data.
At the same time, the override display will return to 100%.
On process completion
Programmed cutting parameters are changed as follows:
Spindle peripheral speed:

120
100 × = 120 m/min
100
Cutting feedrate:
60
1× = 0.6 mm/rev
100
Lamp turns off.
D735S0028
3-5
2. Remarks
- Even if during automatic operation feed-hold stop is executed, the VFC function will remain
active.
- The VFC function is inactive if the Dry Run function is active.
- The VFC function will become inactive if any one of the cutting feed override keys or the
spindle/milling-spindle override keys is pressed with the VFC key lamp staying on.
- The VFC function will become inactive if the PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch is set to LOCK.
Pressing the VFC key at this time will display an alarm message 406 MEMORY PROTECT.
PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch

NM210-00414
- During the finish cutting feed, the VFC function is active only for the sequence for which the
VFC key has been pressed.
In one unit, only one line of SEQ data can be updated during one machining cycle.
If the VFC key is pressed multiple times during machining, the update function will become
valid only for the SEQ data being executed when the key was pressed last.
Example:
UNIT F-TOOL
BAR OUT ---------- 1
SEQ SHP-------- ROUGH

1 TPR ---------- a LIN TPR
2 LIN ---------- b
3 ----------- c
NM210-00166
- In the example shown on the previous page, if the VFC key is pressed during LIN machining
(SEQ 2) only b (roughness) for SEQ 2 of the program will be overridden; a or c will not be
overridden.
The override feature will become valid only for c, however, if the VFC key is pressed during LIN
machining (SEQ 2) and then the VFC key is pressed during (SEQ 3).
- When the feedrate specified by the ▼ marking in the sequence data is overridden by using
the VFC key, the feedrate is changed to a corresponding feedrate per spindle revolution.
3-6
- The cutting parameters that can be overridden using the VFC function are listed below for each
process.
○: Overriding possible ×: Overriding impossible －: No unit
Rough-machining Finish-machining
Machining unit Peripheral speed Peripheral speed
Cutting feedrate Cutting feedrate
(rpm) (rpm)
BAR (Bar-materials machining) ○ ○ ○ ○
CPY (Copy-machining) ○ ○ ○ ○
CNR (Corner machining) ○ ○ ○ ○
EDG (Edge machining) ○ ○ ○ ○
THR (Threading) －－ ○ ×
#0 －－ ○ ○
GRV
#1 to #3 ○ ○ ○ ○
(Grooving)
#4, #5 －－ ○ ○
#0 to #2, #4
DRL ○ ○ －－
#0 to #2, #4
(Drilling)
#3, #3 －－ ○ ○
TAP (Tapping) －－ ○ ×
MNP (Manual program mode) × × －－
MES (Measurement) －－－－
M (M code) －－－－
END (End) －－－－
#0 to #2, #4
MDR ○ ○ －－
#0 to #2, #4
(Mill-drilling)
#3, #3 －－ ○ ○
MTP (Mill-tapping) －－ ○ ×
BOR (Boring machining) －－ ○ ○
MGV (Keyway grooving) ○ ○ ○ ○
LCT (Linear milling-Center) ○ ○ ○ ○
RGT (Linear milling-Right) ○ ○ ○ ○
LFT (Linear milling-Left) ○ ○ ○ ○
MMP (Milling manual program mode) × × －－
Note: Milling units are optional.
3-7
- NOTE -
3-8 E
STOPPING AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4
4 STOPPING AUTOMATIC OPERATION
All machine actions must be emergently stopped if any abnormalities occur during automatic
operation, such as in the case where the tool is likely to contact the workpiece, the chuck, etc.
When machining has been executed to a certain extent, it may also become necessary to bring
automatic operation to a halt so that you can check the finished status of the workpieces.
This section describes several types of methods of stopping automatic operation.
Select the best-suited stop method according to the particular machine or machining status and
your requirements.
Of the several methods, those indicated as 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 below, in particular, are most
important methods for safety purposes.
In emergencies, immediately carry out either of these methods.
4-1 Emergency Stop

(1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button.
- All machine actions will then stop immediately.
- An alarm message EMERGENCY STOP will be displayed.
EMERGENCY STOP
Emergency stop button
Releasing the emergency stop status

If automatic operation has been brought to an emergency stop, it becomes possible to carry out
manual operations or restart automatic operation just by releasing the emergency stop status
using the following procedure:
(1) Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button clockwise (direction of the arrow).
- Turning the EMERGENCY STOP button clockwise and then releasing the button will
return it to the original position.
EMERGENCY STOP
Emergency stop button
H734S4D014E 4-1
(2) Press the RESET key.
Reset key READY indicator lamp
- The alarm message EMERGENCY STOP will disappear.

- The READY (ready for operation) indicator lamp will turn on to indicate that the emergency
stop status has been released.
4-2 Reset
(1) Press the RESET key.
Reset key Status indication window
- Pressing the RESET key immediately stops the machine actions (such as the actions of
the spindle/milling-spindle, axes, etc.).
- The starting part of the program being executed is called automatically. (The P. HEAD
indicator in the status indication window will come on in red.)
Note: After a reset operation has been carried out, the program will restart from the beginning,
not from the stop position if automatic operation is restarted by pressing the CYCLE
START button.
Carry out the restart operation if automatic operation is to be restarted from the aborted
portion of the program.
4-2
4-3 Feed Hold
(1) Press the FEED HOLD button.
FEED HOLD CYCLE START
Feed hold button Start button
- Pressing the FEED HOLD button immediately stops the actions of the axes.
- The actions of the spindle/milling-spindle will not stop even when this feed hold operation
is carried out.
Note: When the CYCLE START button is pressed following the feed hold operation, axis
feeding will restart and the succeeding portion of the program will be executed through
to completion.
4-3
4-4 Stopping by Changeover to a Manual Operation Mode
(1) Press one of the manual operation mode selector keys.

- Pressing one of the manual operation mode selector keys immediately stops the machine
actions (movements of the spindle/milling-spindle, axes, etc.)
PAPID HOME
JOG/HANDLE
Manual operation mode selector keys
Note 1: Changing back to the original automatic operation mode and then pressing the CYCLE
START button will let automatic operation restart.
Note 2: After the operation mode has been changed to manual operation during automatic
operation (axis movement) and the axis has been moved, when the mode is returned
to automatic operation and the machine is restarted in automatic operation mode, the
coordinates will be shifted through the particular manual travel of the axis and the
residual travel will be executed. In such a case, therefore, fully check that interference
does not occur.
Movement through the

Manual
“residual travel” existing
interruption
immediately before manual
interruption
P2 P1
Tool path specified in

the program
P1 : Tool-tip position when automatic

Program zero-point operation was interrupted
P2 : Final position of the tool-tip after
manual interruption
: Movement route of the tool-tip
during manual interruption
: Movement route of the tool-tip
when automatic operation is
restarted
4-4
4-5 Single-block Stop

Carrying out one of the two methods described below will stop all machine actions when the
block being executed terminates.
Such a stop is referred to as “single-block stop”.
A. Change the existing automatic operation mode over to another automatic operation mode.
Example: If the program is being executed in the MEMORY mode:
Press the MDI key.
TAPE MEMORY TAPE MEMORY
MDI MDI
- Machine actions will stop at the end of the block being executed.
Note 1: Single-block stop does not occur if the TAPE key is pressed.
Note 2: Changing back to the original automatic operation mode and then pressing the
CYCLE START button will let automatic operation restart from the next block.
B. Press the key.
- The key lamp turns on to indicate that the Single Block function has become active.
- If this operation is carried out, machine actions will stop at the end of the block being
executed.
Note: To restart usual automatic operation, press the CYCLE START button after
turning off the lamp of key by pressing once again the key.
4-6 Program Stop

(1) Set previously the M code M00 (program stop) in the program to be executed.
- Executing the program will let automatic operation stop when M00 is read.
Note: Automatic operation can be restarted by pressing the CYCLE START button.
4-5
4-7 Stopping by Turning the Power Off

(1) Press the power OFF button.
- This will stop all machine actions and turn off the power to the NC unit.
However, if the spindle is rotating it will take some time for the machine actions to stop,
since the spindle will continue rotating due to its inertia.
Power OFF button
Note 1: Using this method causes shocks to the NC unit and the machine, and trouble can
result from repeated use.
Therefore, use this method as the last available means only.
Note 2: When the power of the NC unit is turned off, the power of the machine will be turned off
automatically.
4-6 E
MANUAL INTERRUPTION 5
5 MANUAL INTERRUPTION
Interrupting automatic operation for you to carry out manual operations is referred to as manual
interruption.
Carry out manual interruption in cases that the tool path specified in the programs is to be shifted,
that a damaged tool-tip is to be replaced, etc.
Manual interruption can be carried out during the automatic operation as well as during single-
block stop and feed hold.
5-1 Handle Interruption
Handle interruption refers to the operation by which, during automatic operation, each axis is
moved using the manual pulse handle until the tool path specified in the program is shifted to the
desired pattern.
(1) Press the HANDLE INTERUPT menu key on the POSITION display.
- HANDLE INTERUPT will blink and the manual interruption window (HANDLE) will be
displayed.
HANDLE
HANDLE
X 0.
INTERUPT Z 0.
C 0.
B 0.
Y 0.
Note: The types of axial data that will be displayed depend on the particular machine
specifications.
(2) Shift each axis through the necessary distance using the manual pulse handle.
- For details of the axis-shifting procedures, see the description of “Manual pulse feed”.
- The blinking menu display becomes continually highlighted to indicate that the amounts of
shifting have been set.
- The program will be executed in the coordinates system that has shifted through the
distance you moved the axes.
CYCLE START
Start button
H734S4E031E 5-1
Example: If you moved the X-axis through –0.1 mm

The tool path existing after handle interruption has been performed will be as
follows:
Tool path specified

in the program
0.05 mm (0.1 mm × 1/2)
Tool path after handle

interruption Workpiece
Program zero-point
TR114-00458
Note: If the axis was shifted by handle interruption, the manual interruption window
(HANDLE) is displayed in the POSITION display. The maximum available amount of
shifting can be set by using parameter A12.
Clearing the shift distance data
The shift distance data will be cleared when either one of the following two operations is carried
out. The HANDLE INTERUPT menu display will blink.
A. Press the RESET key during HANDLE INTERUPT is being highlighted.
In this case, the program will return to its starting part.
RESET
Reset key
B. Carry out an axis motion by the same distance in the opposite direction to that of the manual
interruption.
Example: X-axis was moved through 0.1 mm in the minus direction during handle
interruption:
Move the X-axis through 0.1 mm in the plus direction in a similar manner.
Note 1: If the axes that you moved during handle interruption return to the tool rotate position or
the machine zero-point, the shift distance data will be temporarily canceled. However,
when the axes move away from these positions, the shift distance data will become
valid once again.
Note 2: The shift distance data will be also cleared, when the power OFF button is pressed.
5-2
5-2 TPS Function

TPS refers to the function that lets the NC unit store the tool-tip position existing when manual
interruption has been performed into the memory of the unit.
With this function, those positions of the tool-tip at up to five different points which exist during
manual interruption or manual axis movement can be stored into the memory of the NC unit.
Therefore, even after axis movement has been performed following manual interruption,
automatic operation can be restarted without disturbing the tool path specified in the program.
This function comes in handy during automatic operation if a tool is to be replaced because of
damage to the tool-tip or the presence of swarf entangling the workpiece. This function can be
used when the POSITION, TRACE or MEASURE display is presented on the monitor.
The usage of the TPS function is described below.
(1) Interrupt automatic operation.
- See the Section Feed Hold, Stopping by Changeover to a Manual Operation Mode or
Single-block Stop.
(2) Press the TPS menu key.
- The display of TPS will be reversed and the current position of the tool-tip will be stored
into the memory.
(3) Move each axis to the intended positions under manual operation.
- The reversed display of TPS will be released when the axes start to move.
- The relay points through which the axes move can be stored into the memory by pressing
the TPS menu key while the axes are moving. (The TPS menu key can be used up to five
times including one done in procedural step (2) above. The number of points stored by
pressing the TPS menu key is displayed in the lower right corner on the monitor.)
(4) Carry out necessary jobs.
- Carry out tool-tip replacement and other jobs for which automatic operation interruption
was intended.
(5) Restart automatic operation.
- After the mode has been changed back to the original automatic operation mode, press
the CYCLE START button.
TAPE MEMORY
CYCLE START
MDI
Automatic operation Start button
selector keys
- Each axis will return to the position in which the TPS menu key was pressed for the first
time, and automatic operation will restart from the position.
5-3
Example 1: If, as shown below, the TPS menu key was pressed only at the start of automatic
operation interruption and then the tool-tip was passed through the route of P1 →
P2 → P3 → P4 → P5:

the program P4 P5
P2 P3
(F)
P1
Program zero-point
P1 ： Tool-tip position when automatic operation was interrupted

P2～P4 ： Relay points of the tool-tip during manual interruption
P5 ： Final position of the tool-tip during manual interruption
□ ： Position where the TPS menu key was pressed
： Movement route of the tool-tip during manual interruption
： Movement route of the tool-tip at the restart of automatic operation
Ｆ： Cutting feedrate (see Note 1)
Pressing the CYCLE START button will move the tool-tip from P5 to P1 at the
cutting feedrate that remained valid until automatic operation was interrupted, and
automatic operation will restart subsequently.
5-4
Example 2: If, as shown below, the tool-tip was passed through the route of P1 → P2 → P3 →
P4 → P5 and the TPS menu key was pressed at each of points P1, P2, and P3:

the program P4 P5
P2 P3
(R)
(R)
(F)
P1
Program zero-point

R : Rapid feedrate
Pressing the CYCLE START button will move the tool-tip back to P1 via the route
of P5 → P3 → P2 P1, and automatic operation will restart subsequently.
At this time, the tool-tip will move at a rapid feedrate while passing through P5 →
P3 → P2. While passing through P2 → P1, the tool-tip will move at the cutting
feedrate that remained valid until automatic operation was interrupted.
5-5
Example 3: If, as shown below, the TPS menu key was not pressed at the start of automatic
operation interruption but was pressed at each of points P2 and P3 while the tool-
tip was being moved via the route of P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 → P5:
Tool path after the restart of

automatic operation
P4 P5
P2 P3
(R)
(F)

the program P1
Program zero-point

R : Rapid feedrate
Pressing the CYCLE START button will move the tool-tip back to P2 via the route
of P5 → P3 → P2, and automatic operation will restart subsequently.
That is, after the restart of automatic operation, the program will be executed in
the coordinates system that has shifted through the distance form P1 to P2. At this
time, the tool-tip will move at a rapid feedrate while passing through P5 → P3.
While passing through P3 → P2, the tool-tip will move at the cutting feedrate that
remained valid until automatic operation was interrupted.
Note 1: If automatic operation is interrupted during rapid feed, the feedrate programmed in the
cutting feed block closest to the interrupted block will be selected.
If cutting feed blocks do not exist within the area from the starting part of the program to
the interrupted block, the feedrate set in parameter U25 will be selected.
Please note that a “0” setting in parameter U25 will not cause the axes to move.
Note 2: While the tool-tip is returning to the position in which the TPS menu key was pressed
for the first time, do not attempt to stop the movements of the axes and do not press
the TPS menu key.
Note 3: The TPS function is not active during linear milling units (LCT, LFT, RGT) or a
measurement unit (MES).
5-6 E
OPERATIONS POSSIBLE DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION 6
6 OPERATIONS POSSIBLE DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION
6-1 Data Rewriting
1. Data writing conditions
Data setting and other operations on each display are restricted by the operational status of the
machine at a particular time. Also, while program override lock/enable switch remains set to
LOCK (writing disabled), writing or updating the current program or several other types of data
cannot be performed.
Program override switch
This section gives a listing as to what types of data can be set, and what types of display
operations can be carried out, according to the particular operational status (during execution of
automatic operation, during automatic operation mode, or during manual operation mode) of the
machine when the program override lock/enable switch is set to ENABLE (writing enabled) and
when it is set to LOCK (writing disabled).
2. When the program override lock/enable switch is set to ENABLE
Data setting or operations possible/impossible

○: Possible
×: Impossible
△: Impossible only for the program being executed.
▲: When bit 3 of parameter P7 is 0: possible
1: impossible
During During
During automatic manual
Display Data item Operation automatic operation operation Remarks
operation mode mode
selection selection
POSITION Number of machined
○ ○ ○
workpieces
Target number of
workpieces to be ○ ○ ○
machined
Date/Time × ○ ○
Counter set × × ○
Work number search × ○ ○
TRACE Work number search × ○ ○
Figure display ○ ○ ○
H734S4F030E 6-1
During During
operation mode mode
selection selection
MEASURE Number of measure-
○ ○ ○
ment executions
Measurement cycle ○ ○ ○
EIA MONITOR Program edit * Possible
only during
○* ○ ○
single-
block stop
SETUP SET UP Z-offset data of
× ○ ○
INFOR- foreground program
MATION C-offset data of
× ○ ○
foreground program
Chuck barrier
○ ○ ○
valid/invalid
Other chuck barrier
× ○ ○
data
Tail barrier
○ ○ ○
valid/invalid
Other tail barrier data × ○ ○
Z-offset data of
○ ○ ○
background program
C-offset data of
○ ○ ○
background program
Transfer data × ○ ○
SET UP Part number ○ ○ ○
RECORD Comment ○ ○ ○
CHUCK Jaw shape data
JAW × ○ ○
DATA
JAW CUT Automatic creation of
○ ○ ○
DATA jaw cutting program
PROGRAM Display of program ○ ○ ○
Program create/edit △ ○ ○
PROGRAM FILE Program name △ ○ ○
Work number
△ ○ ○
change
Program erase △ ○ ○
All program erase × ○ ○
PROCESS LAYOUT Process editing △ ○ ○
TOOLPATH Display of figure/tool
○ ○ ○
path
SHAPE CHECK Figure display ○ ○ ○
6-2
During During
operation mode mode
selection selection
TOOL DATA Entire data ▲ ○ ○

Tool diameter/Nose R ○ ○ ○
Other data × ○ ○
ID code
× ○ ○
assign/change
Spare tool selection × ○ ○
Tool data
× ○ ○
interchange
Tool data erase × ○ ○
All tool data erase × ○ ○
Tool name × ○ ○
Other data ▲ ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET Entire data ○ ○ ○
All tool offset erase × ○ ○
TOOL LIFE Tool number × ○ ○
Offset number × ○ ○
Other data ○ ○ ○
PARAMETER Entire data × ○ ○
CUTTING CONDITION Entire data ○ ○ ○
WORK OFFSET Entire data ○ ○ ○
MACRO VARIABLE Common variable ○ ○ ○
Common variable
× ○ ○
(check)
Local variable × ○ ○
Local variable
× ○ ○
(check)
DATA I/O Program loading △ ○ ○ CMT
Other data loading × ○ ○
Saving/comparing/
○ ○ ○
directorying
Loading/all loading △ ○ ○ Tape
Punching/all
punching/comparing/ ○ ○ ○
all comparing
Program loading △ ○ ○ DNC
Saving ○ ○ ○
Program loading △ ○ ○ Memory
Other data loading × ○ ○ card
Saving/directorying ○ ○ ○
Program loading △ ○ ○ Floppy disk
Saiving/directorying ○ ○ ○
Program loading △ ○ ○ Hard disk
6-3
3. When the program override lock/enable switch is set to LOCK

Data setting or operations possible/impossible
○: Possible
×: Impossible
△: Impossible only for the program being executed.
▲: When bit 3 of parameter P7 is 0: possible
1: impossible
During During
operation mode mode
selection selection
POSITION Number of machined
○ ○ ○
workpieces
Target number of
workpieces to be ○ ○ ○
machined
Date/Time × ○ ○
TRACE Work number search × ○ ○ Trace mode
Figure display ○ ○ ○
MEASURE Number of
measurement ○ ○ ○
executions
MONITOR (EIA/ISO) Program edit × × ×
SETUP SET UP Z-offset data of
× ○ ○
INFOR- foreground program
MATION C-offset data of
× ○ ○
foreground program
Chuck barrier
○ ○ ○
valid/invalid
Other chuck barrier
× ○ ○
data
Tail barrier
○ ○ ○
valid/invalid
Other tail barrier data × ○ ○
Z-offset data of
○ ○ ○
background program
C-offset data of
○ ○ ○
background program
Transfer data × ○ ○
SET UP Part number × × ×
RECORD Comment × × ×
CHUCK Jaw shape data
JAW × × ×
DATA
SETUP JAW CUT
Automatic creation of
INFOR- DATA × × ×
jaw cutting program
MATION
6-4
During During
operation mode mode
selection selection
PROGRAM Display of program ○ ○ ○
Program create/edit × × ×
PROGRAM FILE Program name × × ×
Work number change × × ×
Program erase × × ×
All program erase × × ×
PROCESS LAYOUT Process editing × × ×
TOOLPATH Display of figure/tool
○ ○ ○
path
SHAPE CHECK Figure display ○ ○ ○
TOOL DATA Tool set ▲ ▲ ▲
Wear compensation ▲ ○ ○
Maximum of tool wear
▲ ▲ ▲
compensation
Tool life TIME ▲ ▲ ▲
management
data NUM. ▲ ○ ○
TOOL EYE
▲ ▲ ▲
compensation
Tool diameter/Nose R ○ ○ ○
Other data × × ×
ID code
× × ×
assign/change
Spare tool selection × × ×
Tool data interchange × × ×
Tool data erase × × ×
All tool data erase × × ×
Tool name ○ ○ ○
Other data ▲ ○ ○
TOOL OFFSET Entire data ○ ○ ○
All tool offset erase × ○ ○
TOOL LIFE Tool number × ○ ○
Offset number × ○ ○
Other data ○ ○ ○
PARAMETER Entire data × × ×
CUTTING Entire data
× × ×
CONDITION
WORK OFFSET Entire data ○ ○ ○
MACRO VARIABLE Entire data × × ×
DATA I/O Program loading △ ○ ○ CMT
Saving/comparing/
○ ○ ○
directorying
Loading/all loading △ ○ ○ Tape
Punching/all
punching/comparing/ ○ ○ ○
all comparing/
6-5
During During
operation mode mode
selection selection
DATA I/O Program loading △ ○ ○ DNC

Saving ○ ○ ○
Program loading △ ○ ○ Memory card
Program loading △ ○ ○ Floppy disk
Program loading △ ○ ○ Hard disk
Note: The types of display and data those will be presented depend on the particular
machine specifications.
6-6 E
COMPLETION OF OPERATION 7
7 COMPLETION OF OPERATION
7-1 Procedure for Switching the Power OFF
! There are high voltage terminals in the electrical control panel, transformers, motors,
junction boxes, etc. NEVER touch these terminals.
DANGER ! Do not touch the switches with wet hands.
(1) Check that all machine operations (program operation, input/output with external devices,
etc.) have been completed.
(2) Press the power OFF button .

" The display on the monitor will disappear.
(3) Set the main circuit breaker to “OFF” position after the lamp of the power ON button
has lighted.
Note: If the main circuit breaker is turned off before the lamp of the power ON button
lights, normal NC function is not guaranteed. It takes maximum one minute until
the lamp of the power ON button lights.
(4) Switch off the factory power supply.
Note: If the machine features the automatic power off function (option), refer to the separately
provided specifications for options.
7-2 Cleaning and Inspections on Completion of Operation

Carry out inspections and cleaning in the following order:
! To prevent accidents, wipe off all oil and water from the floor and dry the floor.
! The use of badly worn tools can result in injury. Replace worn tools with appropriate new
WARNING ones.
! When all machine operations are complete, press the power OFF button on the
operation panel, set the main breaker on the electrical control panel to OFF, then switch off
the factory power supply.
CAUTION
! Check that all machine operations have stopped, and then clean the machine and
peripheral units.
! Do not use compressed air to clean the machine or remove chips.
! Do not clear away chips with your bare hands.
! Make sure that all parts of the lathe are ready for use in the initial status.
(1) Press the power OFF button .

" The display on the monitor will disappear.
(2) Set the main circuit breaker to “OFF” position after the lamp of the power ON button
has lighted.
Note: If the main circuit breaker is turned off before the lamp of the power ON button lights,
normal NC function is not guaranteed. It takes maximum one minute until the lamp of
the power ON button lights.
H734S4G012E 7-1
7 COMPLETION OF OPERATION
(3) Remove chips from the lathe and peripheral equipment.

(4) Tidy the area around the lathe and peripheral equipment.
(5) Inspect each unit and equipment for damage.
(6) Inspect the tools for wear and damage.
(7) Check that the levels of the lubrication unit, the coolant unit, and the hydraulic unit are
correct.
(8) Check that the filters in the lubrication unit, the coolant unit, and the hydraulic unit are not
clogged.
7-2 E
PART 5
APPENDIX
E322S50010E0
CONTENTS
Page
1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE.............................. 1-1
1-1 Principal Specification ........................................................................................1-1
1-2 Spindle Nose Diagram........................................................................................1-7
1-3 Characteristic of Spindle Motor ..........................................................................1-9
1-4 Stroke Diagram ................................................................................................1-11
1-5 Tooling Interference Diagram (QTN-200/250MS, for 12-Faced Turret) ............1-17
1-6 Tooling System Diagram (for 12-Faced Turret) ................................................1-20
1-7 Relation Diagram between Chuck and TOOL EYE ..........................................1-23
1-8 Tailstock Thrust Force Diagram .......................................................................1-25
2 M-CODE LIST....................................................................................... 2-1
3 ALARM LIST......................................................................................... 3-1
C-1
- NOTE -
C-2 E
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE 1
1 STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE
1-1 Principal Specification
1. QTN-200M/200MS
Machine model and specification

Item Unit QTN-200M
QTN-200MS
500U 1000U
Chuck size in. 8
Maximum swing mm (in.) φ675 (26.57)
Standard machining diameter mm (in.) φ276 (10.87)
Maximum machining diameter mm (in.) φ380 (14.96)
Bar work capacity *1 mm (in.) φ65 (2.56)
Capacity
Distance between spindle end and mm 135 - 710 135 - 1220
—
turret end face (in.) (5.31 - 27.95) (5.31 - 48.03)
Distance between chuck jaws of both
mm (in.) — 575 (22.64)
spindles
Max. support weight (Chuck included) 300 (660) [Chuck work] 300 (660) [Main SP]
kgf (lbs)
*3 700 (1540) [Shaft work] 150 (330) [Sec. SP]
–1
Spindle speed *2 min (rpm) 35 - 5000
Spindle nose A2-6
Acceleration and deceleration time
sec 2.3 [For Asia: 3.2]
Main *4
spindle Bore mm φ76 (2.99)
Motor output [half-hourly rating] kW (HP) 26 (35) [For Asia: 18.5 (25)]
kgf·m
Maximum torque 36.0 (260.3) [For Asia: 33.3 (240.8)]
(ft·lbs)
Chuck size in. — 6
–1
Spindle speed min (rpm) — 35 - 6000
Spindle nose — A2-6
Secondary Acceleration and deceleration time
spindle sec — 3.6
*4
Motor output [5/10-min. rating] kW (HP) — 7.5 (10)
kgf·m
Maximum torque [5-min. rating] — 7.7 (55.7)
(ft·lbs)
Center bore MT 5 4 —
Tailstock Travel [Tailstock] mm (in.) 550 (21.65) 1050 (41.34) —
Maximum thrust kgf (lbs) 700 (1540) —
Number of tools (milling tools) pieces 12 (12)
Outside turning 25 (1)
Inside turning φ40 (1.5)
Milling drill Max. φ20 (0.79)
Tool size mm (in.) [Main SP]

M12 (1/2 UNC)
Milling tap (Max.) M12 (1/2 UNC)
[Sec. SP]
Turret
M10 (3/8 UNC)
End-mill Max. φ20 (0.79)
Indexing time Next/opposite pos. sec 0.2/0.6
–1
Milling spindle speed min (rpm) 25 - 4500 (optional: 6000)
Milling motor output [10-min. rating] kW (HP) 5.5 (7.5)
kgf·m
Maximum torque of the milling spindle 3.6 (26.0)
(ft·lbs)
E322S5A010E0 1-1

Item Unit QTN-200M
QTN-200MS
500U 1000U
m/min 30/33 30/33/30
Rapid X/Z/W [MS]
(ft/min) (98/108) (98/108/98)
traverse
C min–1 (rpm) 400
X 230 [225 + 5] (9 [8.875 + 0.125])
Feed axes
575 [570 + 5] 1085 [1080 + 5] 575 [420 + 155]
Z
Travel mm (in.) (22.75 [22.5 + 0.25]) (42.5 [42.25 + 0.25]) (22.625 [16.5 + 6.125])
585 [580 + 5]
W —
(23 [22.875 + 0.125])
L
Coolant tank capacity 160 (42.3) 230 (60.8) 160 (42.3)
(gal (US))
Others
Power
Cont./30-min. rating kVA 40.34/46.20 [For Asia: 30.65/35.90]
requirement
Center height 1020 (40.16)
USA: USA:
2650 (104.33) 2930 (115.35)
Europe: Europe:
Overall Length *2 3290 (129.53)
mm (in.) 2485 (97.83) 2765 (108.86)
dimensions
Asia: Asia:
2430 (95.67) 2765 (108.86)
Width 1780 (70.08)
Total
Height 1840 (72.44)
USA: USA:
4.72 (50.81) 5.22 (56.19)
Europe: Europe:
Floor space required *2 m2 (ft2) 5.86 (63.08)
4.42 (47.58) 4.92 (52.96)
Asia: Asia:
4.33 (46.61) 4.92 (52.96)
Machine weight kgf (lbs) 4900 (10780) 5600 (12320) 5100 (11220)
1-2
Item Unit QTN-200M
QTN-200MS
500U 1000U
Noise level (LpAeq,T) 74
dBA
Uncertainty level (K) 4
1. Spindle speed: 80% of maximum rotational speed
2. Hydraulic chuck activated
Measuring conditions 3. Slides and handling devices stopped
4. Chip conveyor running
Measuring method EN-12415, ISO230-5
Noise
Measuring position
CONTROLLER
Operator’s position
Measuring height: 1.6 m (5.25 ft)

(Note) The main sources of the noise air-conducted from the machine will
include the following:
- Spindle drive - Feed axis drive
- Turret index unit - Chip conveyor
Remarks: The figures quoted are emission levels and are not necessarily safe working levels. Whilst there is a
correlation between the emission and exposure levels, this cannot be used reliably to determine whether
or not further precautions are required. Factors that influence the actual level of exposure of the work-
force include the characteristics of the work room, the other sources of noise, etc. i.e. the number of
machines and other adjacent processes, and the length of time for which an operator is exposed to the
noise. Also the permissible exposure level can vary from country to country. This information, however,
will enable the user of the machine to make a better evaluation of the hazard and risk.
*1: With standard chuck.

*2: Depends upon the type of the chuck used.
*3: The rigidity and holding force of the workpiece support are not allowed for.
*4: Time required for the acceleration from 0 to 85% of the maximum speed (for the hollow chuck). Depends on the
load inertia.
1-3
2. QTN-250M/250MS

Item Unit QTN-250M
QTN-250MS
500U 1000U
Chuck size in. 10
Maximum swing mm (in.) φ675 (26.57)
Standard machining diameter mm (in.) φ276 (10.87)
Maximum machining diameter mm (in.) φ380 (14.96)
Bar work capacity (maximum) *1 mm (in.) φ77 (3.03)
Bar work capacity
Capacity mm (in.) φ74 (2.91)
(with standard chuck)
Distance between spindle end and mm 115 - 690 115 - 1200
—
turret end face (in.) (4.53 - 27.17) 4.53 - 47.24)
Distance between chuck jaws of both
mm (in.) — 541 (21.30)
spindles
Max. support weight (Chuck included) 400 (880) [Chuck work] 400 (880) [Main SP]
kgf (lbs)
*3 700 (1540) [Shaft work] 150 (330) [Sec. SP]
–1
Spindle speed *2 min (rpm) 35 - 4000
Spindle nose A2-8
Acceleration and deceleration time
sec 2.3
Main *4
spindle Bore mm φ88 (3.46)
Motor output [half-hourly rating] kW (HP) 26 (35)
kgf·m
Maximum torque 36.0 (260.3)
(ft·lbs)
Chuck size in. — 6
–1
Spindle speed min (rpm) — 35 - 6000
Spindle nose — A2-6
Secondary Acceleration and deceleration time
sec — 3.6
spindle *4
Motor output [5/10-min. rating] kW (HP) — 7.5 (10)
kgf·m
Maximum torque [5-min. rating] — 7.7 (55.7)
(ft·lbs)
Center bore MT 5 4 —
Tailstock Travel [Tailstock] mm (in.) 550 (21.65) 1050 (41.34) —
Maximum thrust kgf (lbs) 700 (1540) —
Number of tools (milling tools) pieces 12 (12)
Outside turning 25 (1)
Inside turning φ40 (1.5)
Milling drill Max. φ20 (0.79)
Tool size mm (in.) [Main SP]

M12 (1/2 UNC)
Milling tap (Max.) M12 (1/2 UNC)
[Sec. SP]
Turret
M10 (3/8 UNC)
End-mill Max. φ20 (0.79)
Indexing time Next/opposite pos. sec 0.2/0.6
–1
Milling spindle speed min (rpm) 25 - 4500 (optional: 6000)
Milling motor output [10-min. rating] kW (HP) 5.5 (7.5)
kgf·m
Maximum torque of the milling spindle 3.6 (26.0)
(ft·lbs)
1-4
Item Unit QTN-250M
QTN-250MS
500U 1000U
m/min 30/33 30/33/30
Rapid X/Z/W [MS]
(ft/min) (98/108) (98/108/98)
traverse
C min–1 (rpm) 400
X 230 [225 + 5] (9 [8.875 + 0.125])
Feed axes
575 [570 + 5] 1085 [1080 + 5] 575 [420 + 155]
Z
Travel mm (in.) (22.75 [22.5 + 0.25]) (42.5 [42.25 + 0.25]) (22.625 [16.5 + 6.125])
585 [580 + 5]
W —
(23 [22.875 + 0.125])
L
Coolant tank capacity 160 (42.3) 230 (60.8) 160 (42.3)
(gal (US))
Others
Power
Cont./30-min. rating kVA 40.34/46.20
requirement
Center height 1020 (40.16)
USA: USA:
2650 (104.33) 2930 (115.35)
Europe: Europe:
Overall Length *2 3290 (129.53)
mm (in.) 2533 (99.72) 2813 (110.75)
dimensions
Asia: Asia:
2650 (104.33) 2930 (115.35)
Width 1780 (70.08)
Total
Height 1840 (72.44)
USA: USA:
4.72 (50.81) 5.22 (56.19)
Europe: Europe:
Floor space required *2 m2 (ft2) 5.86 (63.08)
4.51 (48.55) 4.42 (47.58)
Asia: Asia:
4.72 (50.81) 5.22 (56.19)
Machine weight kgf (lbs) 5000 (11000) 5700 (12540) 5200 (11440)
1-5

Item Unit QTN-250M
QTN-250MS
500U 1000U
Noise level (LpAeq,T) 74
dBA
Uncertainty level (K) 4
1. Spindle speed: 80% of maximum rotational speed
2. Hydraulic chuck activated
Measuring conditions 3. Slides and handling devices stopped
4. Chip conveyor running
Measuring method EN-12415, ISO230-5
Noise
Measuring position
CONTROLLER
Operator’s position
Measuring height: 1.6 m (5.25 ft)

(Note) The main sources of the noise air-conducted from the machine will
include the following:
- Spindle drive - Feed axis drive
- Turret index unit - Chip conveyor
Remarks: The figures quoted are emission levels and are not necessarily safe working levels. Whilst there is a
correlation between the emission and exposure levels, this cannot be used reliably to determine whether
or not further precautions are required. Factors that influence the actual level of exposure of the work-
force include the characteristics of the work room, the other sources of noise, etc. i.e. the number of
machines and other adjacent processes, and the length of time for which an operator is exposed to the
noise. Also the permissible exposure level can vary from country to country. This information, however,
will enable the user of the machine to make a better evaluation of the hazard and risk.
*1: With option chuck.

*2: Depends upon the type of the chuck used.
*3: The rigidity and holding force of the workpiece support are not allowed for.
*4: Time required for the acceleration from 0 to 85% of the maximum speed (for the hollow chuck). Depends on the
load inertia.
Note: The figures indicated on the machine plates shall be applied if different from the
manual.
1-6
1-2 Spindle Nose Diagram
QTN-200M/MS
30°
M8 through 11-M12 through holes

hole (C1 chamfer at mouth)
φ133.35 φ106.375 (4.19)

(5.25)
7°7'30''
φ169 (6.65)
φ19 (0.75) φ76.75

14.3
(3.02) (0.56)
8 40.3
(0.31) 26 (1.59)
(1.02)
6-M5 10 (0.39)
deep holes
(equidistant)
668.8
(26.33)
628.5
(24.74) φ84
(3.31)
φ76.75 (3.02)
φ92 (3.62)
Unit: mm (in.)
D321S0010
Fig. 1-1 Spindle nose diagram (QTN-200M/MS)
1-7
QTN-250M/MS
30°
M10 through 11-M16 through holes

hole (C1 chamfer at mouth)
φ171.45 φ139.719 (5.50)

(6.75)
7°7'30''
φ209.55 (8.25)
φ23.81
(0.94) φ88.75 (3.49)
15.875
(0.62)
9.53 45.375
(0.38) 29.5 (1.79)
(1.16)
6-M6 10 (0.39)
deep holes
(equidistant)
692.86
(27.28)
647.5 φ97
(25.49) (3.82)
φ88.75 (3.49)
φ107 (4.21) Unit: mm (in.)
D321S0011
Fig. 1-2 Spindle nose diagram (QTN-250M/MS)
1-8
1-3 Characteristic of Spindle Motor

- Characteristic of the main spindle motor (QTN-200M/MS)
Drive unit: SP-260

Max. spindle speed: 5000 min–1
(kW) Max. output: 26 kW
353 N"m (260 ft"lbs) 1/2Ｈ Max. torque: 353 N"m (260 ft"lbs)
26
Continuous rating
22
1/4Ｈ 1/2Ｈ
18.5
15.8
15.0
13.4
0 500 700 1000 1420 3040 5000 (min–1)

D321S0008
Fig. 1-3 Characteristic of the main spindle motor (QTN-200M/MS)
- Characteristic of the main spindle motor (QTN-250M/MS)
(kW) Drive unit: SP-260

353 N"m (260 ft"lbs) Max. spindle speed: 4000 min–1
Max. output: 26 kW
Max. torque: 353 N"m (260 ft"lbs)
1/2H
26
Continuous rating 19.8

22
1/4H 1/2H
18.5 16.7
15
0 500 700 1000 1420 3040 4000 (min–1)

D321S0007
Fig. 1-4 Characteristic of the main spindle motor (QTN-250M/MS)
1-9
- Characteristic of the secondary spindle motor (QTN-200MS/250MS)

Speed range: 35 - 6000 min–1
Output: AC 7.5 kW (10 HP) [10-min. rating]
Output
(kW)
1250 2500
7.5
Constant torque:
75 N"m (55.7 ft"lbs)
6000
0.75
35
0.075
10 100 1000 10000 Speed
–1
min (rpm)
D322S0016
Fig. 1-5 Characteristic of the secondary spindle motor (QTN-200MS/250MS)
- Characteristic of the milling spindle motor (QTN-200M/MS, 250M/MS)

Speed range: 35 - 4500 min–1
Output: AC 5.5 kW (7.0 HP) [10-min. rating]
Output
(kW)
7.5
1500 4500
5.5
Constant torque:
35 N"m (26.0 ft"lbs)
0.75
35
0.075
10 100 1000 10000 Speed
–1
min (rpm)
D322S0017
Fig. 1-6 Characteristic of the milling spindle motor (QTN-200M/MS, 250M/MS)
1-10
1-4 Stroke Diagram
1. QTN-200M (500U)
1322ST00020
Unit: mm
(500U, METRIC)
Drawing No.
Fig. 1-7 Stroke diagram of QTN-200M × 500U - mm -
1-11
2. QTN-250M (500U)
1322ST00120
Unit: mm
(500U, METRIC)
Drawing No.
1-12
3. QTN-200MS
1322ST00011
Unit: mm
(500U, METRIC)
Drawing No.
Fig. 1-9 Stroke diagram of QTN-200MS - mm -
1-13
4. QTN-250MS
1322ST00111
Unit: mm
(500U, METRIC)
Drawing No.
Fig. 1-10 Stroke diagram of QTN-250MS - mm -
1-14
5.
QTN-200M (1000U)
(MAX. TURNING LENGTH FOR 8" SOLID CHUCK)

(MAX. TURNING LENGTH FOR 8" HOLLOW CHUCK)
1-15
(1000U, METRIC)
Unit: mm
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE
1
Drawing No. 1322ST00030

1
6.
QTN-250M (1000U)
(MAX. TURNING LENGTH FOR 10" SOLID CHUCK)

(MAX. TURNING LENGTH FOR 10" HOLLOW CHUCK)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THE MACHINE
1-16
(1000U, METRIC)
Unit: mm
Drawing No. 1322ST00130

1-5 Tooling Interference Diagram (QTN-200/250MS, for 12-Faced Turret)
First process (Main spindle side) [mm]
Max. tool swing diameter φ660
φ25
φ42
φ270 φ58
φ25
φ40
φ42 φ230 φ276
φ276
φ276 140 140
φ270
φ270
140
φ256
φ276
140
170 320 150

φ276
φ16
φ276
φ43
130
φ276
150
φ276
130
150
165
φ43
φ16
φ276 φ276
Unit: mm
Standard machining diameter: 276 mm

* When inner and outer diameter cutting tools are alternately attached to the turret, the standard machining diameter is the
maximum diameter which will permit machining, by a tool mounted to a standard outer diameter tool holder and used to machine
the center of the workpiece end face, without interference from the closest-approaching tool, tool holder, sleeve, etc.
TR113-00202
Fig. 1-13 Tooling interference diagram on main spindle side (for 12-faced turret) - mm -
1-17
Second process (Sec. spindle side) [mm]
Max. tool swing diameter φ660 φ40

φ58
φ216
φ25
φ42
140 φ200
140
166
φ276
125 320 140

φ214
φ58
φ40
φ216
140
φ58
φ276 φ200
140
φ40
φ240 166
φ200
166
φ42 φ216
φ25 φ276
φ276
Unit: mm
Standard machining diameter: 276 mm

* When inner and outer diameter cutting tools are alternately attached to the turret, the standard machining diameter is the
maximum diameter which will permit machining, by a tool mounted to a standard outer diameter tool holder and used to machine
the center of the workpiece end face, without interference from the closest-approaching tool, tool holder, sleeve, etc.
TR113-00203
Fig. 1-14 Tooling interference diagram on sec. spindle side (for 12-faced turret) - mm -
1-18
- NOTE -
1-19
1-6 Tooling System Diagram (QTN-200/250 M/MS; for 12-faced Turret)
1. For the main spindle (Metric system)
Fig. 1-15 Tooling system diagram (for the main spindle) [Metric system]
1-20
Unit: mm
Drawing No. 0322TS00010
1-21
2. For the secondary spindle (QTN-200/250MS) [Metric system]
Unit: mm
2322TS00020
Drawing No.
Fig. 1-16 Tooling system diagram for sec. spindle (QTN-200/250MS) [Metric system]
1-22
1-7 Relation Diagram between Chuck and TOOL EYE
1. Front view
Unit: mm (in.)
36 (12
31
3
8.
(1
6
4.
29
.5
)
4)
7)
44 .75)
(1
(8.2
.4
10
*φ2 *φ2
(10 54
.00
)
.5
49
5)
.9
(1
.2 5
9.
8)
15
(6
.1 )
(2 28
5)
.5 1.
2 54 .5 (
32
4)
22
* φ210 (8.27) for QTN-200M/MS

.7
(8
φ254 (10.00) for QTN-250M/MS
Fig. 1-17 Front view
1-23
2. Side view (with tailstock)
[ ] for QTN-250M
Face cover Surface of spindle
43 (1.69) 322 (12.68) [378.5 (14.90)]

[64.5 (2.54)] 139 (5.47) [156 (6.14)]
97 (3.82) 42 (1.65)
[113 (4.45)] [43 (1.69)]
34 (1.34)
34
φ254 (φ10.00)
φ210 (φ8.27 )
(1.34)
49.5
(1.95)
80 66
(3.15) (2.60)
146 (5.75)
363 (14.29)
Unit: mm (in.)
D320S0004
Fig. 1-18 Side view
1-24
1-8 Tailstock Thrust Force Diagram
Upper
8.0 Tolerance
7.0 Target
6.0 Lower
Tolerance
Measured Value (kN)
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
Selected Value (kN)
Fig. 1-19 Tailstock Thrust Force Diagram
The above graph shows the permissable value allowed for the measured force, compared to the
selected NC value.
1-25
- NOTE -
1-26 E
M-CODE LIST 2
2 M-CODE LIST
!: Standard ": Option #: EIA/ISO
No. Function M MS Remarks
M00 Programmed stop ! !
M01 Optional stop ! !
M02 Program end # #
M03 Spindle normal rotation ! !
M04 Spindle reverse rotation ! !
M05 Spindle stop ! !
M06 Spindle chuck opened " "
M07 Spindle chuck closed " "
M08 Coolant ON ! !
M09 Coolant OFF ! !
↓
M12 Milling spindle mode cancel (Turning mode selection) ! !
M13 Milling tool normal rotation ! !
M14 Milling tool reverse rotation ! !
M15 Milling tool stop ! !
M16 Spindle orientation 0° " "
M19 Spindle orientation as specified " "
M20 Robot service call 1 " "
M30 Program end (reset & rewind) # #
M31 Tail spindle advance !
M32 Tail spindle retract !
M33 Low chuck pressure " "
M34 High chuck pressure " "
↓
M45 Air coolant blow ON " "
M46 One-way turret indexing ! !
M47 M46 cancel (shortest route) ! !
M48 Parts catcher advance " "
M49 Parts catcher retract " "
M50
M51 Error detection OFF ! !
M52 Error detection ON ! !
M53 Chamfering OFF # #
M54 Chamfering ON # #
M55
H322S5B010E 2-1
2 M-CODE LIST

M56 Front door (top door) opened " "
M57 Front door (top door) closed " "
M58 Chuck air blast ON " "
M59 Ready for machining completion (for CPU LINK) " "
M60 Start of milling # #
↓
M66 C-axis clamp # #
M67 C-axis brake # #
M68 Cycle bar feeder call 1 " "
M69 Cycle bar feeder call 2 " "
↓
M81 Air blast for workpiece measurement ON " "
M82 Air blast for workpiece measurement OFF " "
M83 TOOL EYE advance " "
M84 TOOL EYE retract " "
↓
M90 Parts catcher advance (without advance end check) " "
M91 Parts catcher retract (without retract end check) " "
↓
M98 Subprogram call # #
M99 Return to main program # #
M100 Workpiece measurement (DIA.) start " " Auto-output
M101 Workpiece measurement (DIA.) completion " " Auto-output
M102 Workpiece measurement (STP.) start " " Auto-output
M103 Workpiece measurement (STP.) completion " " Auto-output
M104 Workpiece measurement (GRV.) start " " Auto-output
M105 Workpiece measurement (GRV.) completion " " Auto-output
M106 Workpiece measurement (WID.) start " " Auto-output
M107 Workpiece measurement (WID.) completion " " Auto-output
M108 Workpiece measurement (DIS.) start " " Auto-output
M109 Workpiece measurement (DIS.) completion " " Auto-output
M110 Tool tip measurement (TOL) start " " Auto-output
M111 Tool tip measurement (TOL) completion " " Auto-output
M112 External tool compensation (EXT) start " " Auto-output
M113 External tool compensation (EXT) completion " " Auto-output
M114 Z-axis offset measurement (ZOF) start " " Auto-output
M115 Z-axis offset measurement (ZOF) end " " Auto-output
M116 C-axis offset measurement (COF) start " " Auto-output
M117 C-axis offset measurement (COF) end " " Auto-output
↓
M120 Measurement data print out " "
↓
M123 Barrier cancel (chuck/tailstock) ! !
M124 M123 cancel ! !
↓
M130 Spindle cooling fan stop ! !
M131 M130 cancel ! !
2-2
M-CODE LIST 2
M198 MAZATROL program WNo. call # #
M199 MAZATROL program WNo. call (without repetition) # #
M200 Milling point machining start ! ! Auto-output
M201 Milling line machining start ! ! Auto-output
M202 End of milling ! ! Auto-output
M203 Milling tool normal rotation ! ! Auto-output
M204 Milling tool reverse rotation ! ! Auto-output
M205 Milling tool stop ! ! Auto-output
↓
M210 C-axis clamp (Secondary spindle clamp) ! ! Auto-output
M211 C-axis brake ! ! Auto-output
M212 C-axis unclamp (Secondary spindle unclamp) ! ! Auto-output
↓
M231 Tail sleeve retract allowed during spindle rotation "
M232 M231 cancel "
↓
M248 Spindle speed check ! ! Auto-output
M249 Tool change preparation (turret unclamp during axis motion) ! ! Auto-output
↓
M260 Polygon mode ON " "
M261 Polygon mode OFF " "
↓
M300 Secondary spindle selection !
M301
M302 Main spindle selection "
M303 Secondary spindle normal rotation !
M304 Secondary spindle reverse rotation !
M305 Secondary spindle stop !
M306 Secondary spindle chuck opened !
M307 Secondary spindle chuck closed !
↓
M316 Secondary spindle orientation 0° !
M319 Secondary spindle orientation as specified !
↓
M321 Increase of main spindle torque for synchronous rotation "
M322 Cancellation of M321 "
↓
M331 Spindle coil change fixed to high speed ! !
M332 Spindle coil change for higher torque ! !
↓
M351 M248 (Spindle speed arrival signal check) invalid ! !
M352 M248 (Spindle speed arrival signal check) valid ! !
M353 M249 (Turret unclamp during axis motion) invalid ! !
M354 M249 (Turret unclamp during axis motion) valid ! !
2-3
2 M-CODE LIST

M355 ATC completion signal rapid return invalid (Completion after turret ! !
clamping)
M356 ATC completion signal rapid return valid (Completion after turret ! !
indexing)
↓
M358 Secondary spindle chuck air blast "
↓
M370 Axis load detection, invalid " "
M371 Axis load detection, valid " "
M372 Axis load detection, temporarily invalid " "
M373 Axis load detection, re-start " "
M374 NC feed holding on overload detection " "
M375 NC feed holding & spindle stop on overload detection " "
M376 Overload detection level % setting " "
M377 Overload detection time setting " "
M378 Overload detection peak %/detection frequency setting " "
M379 Overload detection table No. registration " "
M380 Spindle synchronous rotation mode ! !
M381 Spindle synchronous rotation mode cancel ! !
↓
M398 Mist collector ON " "
M399 Mist collector OFF " "
↓
M500 Release of chuck open/close interlock during spindle rotation ! !
M501 Cancellation of M500 ! !
M502 Main & secondary spindle synchronous rotation ! Auto-output
↓
M505 Cancellation of M502 ! Auto-output
M506 Master spindle chuck open after slave spindle chuck close ! Auto-output
M507 Slave spindle chuck open after master spindle chuck close ! Auto-output
M508 Pressing start ! ! Auto-output
M509 Cancellation of M508 ! ! Auto-output
M510
M511 Start of synchronous action of spindles ! Auto-output
M512 Cancellation of M511 ! Auto-output
↓
M518 Interlock release for cutting-off a bar workpiece chucked by both ! Auto-output
spindles
M519 Spindle orientation " Auto-output
↓
M527 Check for workpiece chucked in the spindle "
M528 Modal workpiece check in TRS mode "
↓
M540 TRS-CHK mode start !
M541 Cancellation of TRS-CHK mode !
M542 TRS-BAR mode start !
M543 Cancellation of TRS-BAR mode !
2-4
M-CODE LIST 2
M544 Cross-machining start "
M545 Cancellation of cross-machining "
M546 TRS-MOV mode start !
M547 Cancellation of TRS-MOV mode !
↓
M731 Tail thrust 1 selection !
M740
M741 Positioning tailstock to “Position 1” !
M742 Positioning tailstock to “Position 2” !
M743 Positioning tailstock to “Retract” !
M744 Release of spindle rotation interlock against tailstock !
M745 Cancellation of M744 !
2-5
2 M-CODE LIST
- NOTE -
2-6 E
ALARM LIST 3
3 ALARM LIST
1. General
This alarm list gives PLC-related alarms (No. 200 to 381) displayed on the screen of NC unit.
Always refer to this list for eliminating an alarm.
This list is written to be adaptable to all the NC units, and also gives alarms relating to optional
functions. Accordingly, the list includes alarms which are not displayed. Check the type of NC
turning machine purchased by you and its specifications before you read the manual.
For NC-related alarms which are not included in this manual, refer to the separate Alarm List.
2. Explanation of the alarm
If machine failures occur or if erroneous operations are carried out, appropriate alarm numbers
and messages will be displayed in the alarm display area of the screen.
If alarm display appears, refer to the Alarm List to locate and eliminate the cause of the alarm.
One or more alarm numbers and messages may be displayed, depending on the particular
status of alarm occurring. In the event of alarm display, therefore, it is highly recommended that
the operator should call the DIAGNOSIS (ALARM) display and check if other alarms occurred.
3. Structure of the alarm list
This list has following structure.
Type of Stopped Clearing

No. Message error status procedure Display
[1] [2] ( [3], [4], [5] ) [7] [8] [10] [11]
Cause [6]
Action [9]
[1] Alarm number

[2] Alarm message
[3] Work number of the program to which the alarm occurred. (It may not be displayed
depending on the alarm.)
[4] Unit number (MAZATROL program) or sequence number (EIA/ISO program) to which the
alarm occurred. (It may not be displayed depending on the alarm.)
[5] Sequence number (MAZATROL program) or block number (EIA/ISO program) to which the
alarm occurred. (It may not be displayed depending on the alarm.)
[6] Cause of alarm
[7] Type of alarm
In this column, a code (A though G) will be displayed. Each code has following meaning:
A: A wrong key has been pressed. Or the machine has been operated incorrectly.
B: An illegal data was set.
C: Malfunctioning of the servo control mechanism
D: Malfunctioning of the spindle control mechanism
E: Malfunctioning with regard to NC system (hardware/software)
F: Malfunctioning with regard to the machine system (PLC)
G: Malfunctioning of external I/O unit
H322S5C010E 3-1
3 ALARM LIST
[8] Machine status when an alarm occurred.

In this column, a code (H through L) will be displayed. Each code has following meaning:
H: Emergency stop
I: Reset stop
J: Single-block stop
K: Feed stop (hold)
L: Operation continued
[9] Action to be taken to eliminate the cause
[10] Clearing procedure
In this column, a code (M through Q or S) will be displayed. Each code has following
meaning:
M: Power off → Eliminate cause → Power back on
N: Eliminate cause → Power off → Power back on
O: Eliminate cause → Press reset key
P: Press reset key
Q: Eliminate cause → Press data clear key
S: Press data clear key
[11] Color of alarm display
An alarm is displayed in red or blue. An alarm displayed in red indicates a relatively major
error, while an alarm displayed in blue indicates a relatively minor error. The alarm
displayed in red can usually be eliminated with the reset key, and the alarm in blue can be
eliminated with the data clear key.
Note 1: The contents of “Stopped status”, “Clearing procedure” and “Display”, may differ
depending on whether the program to which an alarm occurred belongs to foreground
(state where another program is not executed) or to background (state where another
program is executed). Marks shown with brackets in these columns indicate the case of
background.
Note 2: The table for an alarm which does not exist remains blank.
Note 3: An alarm may not be displayed for certain machine models or versions of NC-software.
Note 4: Alarm messages will be subjected to change without notice.
3-2
ALARM LIST 3
4. Alarm list
200 THERMAL TRIP (EMERGENCY STOP) ( , , ) F H N Red

A motor ON/OFF thermal relay switch has tripped.
Cause
Action
201 BREAKER TRIP ( , , ) F H N Red

The circuit breaker in the power line is tripped.
Cause
Action
202 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F H N Red

An oil pressure decrease below the required level has activated the pressure switch.
Cause
Action
203 AIR PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F H N Red

An air pressure decrease below the required level has activated the pressure switch.
Cause
Action
204 SPINDLE CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F H N Red

An alarm occurred at spindle controller.
Cause
Action
205 MILLING CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F H N Red

An alarm occurred at milling controller.
Cause
Action
206 OPEN FRONT DOOR (EMERGENCY STOP) ( , , ) F H N Red

Front door is opened during automatic operation.
Cause
Action
207 EXT EMERGENCY STOP ( , , ) F H N Red

An external emergency stop signal was input.
Cause
Action
209 INCORRECT TOOL EYE ARM POSITION ( , , ) F H N Red

The TOOL EYE retraction end sensor is turned off during automatic operation. (Only for manual TOOL EYE specification)
Cause
Action
3-3
3 ALARM LIST

210 ILLEGAL DATA INPUT ( , , ) F I O Red

The input program data or parameter is incorrect.
Cause
Action
211 NOT OPERATED M-CODE SIMULTA. ( , , ) F I O Red

M-codes which must not be used in combination were selected at the same time.
Cause
Action
212 CHUCK OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH MALF. ( , , ) F I O Red

The signal from the chuck open/close switch remains ON.
Cause
Action
213 ILLEGAL DESIGNATED TOOL No. ( , , ) F I O Red

A T-code which must not be designated in the program is input, or the command which does not coincide with the magazine
Cause
state is designated.
Action
214 PLC-PARAMETER INPUT ERROR ( , , ) F I O Red

An inconsistency occurred with the parameters which determine the machine specification.
Cause
Action
215 CHUCK SYSTEM MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F I O Red

An erroneous chucking action was detected.
Cause
Action
218 CHUCKING TYPE NOT SELECTED ( , , ) F I O Red

Type of chucking (inner/outer) of spindle chuck is not selected. Or outer chucking was selected for a collet chuck.
Cause
Action
220 TURRET POSITION SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

The turret index sensor fails in function.
Cause
Action
221 TURRET CLAMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

The turret clamp/unclamp sensor fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON simultaneously.
Cause
Action
3-4
ALARM LIST 3
224 CHUCK SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

The chuck open/close confirmation sensor fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON simultaneously.
Cause
Action
225 FRONT DOOR SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

The front door open/close confirmation sensor fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON simultaneously.
Cause
Action
229 C-AXIS CLAMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

One of the spindle clamp/unclamp/brake state confirmation sensors fails in function, or both multiple sensors are ON
Cause
simultaneously.
Action
230 ORIENT INDEX PIN SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

One of the index orient pin IN/OUT confirmation sensors fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON simultaneously.
Cause
Action
231 TOOL EYE POSITION SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

One of the TOOL EYE extension/retraction confirmation sensors fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON
Cause simultaneously.
Action
236 PARTS-CATCHER SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

One of the parts catcher advance/retraction confirmation sensors fails in function, or both of the sensors are ON
Cause
simultaneously.
Action
239 MILLING COUPLING SENSOR MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

One of the sensors at the milling spindle coupling fails in function, or multiple sensors are ON simultaneously.
Cause
Action
242 ROBOT CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

An error occurred at the robot controller.
Cause
Check the cause of error at the robot controller.

Action
243 MEASURING CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

An error occurred at the measurement controller.
Cause
Check the cause of error at the measurement controller.

Action
3-5
3 ALARM LIST

245 BAR-FEEDER CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

An error occurred at the bar feeder controller.
Cause
Check the cause of error at the bar feeder controller.

Action
246 LOADER CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F K O Red

An error occurred at the loader controller.
Cause
Check the cause of error at the loader controller.

Action
247 BORING BAR CONTROLLER MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

An error occurred at the boring bar controller.
Cause
Check the cause of error at the boring bar controller.

Action
248 EXTERNAL CONTROLLER (No.1) MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

Failure of controller of a peripheral unit (option)
Cause
Action
249 EXTERNAL CONTROLLER (No.2) MALF. ( , , ) F K O Red

Failure of controller of a peripheral unit (option)
Cause
Action
250 SPINDLE START MISOPERATION ( , , ) F K O Red

The spindle rotation start command was issued during the disabled state of spindle rotation, specified by a chuck open
Cause
command, a measurement command etc.
Action
251 MILLING MOTOR ROTATION PROHIB. ( , , ) F K O Red

The milling motor rotation start command was issued during the disabled state of milling spindle rotation, specified by a
Cause
chuck open command, a measurement command etc.
Action
252 AXIS MOVE MISOPERATION ( , , ) F K O Red

An axis move command was issued during the ON state of the axis interlock signal.
Cause
Action
253 SPINDLE OVERLOAD DETECTION ( , , ) F K O Red

Spindle overload detection is activated with M70/M71.
Cause
Action
3-6
ALARM LIST 3
255 FRONT COVER OPEN (FEED HOLD) ( , , ) F K O Red

During automatic operation, the front cover was opened.
Cause
Action
256 TURRET ROTATION PROHIBITED ( , , ) F K O Red

The turret rotation command is given during turret rotation prohibited state.
Cause
Action
257 ILLEGAL M-CODE ( , , ) F K O Red

An illegal M-code has been specified.
Cause
Action
258 TNo. MISMATCH ( , , ) F J Q Blue

The No. of the tool to be restarted and that before the interruption differs at the restart after the manual interruption.
Cause
Action
259 MODE CHANGE IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) F J Q Blue

An attempt was made to change the operation mode while it was prohibited.
Cause
Action
260 SLIDEWAY LUBRICATION ALARM ( , , ) F J Q Blue

The sliding surface pressure switch worked for a predetermined time or more.
Cause
Action
261 HEAD LUBRICATION ALARM ( , , ) F J Q Blue

The headstock pressure switch worked for a predetermined time or more.
Cause
Action
262 TABLE LUBRICATION ALARM ( , , ) F J Q Blue

The table pressure swtich worked for a predetermined time or more.
Cause
Action
264 THERMAL TRIP (SINGLE BLOCK) ( , , ) F J Q Blue

A motor ON/OFF thermal relay switch that does not have direct effects on the machining (such as chip conveyor motor) has
Cause
tripped.
Action
3-7
3 ALARM LIST

265 COOLING FAN MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F J Q Blue

The electrical control panel cooling fan stopped rotating.
Cause
Action
266 IRREGAL M-CODE ( , , ) F J P Blue

An illegal M-code has been specified.
Cause
Action
270 SPINDLE ORIENT EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The orientation confirmation signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the orientation command.
Cause
Action
272 TURRET INDEX EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The turret index confirmation signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the turret index command.
Cause
Action
275 ROBOT SERVICE EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The robot service completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the robot service command.
Cause
Action
277 BAR-FEEDER CYCLE EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The bar feeder completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the bar feeder command.
Cause
Action
279 PARTS CATCHER CYCLE EXCEED TI ( , , ) F J P Blue

The parts catcher operation completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the parts catcher
Cause
command.
Action
280 TAILSTOCK BODY EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The tailstock body positioning completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the tailstock
Cause body positioning command.
Action
281 TAILSTOCK QUILL EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The tailstock spindle IN/OUT completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the tailstock
Cause
spindle IN/OUT command.
Action
3-8
ALARM LIST 3
282 CHUCK CLAMP EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The spindle chuck open/close completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the spindle
Cause
chuck open/close command.
Action
286 FRONT DOOR EXCEED TIME ( , , ) F J P Blue

The automatic door open/close completion signal is not turned on within a preset period after the issuance of the automatic
Cause door open/close command.
Action
290 SENSOR MALFUNCTION No.1 ( , , ) F J P Blue

A sensor of a peripheral unit (option) is faulty.
Cause [MULTIPLEX]
The extension and retraction check sensors for the rolled-thread reset bar are not working, or both sensors have turned on
at the same time.
Action

Cause [MULTIPLEX]
The open/close check sensors for the partition plate are not working, or both sensors have turned on at the same time.
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause [MULTIPLEX]
The extension and retraction check sensors for the workpiece measuring arm are not working correctly.
Action
3-9
3 ALARM LIST

297 CHUCK PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F J P Blue

The chucking pressure remains reduced after a preset period has passed.
Cause
Action
298 SUB-CHUCK PRESSURE DOWN ( , , ) F J P Blue

The sub-chucking pressure remains reduced after a preset period has passed.
Cause
Action

Cause [MULTIPLEX]
The torque limiter of the chip conveyor has operated to stop the chip conveyor.
Action
3-10
ALARM LIST 3
300 START COND. ERR. (DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the front cover was opened.
Cause
Action
301 START COND. ERR. (TUR UNCLAMP) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the turret was unclamped.
Cause
Action
302 START COND. ERR. (EXT RESET) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the external reset signal was ON.
Cause
Action
303 START COND. ERR. (EXT FEED HOL) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the external feed hold signal was ON.
Cause
Action
308 C/S ERROR (TOOL EYE EXTEND) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the TOOL EYE sensor was on the measurement position.
Cause
Action
309 C/S ERROR (MIS-CHUCKING) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the chuck workpiece clamp confirmation signal was OFF.
Cause
Action
310 C/S ERROR (TNo. MISMATCH) ( , , ) F L S Blue

During restarting after manual interrupting the tool number used is different from the one used before the operation
Cause
interruption.
Action
311 C/S ERROR (TAILSTOCK QUILL) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The tailstock spindle position differs from the position before the automatic operation stopped. The tailsotck spindle position
Cause for cycle start is improper.
Action
312 C/S ERROR (PT-CATCHER EXTEND) ( , , ) F L S Blue

The start button was pressed while the parts catcher swivels the bucket outward.
Cause
Action
3-11
3 ALARM LIST

314 CYCLE START COND. ERROR B CODE 0 ( , , ) F L S Blue

A peripheral equipment (option) does not satisfy the starting conditions.
Cause
The start button was pressed while the B code was 0.
Action
316 CYCLE START CONDITION ERROR 1 ( , , ) F L S Blue

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action
322 RAPID MODE IMP. (ORIGIN RET UNF) ( , , ) F L Q Blue

The rapid feed mode was selected without carrying out the zero point return operation after the power supply had been
Cause
turned on or the emergency stop state had been released.
Action
323 DIFF. MODE (TOOL SET MEASURING) ( , , ) F L Q Blue

The rapid feed mode or zero point return mode was selected during the tool set measurement operation.
Cause
Action
324 DIFF. MODE (ORIGIN RET UNFIN.) ( , , ) F L Q Blue

The automatic operation mode was selected without carrying out the zero point return operation after the power supply had
Cause been turned on or the emergency stop state had been released.
Action
325 TL. EYE EXT. IMP. ( , , ) F L Q Blue

The TOOL EYE extend command was given although the tailstock spindle retraction end confirmation sensor is not ON.
Cause
Action
3-12
ALARM LIST 3
326 T/S QUILL EXT. IMP. ( , , ) F L Q Blue

The tailstock spindle advance command was given although the TOOL EYE was in the extend position
Cause
Action
329 CHUCKING SELECTION PROHIBITED ( , , ) F L Q Blue

Chuck inner/outer chucking switch is operated in the next condition.
Cause - Spindle rotation
- During automatic operation
Action
332 MISOPERATION No.3 ( , , ) F L Q Blue

Misoperation is made for a peripheral equipment (option).
Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action
3-13
3 ALARM LIST


Cause
Action
343 CONDITION No.4 MISSING ( , , ) F L Q Blue

Operating conditions for a peripheral equipment (option) are not all met.
Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Operationg conditions for a peripheral equipment (option) are not all met.
Cause
Action

Cause
Action

Cause
Action
350 OPERATING SWITCH FAULT ( , , ) A H O Red

A switch on the operation panel was pressed upon turning-on. Or the switch is faulty.
Cause
Action
3-14
ALARM LIST 3
351 SPINDLE CONTACTOR FAULT ( , , ) D H M Red

An error occurred at the spindle contactor (KM1, KM2).
Cause
Related NC input address: X12
Action
352 POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR FAULT ( , , ) D H M Red

An error occurred at the power supply contactor (KM21).
Cause Related NC input address: X0F
Action
354 START COND. ERR (SET UP SW) ( , , ) A I Q Blue

The machine set up switch was ON when the automatic operation was started.
Cause
Action
355 START COND. ERR (C-AXIS OFF) ( , , ) A I Q Blue

The C-axis mode was not selected when the automatic operation was started.
Cause
Action
356 DC 24V POWER SUPPLY FAULT ( , , ) E H M Red

24 V DC was not supplied correctly.
Cause
Action
357 START COND. ERR (TOP DOOR OPEN) ( , , ) A H O Red

The top door was opened.
Cause
Action
360 SPINDLE COOLING MALFUNCTION ( , , ) F J O Red

The spindle cooling fan has stopped rotating.
Cause
Action
361 TAIL ALARM ( , , ) F H N Red

The tailstock amplifier has detected an overload or too great an error.
Cause The tailstock has moved during spindle rotation.
Action
381 COND. MISSING (SET UP SWITCH) ( , , ) A L P Blue

The machine set up switch was turned off.
Cause
Action
3-15
3 ALARM LIST
- NOTE -
3-16 E
Revision Record
Revision No. Revision date Manual No. Revision code (A#, C# or D#)
R0 11. 2003 E322SG0010E0
R1 12. 2003 U322SG0010E
R2 09.2004 U322SG0011E
R3 12.2004 U322SG0012E
R4 03.2005 U322SG0013E
R5 10. 2005 U322SG0014E
Transcription prohibited
It is prohibited to partially or completely transcribe, reproduce or modify this manual
without our permission.
Yamazaki Mazak Corporation

Mazak QT 200 250 Nexus Operating Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mazak QT 200 250 Nexus Operating Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATING MANUAL

QUICK TURN NEXUS

Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak U.K. Limited

Part 1 PRELIMINARIES TO MACHINE OPERATION

Part 2 MACHINE OPERATION

Part 3 OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Part 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. 1-1

1-1 List of Manuals to Be Used.................................................................................1-1

1-2 Numbering System for Pages.............................................................................1-1

1-3 Numbering System for Figures and Tables ........................................................1-1

1-4 Distinction between Standard and Optional Specifications.................................1-2

1-5 Revision Code ....................................................................................................1-2

2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Rule ....................................................................................................................2-1

2-2 Basic Safety Items..............................................................................................2-1

2-3 Clothing and Personal Safety .............................................................................2-3

2-4 Safety Items Related to Operation .....................................................................2-4

2-5 Safety Items Related to Gripping Workpiece and Tooling ..................................2-5

2-6 Safety Items Related to Maintenance.................................................................2-6

2-7 Safety Items Related to Workplace ....................................................................2-7

2-8 Safety Items Related to Chip Conveyor..............................................................2-8

2-9 Safety Equipment ...............................................................................................2-9

2-10 Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC........................2-11

2-11 Safety Nameplates ...........................................................................................2-11

1-1 List of Manuals to Be Used

Manual name Coverage

1-2 Numbering System for Pages

2. For additional pages to be inserted

1-3 Numbering System for Figures and Tables

Fig. 3 - 1 Main machine components (1/2)

Table 2 - 1 Safety nameplate details

Chapter Number Title

1-4 Distinction between Standard and Optional Specifications

QTN-200M/MS, QTN-250M/MS specifications

Item Destination Europe Reference

1-5 Revision Code

Revision code: A = Addition

: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

2-2 Basic Safety Items

DANGER Do not touch any of them under any circumstances.

2-3 Clothing and Personal Safety

2-4 Safety Items Related to Operation

! The use of inflammable lubricant as coolant is not recommended as it is dangerous and

2-5 Safety Items Related to Gripping Workpiece and Tooling

CAUTION ! Perform a test operation after mounting tools and a workpiece.

2-6 Safety Items Related to Maintenance

CAUTION ! Read the maintenance manual thoroughly.

2-7 Safety Items Related to Workplace

2-8 Safety Items Related to Chip Conveyor

2-9 Safety Equipment

No. Location Function

Fig. 2-1 Location of safety devices (1/2)

Fig. 2-2 Location of safety devices (2/2)

2-10 Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

z Before using the following cutting conditions:

2-11 Safety Nameplates

Fig. 2-3 Location of safety nameplates (1/2)

Fig. 2-4 Location of safety nameplates (2/2)

No. Description Parts No.

1 MACHINE OVERVIEW........................................................................ 1-1